Home
Compaq External RAID Controller & Subsystem User's Manual
Contents
1. Terminal Operation 7 44 Chapter 8 Fibre Operation 8 1 Overview This chapter describes the Fibre specific functions available since firmware release 3 21 and above Optional functions have been implemented for operations using Fibre channel and access control under multiple host environments such as Storage Area Network Users familiar with Fibre channel configurations please jump to section 8 5 Summary 8 2 Major Concerns Things you should know before proceeding with configuration 83 Supported Features List of functionality supported by controller FC chips 84 Configuration Samples Configuration options for data bus setting and system drive mapping 8 5 Configuration Host and Drive Parameters The configuration procedures for changing parameters on FC host and drive channels 86 Multi H ost Access Control Learning how to setup the LUN Filtering function a useful tool for access control in multi host environments Fibre Operation 8 1 8 2 Major Concerns Most of the configuration options in this chapter are directly related to controller redundancy Joining two controllers into a dual active pair can eliminate most possible points of failure Configuring a controller pair requires careful planning and proper setup and the requirements can be summarized as follows Redundant Cache Coherency Channels RCC 1 RCC FC
2. Minimum 3 Logical Drive Physical Disks Disks required See EE Capaciy Boi i es Block 2 Striping CL _ f L Block3 A Block d Lrpannal RAID 3 performs Block Striping with Block 4 Dedicated Parity One drive member is GE Block 7 Block 8 dedicated to storing the parity data When wng i a drive member fails the controller can Blocks recover regenerate the lost data of the failed drive from the dedicated parity drive RAID 5 Striping with Interspersed Parity Figure 1 8 RAID 5 Minimum 3 Disks requires Logical Drive Physical Disks SE p Block 1 l Striping non dedicated Parity Block 2 C RAID 5 is similar to RAID 3 but the s parity data is not stored in one ane Block 5 dedicated hard drive Parity Block 6 information is interspersed across the L Bock 4 I drive array In the event of a failure the k controller can recover regenerate the lost data of the failed drive from the other surviving drives RAID 30 an RAID 50 are implemented as logical volumes please refer to the proceeding discussions for more details Functional Description 1 5 1 4 Spare Drives Global and Local Spare Drives Figure 1 9 Local Dedicated Spare When one member drive fails the Local Spare Drive joins the logical drive and automatically starts to rebuild Logical Drive Global Spare Drive es Global Spare Drive os 2 Log
3. 2 10 Chapter 8 Table 8 1 Supported Configurations with Redundant Controller 8 8 Chapter 9 Table 9 1 Peripheral Device Type Parameters 9 15 Table 9 2 Peripheral Device Type Settings 9 16 Table 9 3 Cylinder Head Sector Mapping under Sun Solaris 9 16 Chapter 10 Table 10 1 ID Mapping Status Normal Operation 10 10 Table 10 2 ID Mapping Status Controller Failed 10 10 List of Figures Chapter 1 Figure t T Logical E EE thi ete with iin E 1 1 Figure 1 2 NRAID 3 seu ida ergeet Ee SEA Zeit Eet 1 3 Figure e JBOD EE 1 3 Figure RAID On geet tenet reine a eine ce Mite ete ee 1 4 Figure 5 RAID EE 1 4 Figure 16 RAID OFI leaena A AE A O 1 4 Figure 7 RAID Suir tii aE delish led uh N a W Ga iia 1 5 Figure 8 RAID S 2 aaa a i a a i i 1 5 Figure 1 9 Local Dedicated Spare 1 6 Figure 10 Global Spare 01 gtt a peated dag dE aaa iag 1 6 Figure 1 11 Global Spare Rebuild A 1 6 Figure 1 13 Automatic Rebuild eect tere reer eens eneeeeeeeea 1 9 Figure 1 14 Manual Rebuild A 1 10 Figure 1 15 Logical Volume 1 12 Figure 1 16 Logical Drive Composed of 24 Drives seeseeseesse eseese 1 1
4. a nenn nenn 37 Gontroller Date arid TIME siii uuu nasakuqasuqqanaqqayqhisqssuakiqdaysqiscpaqsaqqaqss 38 TH06Z0r006 ay E E esas apayaq Chua E E PEE EEE TEE 38 RECETTE 39 SCSI Driv Utilitieg u u u Seege dE See saqsa sss asb alus ass 40 SCSI Drive Low level Formatl 40 SCSI Drive Read Write Test 41 Chapter 6 Terminal Screen Messages DREIWEN 1 Malin Mef U u q ete iad ach eee seats aa ka Goeveesneeveubeundetene 2 QUICK lnstallaten u Uu ce cece ceescesesiee ee setae evdecseceeseettees eaii aias 2 Logical Drive Stals ara I dee ee 4 Logical Volume Stat e__ u U uN Saa uiisqa adius busassskasssasssss 5 SCSI Drive TEE 6 SCSI Channel s Status ieena ay asas ae eoe aiaa asua asa 7 Controller Voltage and Temperature 9 Viewing Event Logs on the Screen 10 Chapter 7 Terminal Operation 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 10 Power on RAID Enclosure U u 1 Caching Parameters T 1 Optimization Modes AAA 1 Optimization Mode and Stripe Glze 1 3 Optimization for Random or Sequential WO 3 Write Back Write Through Cache Enable Disable ssssesseesseeseeseereereene 3 Viewing the C
5. 16 9 2 2 Drive side Parameter 18 SCSI Motor Gptrt Up u u ena h nana ieee 18 SCSI Reset at Power Up 19 Disk Access Delay Tieu u a aE S A w tit EA 20 SCSI Mun EE 20 Maximum Tag Count Tag Command Queuing s ssseesseeeseeesereseresrrssrnssrnsens 21 Detection of Drive Hot Swap Followed by Auto Rebuild 22 SAF TE and S E S Enclosure Monitoring 22 Periodic Drive Check Time 22 9 3 9 4 Idle Drive Failure Detection 23 Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time 23 Monitoring and Safety Mechanism s 25 Dynamic Switch Write Polen 25 View Peripheral Device Status U 25 Controller Auto Shutdown Event Trigger Option 26 Disk Array Parameters J u J J T J 27 Rebuild Priorily ET 27 Verification on VIS LLA Ata eEee Nee AE ENKE 28 Chapter 10 Redundant Controller 10 1 10 2 10 3 Operation Theon vaer a aa a re aran aa r Eaa Ne aeea a a eea aaa eaaa apinaa aeaa 10 1 10 1 1 Setup Flowcharis uu u n uu ua a aduana au apiu aaa 10 2 10 1 2 Considerations Related to Physical Connection
6. 6 Cache Dirty Percentage 7 View and Edit Event Logs J ul u 7 Chapter 5 LCD Keypad Operation 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 Power on RAID Enclosure U u uu u 1 Caching Parameters Uu au a shaceecuds NEEN 1 Optimization Mode 1 Optimization Mode and Stripe Glze a nns 2 Optimization for Random or Sequential WO 3 Write Back Write Through Cache Enable Disable 8 View Connected Drives l u u u u u 5 Creating a Logical Drive l J J 6 Choosing a RAID Level u u a dian na asua unay RN De 6 Choosing Member Drives 6 Logical Drive Preferences U u uu uuu 6 Maximum Drive Capacity n n nana 7 Spare Drive Assignments A 7 Disk Reserved Space l n nn 7 Write PONCY EE 7 Initialization Mode Seed 7 le 8 Beginning le ET te DEE 8 Creating a Logical Volumes u u u u 10 Initialization Moda einnar ele L en ee chee eit 10 Witte POliCy TEE 10 Partitioning a Logical Drive Logical Volume 12 Mapping a Logical Volume Logical Drive t
7. Configuration C One logical volume with 4 logical drives As illustrated above should one of the drive channels fail each logical drive loses one of its members Logical drives still have the chance to rebuild its members Data remains intact and the rebuild can be performed after the failed channel is recovered No access interruptions to the logical volume will be experienced from the host side Spare drives assigned to a logical volume A Local Spare can not be assigned to a Logical Volume If a drive fails it fails as a member of a logical drive therefore the controller allows Local Spare s assignment to logical drives rather than logical volumes Functional Description 1 14 Limitations The logical volume can not have any logical drive stated as fatal failed If there is any failed drive in any of its member logical drives controller will start to rebuild that logical drive Should any of the member logical drives fail fatally the logical volume fails fatally and data will not be accessible To avoid alogical volume failure 1 Logical drives as members to a logical volume should be configured in RAID levels that provide redundancy RAID levels 1 0 1 3 or 5 2 Rebuild the logical drive as soon as possible whenever a drive failure occurs Use of local spares is recommended 3 A logical drive should be composed of physical drives from different drive channels Compose the logical drive
8. 10 2 SCSI Based CGontrollers aa asssssss 10 2 Fibre Based Controlers 10 3 10 1 3 Grouping Hard Drives and LUN Mapping 10 4 Logical Drive Logical Volume and Logical Partitions 00sseseeeeeeeeeeeeen 10 5 System Drive Mapping u a n q aaa hain a Wa au awu aa 10 6 Primary and Secondary Des 10 6 Oe le DE 10 7 10 14 TEE 10 8 What Is a Redundant Controller Conftguraton seses neeese 10 8 How does Failover and Failback Work 10 9 A Channel Uess Ee e ale aval ee ANE 10 9 B Controller Failover and Falback 10 11 C Active to Active Configuration 10 11 D Traffic Distribution and Failover Process esesseeeeeeeeneerenens 10 12 SYM PLOM EEN 10 13 Gonriectiori ee a Dee Grates Acetate W eA EE eer 10 13 Preparing Controllers csceceeseessseeeeseeeeeseeessaeseseeeenseeeeseaesnseeeeeeeaess 10 14 10 2 1 Requirement 0 eee cee ecccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeseeeenenaeeeeseneeeeenenees 10 14 Cabling Requirements U 10 14 Controller Settings Q a 10 15 192 ln UE EE 10 16 10 2 3 Configurable Parameterg 10 16 Primary or Secondary 10 16 Active to Active Configuration 10 17 Active to Standby Conf
9. 19 Sample Configuration as g u a eren A S A A uay 20 Configuration Procedure s ssssssssssesssrssrrsstnssrnssrnssrtsstnssrnnsttnsrnnstnnsnnnsnnnnnnnt 20 Chapter 9 Advanced Configuration 9 1 9 2 Fault Preventioliu e arn araneae l KAA An EAA I T P a as sa 1 E EE 1 9 1 1 Clone Failing Drive a 2 Replace after Clone U L U n 2 Perp tual Come uu u na ed heeded eat a a a a eee a a aa 3 9 1 2 S M A R T Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology 5 Configuration Procedure a aa asss 7 Enabling the S M A R T Feature I 7 Examining Whether Your Drives Support S M A R T 7 Using S M A R T Functtons u u u a asas assasi sasa sas aii aai sssi asawa 8 Host side and Drive side SCSI Parameters 11 Foreword SCSI Channel SCSI ID and UN 11 9 2 1 Host side SCSI Parameter 11 Maximum Concurrent Host LUN Connection Nexus in SCSI 11 Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connection 12 Maximum Queued I O Count aa 13 LUNs per Host SCSIID u a eerie cia SEN ege deeg eege 13 BC Ree lee EE 13 Peripheral Device Typo ararsa aga aTe EE E RAET 14 In band SCSI or Eifel 14 Peripheral Device Type Parameters for Various Operating Systems 15 Cylinder Head Sector Mapping
10. Host LUN Geometry User Configurable Default Geometry 1 Capacity lt 64GB Head 63 Sector 32 Cylinder depends on capacity 2 64GB lt capacity lt 128GB Head 64 Sector 64 Cylinder depends on capacity 3 128GB lt capacity lt 256GB Head 127 Sector 64 Cylinder depends on capacity 4 256GB lt capacity lt 512GB Head 127 Sector 127 Cylinder 5 512GB lt capacity lt 1TB Head 255 Sector 64 Cylinder depends on capacity 6 1TB lt capacity Head 225 Sector 225 Cylinder depends on capacity User Configurable Geometry range Sector 32 64 127 255 or Variable Head 64 127 255 or Variable Cylinder lt 1024 lt 382784 lt 65536 or Variable Drive Motor Spin up Supported The controller will send spin up start unit command to each drive at the 4 sec intervals Drive side Tag Command Queue Supported User adjustable up to 128 for each drive Host side Maximum Queued I O count User adjustable up to 1024 Maximum concurrent Host LUN connection User adjustable up to 64 Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN connection User adjustable up to 256 Controller Logical Drive Shutdown Turns controller or specific logical drive into a state that does not receive I Os This function is available through OEM iappend program Drive I O timeout User adjustable IO channel diagnostics Supported Drive Roaming Supported C
11. WER N o Clk DefWid S BKS E z orive 7 s soome mide E on rayne 3 e 7 wal 40 te was C On ses Terminal Operation 7 28 Host Channel Main Menu gt Quick festa istics view and edit Logical drives view view channel Mode view Primary controller scsi id Secondary controller scsi id v scsi Terminator Keen E gg EE Ed v sync transfer oc efWid Term CurSynC1lk Cur s Wide transfer SEN v View and edit scsi target Hide Nar v parity check Ena view chip inFormation e orive 7 maf sereme miae L S Aarre Move the cursor bar to a channel then press ENTER Choose Sync Transfer Clock then press ENTER A list of the clock speed will appear Move the cursor bar to the desired speed and press ENTER A dialog box Change Sync Transfer Clock will appear Choose Yes to confirm Asyne IMPORTANT e Every time you change the SCSI Transfer Speed you must reset the controller for the changes to take effect Setting the Transfer Width lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view channel Mode view view and edit scsi Id scsi Terminator sync transfer Clock Oil Wide transfer TN ac F Enable Wide Transfer 7 i Yes No Narrow On async Marrou 2 Drive 7 6 40 0 Wide S On 200mhz Hide 3 orive v wal 40 0r wide ll ales Narrow Move the cursor
12. 6 When the Firmware completes downloading the controller will automatically reset itself Main Menu Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns 446432 bytes received in FW Binary Programming Flash Download Successful Resetting Controller Please Wait Infortrend Appendix D Event Messages The controller events can be categorized as follows Alert Errors that need to attend to immediately Warning Errors Notification Command processed message sent from Firmware The controller records all system events from power on it can record up to 1 000 events To power off or to reset the controller will cause an automatic deletion of all the recorded event logs RAIDWatch manager sub module Event Monitor can be used to record events on multiple controllers especially when controller reset or power off is an expected action The Event Monitor runs independently on a host computer and can store up to 1000 events per controller unit regardless of the controller s current status The software program is Java based and is usually bundled with RAIDWatch manager Associated details can be found in the RA IDWatch user s manual Descriptions below may contain abbreviations Abbreviations and Capitalized letters are preserved for the coherency with the event messages shown on LCD screen or terminal Event Index Controller Even
13. Periodic SAF TE and SES Bevice Check Time 5S seco Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swa s C Drive Predictable Failure Mode SMART Set Disk Access Delay Time 7 v C Fibre Channel Dual Loop Enabled vi H WG No Driven sid ES Parameters isk Arr Parameters SS seconds Redundant Y controller Parameters 6 seconds Controller Parameters 65 seconds 75 seconds Choose Disk Access Delay Time then press ENTER A list of selections displays Move cursor bar to a selection then press ENTER Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting SCSI I O Timeout The SCSI I O Timeout is the time interval for the controller to wait for a drive to respond If the controller attempts to read data from or write data to a drive but the drive does not respond within the SCSI I O timeout value the drive will be considered as a failed drive When the drive itself detects a media error while reading from the drive platter it usually retries the previous reading or re calibrates the head When the drive encounters a bad block on the media it reassigns the bad block onto a spare block However it takes time to perform the above actions The time to perform these operations can vary between different brands and models of drives During SCSI bus arbitration a device with higher priority can utilize the bus first A device with lower priority will sometimes receive a SCSI I O timeout when devices of hi
14. at 1 llonuoo uonem ijuo 3D jepunpey stat Kerry 3stq sio uueieq SS IPIS uq si jpumieq SOS pts IsoH p lqesiq p lqeusq IWI JJ NUM pu ddyy e d qy uoN tur wapo moien A ssouppy Ai dea lt HOY no ea si j uremd p 0 Spuosas wey Dune A uoneunsog deit mosu mo perq parqesiq parqeug mu uo IS ION mo perq omy auey Qiunuruoo ureN AyuNWWOD Dpueuuo mmo miq iv suomun 1NO eIq Suis GN uongzileniu wapo s sapo uoneIodo wapo dmag wapow Se yoq Wopoyy m8 uuoo Tujur poNW WoIsND So Domm UO noq Wapoy ON suonsung wapo NOO IINOO uo wapo dn 3ueH wapo ons1yu0D wopo mo Mod W po N ut polW WUFOY ULDS m8 uuo q Wopow 1tulyueos Bees aad qeuq qesiq o ucuo IULN ddd qesiqyqeug mm urt L ddd 01 ue 2 iq amoy urtuoo uonem8uuoo 1 Ad ol ueuO El ddd moy unuoo uoneinsyuoD wog 0096 01 eduey Shek ddd OOP8E II pneg Sn101S wPo uonem8uuo dNNS uorpi odO ut polw uoneim8uuo ddd uo UO Uod ZTEZ SU sng uone runuruoo Sat SUYI srojourereg Noen 3 si ppumaeq uonein ijuos HPA pue A IA Navigation Map parqesiq Parqeugy TETSU RT DES A Aa a BUA Dox Dos Dux Jeq lu Aq
15. mdu dur r 12M07 Se OCHOA dura 1 ddn Suny JES ut prog Dox xx NAI huang dur peog quaag dway Aad wag ATI ma AS maat ACC 10 ploysanyy 133311 sued a8ey 0A pue ampdwa L zprog STOEN SE mu du r So ams amad Hduad ID MAA As TI AZI Axx S LAS Asx AC uoy uoneIado Jou 28 Al Ir ULI semgo3 GOT W I aanoymoT DANDY Sig IA Sdn PS amp sneg Imod Sdn lq siq lqeuq s Jamod San Kmpuoa s Gem 3pomy p9 juepunpay lqeuq iq uonoung O uepunpay Woon ICH 1uepunp q vuonem yuoo aotaaq ydu d 1N asenuop qO 1snfpy eu i aanoy yduag auyaq m q prydnad HPA pue Mat Dm sazaq e1 udrr q PS sng saraq Rsaydiiag MAA a lqesiq lqeuq 934 WVACS p lqg9siq Ino urr uorwpea passed 0807 1 llonuoO tueN A9 JoNUOD dsiq pL GOT owe IPD WUJ PSION kam ureN 1 llonuoo 19 Arepuosag aoufday 20012 uo O pmdd garg sdoo agi Sng IS9S PUWYI uoneoruntu0 29 doot eng 199 paqu lqesiqy lqeuq ET PON LAVIS spuoo s 09 OE ST OL aqesta Lues 09 OE OZ OL Z emie am SLUOOT sue lqestd spuoo s OE OL Z C E lq stq Spuoo 9s SZT 9 Z
16. mme Fat or l l q soad 631807 MATA ES QD ON aaen ach CIVa DT um o Poq WAD oump eaor UPA pue MA p ss ns auinjor PAo warp suwed IUNJOA 8S QD Warre Sati CT APS amp pauyed 10N Got BWYI wc SON D71 IL P319319S AT AT Av Av i um oA A ADO sag o syuawUsissy 307 aang u3issy in pen um oA 21207 1 QUIN OA paurjapun ue s 0 i ILII ITA aauq Idg ON auo Iem di q I 10PU2A NT 9T E Hassan las i EAN asetad ka uo ux Side ug soyy zeien snw lduroS yeusig ampeg a 8 80 1S L Mg AD VUM PUL peoy ATUG PLIJ Joy ISO MAUA AQL BAA SSP d aL yoorg peg ert 44 UNSIL AIG Sunsay aug ainsaxq P2Tgesiq pa qeug in9d90 10114 u uA 11oqy Jom prow xuq porqeugyparqesiq u rsse q omy KS I mjss n ywunoq Le smeig PUNOJ I A T Ao uq SoA PAAS Mg IIV p 19 9l S lIV YSEA xtp Surrey uo yoUusIg ampeg aa 88o L lt um oauq u PPV sant xuq ISOS VE Aad dI UNIEN sl vc u ppy aang Aynuapy b ONS quoWwUsIssy 1015 Tnyssaoong auq Auq mds amdg alk q aad SJUSUSISSY JaqUINN 10 S aauig mdg aeq Av dll AAI ISOS MAN WEIS KL velo pg SNIS DALI AD GI opus uontuyap xtd Sead ISOS
17. 1 First enable the Periodic Drive Check Time function In View and Edit Configuration Parameters Driveside SCSI Parameters Periodic Drive Check Time choose a time interval Cache Status Clean SCSI Moter Spin Up Disabled SCSI Reset at Power Up Disabled view is Geess Delay Time seconds Disable view 0_Timeout seconds view Count 22 secon seconds i seconds p de Ste Detect Rer Brive S aD Check Time seconds C Drive Predictable Failure Mode SMART Disable seconds k Fibre Channel Dual Loop Enabled L ee a Dis Array Parameters Redundant Controller Parameters Controller Parameters 2 In View and Edit Configuration Parameters Drive side SCSI Parameters Drive Predictable Failure Mode lt SMART gt choose one from Detect Only Detect Perpetual Clone and Detect Clone Replace ache Status ean Motor Spin Up Disabled Reset at Power Up Disabled k Access Delay Time 60 seconds S i I 0_Timeout oo 10 seconds Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time 5 seconds periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time H Papa Oven er net tiene etect Detect and Perpetual Clone Redu Detect and Clone Replace on Examining Whether Your Drives Support S M A R T To seeif your drive supports S M A R T follow the steps below 3 Enable S M A R T for your drives in the RAID system 4
18. All channels on one controller must be connected to the same channels on its counterpart 10 14 Infortrend Controller Settings 1 Enable Redundant Controller Main Menu View and Edit Peripheral Devices Set Peripheral Device Entry Redundant Controller Enable Disable 2 Controller U nique Identifier Set unique identifier to each controller View amp Edit Peripheral Devices Set Peripheral Device Entry Controller Unique Identifier Enter a hex number between 0 and FFFFF firmware 3 25 and above for each controller 3 Create Primary and Secondary IDs on Drive Channels View and Edit SCSI Channels Choose a Drive Channel Primary Secondary Controller SCSI ID 4 Create Primary and Secondary IDs on Host Channels View and Edit SCSI Channels Choose a host channel gt View and Edit SCSI ID Choose a SCSI ID Add Delete Channel SCSI ID gt Primary Secondary Controller Add SCSI ID from the list Reset the controller for the configuration to take effect 5 Create Logical Configurations of Drives and assign each of them either to the Primary or the Secondary Controller View and Edit Logical Drive Select a RAID level Select member drives Logical Drive Assignments Create Logical Drive 6 Map Each Logical Configuration of Drives to the Primary Secondary ID on host channel s View and Edit Host LUN Choose a host channel I D controller combination Choose Logical Drive Logical
19. Maximum Drive then press ENT The maximum drive Capacity ai capacity refers to the maximum capacity that will be used in each member drive Use Y and A to change the maximum MaxSiz 1010MB size that will be used on each drive Set to 1010MB Spare Drive Assignments Local Spare Drive can also be assigned here Press Y or A to choose Spare Assignments d Drive Assignments then press ENT Available drives will be listed Use Y or A to browse through the drive list then press ENT to select the drive you wish to use as the Local Spare Drive Press ENT again for two seconds Disk Reserved Space This menu allows you to change the Disk Rev Space size of disk reserved space Default is 256MB d 256MB We recommended using the default value Choices are 256MB and 64KB With 64KB logical drives are backward compatible to RAID controllers running earlier firmware versions Press ENT and use the Y or A keys to choose the size you prefer You may also refer to Appendix E for more details about disk reserved space Write Policy This menu allows you to set the Write Policy caching mode policy for this specific Default logical drive Default is a neutral value that is coordinated with the controller s caching mode setting Other choices are Write Back and Write Through Initialization Mode A J Initialization This menu allows you to determine if Mode Galine lt the logic
20. OT 8 P TI att Spuoo s QT 9 L JOA 9 p T SU OOS oc 0 ed ON tut L Keja ysta 19S alqestq lqeuq SIIM AUA PUIN UO SIM PIINGSY AT tO SOIL 9 43H Pond ION MOT door fen 149 aqta IPON LAVINS yypoiny demg aq pond IW LNUO AL AYS Ponad WLA uq pond juno Sey unue mosu L O I ISOS yasoy lqestq lqeuq dn uids K e j 10019 lqestq lqeusq dp tamog ye Ke q ss 33v ys1q HUJ dn iamod W 1359H dn udg 109014 L srajaureseg u0 mo niyup Ipo Juepunpoy smowerd keny eg saojoumereg uopean3yuop siapwewed SOS APIS 1q NPA pue Mary xe E E S1u A 1 onuoo i S olu A ON SNIS IMUN peojumoq A IA o RUE ADOL spuodag z ss 1d s307 ua UPA pue MIA Sisi ou sysiq woy WAN asoy lt WVXAN 2101894 i sysiq sys sys q oi OI NVUYAN Avg WVUAN 242g IO PS 1 llonuoo 1 ldutobouAopinus lt sty umopinyg lt i eM SP d 1 llonnuo W 1 llonuoO Sunm s sq SUL 1989y nyssaoong Plomsseg asuryD lt pioxAssueq d WA 2y 4 plomsseg M N f C peog seg IQ Aa peog seg 3We N 100 dnyoeg Aroneg lt aquinyy PUIS midd MA uOISISA pios nooq SUOTSIO
21. Press Y or to scroll through the list of member drives View and Fdit Logical Drives Deleting a Logical Drive Press ENT for two seconds to enter the view and Bale Main Menu Press Y or A to select Logical Drives View and Edit Logical Drives then press ENT LG RAID5 DRV 3 Press Y or A to select a logical drive Sieve GD She then press ENT Press Y or A to select Delete Logical Drive then press ENT Delete Logical Press ENT for two seconds to delete Drive The selected logical drive has now been deleted LG 0 Not Defined Front Panel Operation 5 16 Deleting a Partition of a Logical Drive Press ENT for two seconds to enter the View and Edit Main Menu Press Y or A to select Logical Drives View and Edit Logical Drives then press ENT Press Y or A to select a logical drive LGO RAID5 DRV 3 then press ENT 2012MB GD SB 1 Press W or A to choose Partition Partition Logical Drive then press ENT Logical Drive The first partition s information will be St partitione shown on the LCD Press Y or to 200MB 2 browse through the existing partitions in the logical drive Select a partition LG 0 Partition 1 by pressing ENT for two seconds 300MB Use Y or A to change the number of the flashing digit to O then press ENT to move to the next digit After LG 0 Partition 2 changing all the digits press ENT for 600MB two seconds The rest
22. mutt Ure 3 spuoaag z sa suondo ldnintu 107 LN seat wait 1x9U ayp ot uo aot 01 LNF 30 DSF el uondo t urp s JV Av suondo ajd 9098 o1 mat tu uo uo LN e at 30 p uiopa d aq ol eet y 10 p uuog d aq 01 der 1dstp COT umg Kay A 1 Navigation Map KUO PRAY 20 Pret apo ss 3V apnpxg pnour alt mn EE ASUN AII een AEAEE EE dl 1soH x von tun oA POT Knuq wA oH l q Aug Nt xe E _ E 1 AataueId JOLY ISOH UPA Joi ebb ok tok ek G1 Ton nut 11114 1soH PPY mm et SOH PPV sys tA q huang wos ppV NOT ISOH NAA dew VAT HOW NNT I H p aL Ion NI IS0H upa pur maA uonpuroju IL Iert MAA Budde NI 1 HO 191 C Ld eC VAT onde AN stil HO qI SOS puuweyo ppy spouueyp uon s CI sNOTISOH pur uurt ment umloA 0318071 eau Trape ordew HPA pue A IA T DOE podde 10N E W Tee NAT oR detg ANTT I HO AV AT s dl HO2 LAd VAT onde HIER W N Y1 sell H Av i Ayoedeg aa CH quau pi ach H SI la OL PS al AT Hin ZISxEIW lq lmae oq Ten mme pot3oT puedyg quowUdissy tunlo QUINOA Ie3t8or
23. AWNxxxe alias mu aud PPY ke NPA PUL MAA qI 4opu A ANA MAN FIN xxx O aud ISOS 10 Suruueog aati aide dot usissy Irgss ns AUA q ode eqo D pp V aa mdsS pesoq UsIssy uonpurioju SALI MOL A AV nyssaong avid 8S GD Wers ad e907 pp V sch V scil Oppde3 ys q 11 qunN PH Navigation Map Sumag z n nami NAMM EE NdAA DUN Uod ONIA MATA NMM MIA uonputuoJju diyo MAA I ue ISOS 3g poNW I uueuO auLyapay FESSOR ICE NNAM K yQ ued I uueuO qesiq lqeuq p lqesiq p lqeuq otemt PPIM IW0 o1 ueuO A _ IN0 0F 1D 7 TH uoneunozuj diyo A IA Suniag a8ueyD AND PY oq p lqusiq p lqeuq 40040 Dun UPIM JaysueLy 12g 1R 8Y oq paadg saysuery oukg oygurut L uueuO IS S 18S M N Sunjag u qI AND 29S Pu ISOS IPS QI ABO Hd IguueuO ISOS PS arqesiqyarqeug olpurutt l SOS asay oq JoU Piqeuq Iqesiq TH C PON our utJ p q x OI a AI APIO Sud PS Apo Kuq CI 4 THO soq lt APD say oq pO Arepuosag a aI ISOS Sumas asueyD Il WPA jauuryD aaqa 1 llonuoo Arepuooes puw ppy AND sey oq amp AND Arepuosag lt i 1 lonuoo Bumog Bue
24. FC PH X2 230 1994 SCSI FCP X3 269 1996 FC AL 2 Project 1133 D rev 6 5 SCSI 2 X3 131 1994 Supporting sustained 1 Gigabit sec 100M B sec transfer rates Each Fibre loop can be independently configured for the connection to host or drive 2Gbit Fibre Channel Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop FC AL 2 working draft rev 6 4 Fibre Channel Fabric Loop Attach FC FLA working draft rev 2 7 Fibre Channel Private Loop SCSI Direct Attach FC PLDA working draft rev 2 1 Fibre Channel Tape FC TAPE profile T11 98 124vD rev 1 13 Support Fibre Channel protocol SCSI FCP SCSI Support Fibre Channel Internet protocol IP Multiple Target IDs Each 2Gbit channel configured as a host loop supports multiple target IDs in the range of Oto 125 Infortrend Fibre Operation Drive IDs Supported ways to address a Fibre port include Hard assigned and Soft assigned The controller supports automatic loop ID assignment on drive channels A hard loop address ID can be assigned to disk drives by enclosure jumper setting If the AL_PA configuration on drive enclosure has been set to a neutral status physical IDs will be automatically assigned to drives In band Fibre and S E S Support SCSI Pass through commands are supported over host and drive loops just as they are over SCSI channels The in band Fibre protocol for packaging External Interface protocol commands responses iS supported over host Fibre loops
25. LUN Mange Pri or See controller or LUN Mask Betup H Reset Contreller De Fri ander See Us Rew Contra mm hot channie I NO TE that some of Infortrend s dual controller configurations come with pre set IDs for users ease of configuration It is however always best to check these IDs before proceeding with configuration 10 1 2 Considerations Related to Physical Connection SCSI Based Controllers Figure 10 1 Dual Controller Using SCSI Based Controllers 10 2 Infortrend The physical connection between redundant controllers should be similar to the one shown above The basic configuration rules are 1 All channels should be connected to both controllers as diagrammed above or strung across via a common backplane Disk drives are connected to both controllers Cached writes are constantly duplicated in both controllers memory over a dedicated SCSI channel The default path for controller communications SCSI based controllers is channel 0 Channel 0 is also the default for host interface therefore avail other channel s for host connection by changing its channel mode See Chapter 7 for details about channel mode configuration SCSI channels should be terminated on both ends It is recommended to use the termination jumpers on the SCSl based controllers to configure the termination setting Terminators are provided on controller back end PCBs This design allows the controller
26. Speed SPRY Statue Vendor and Product ID EEEEN MEI Terace HAI ee EEN EE Ee el a mess e ON LINE sancerE epes 2 9999 40MB ON LINE SEAGATE ST3IBSS5U 2 9999 40MB 1 ON LINE SEAGATE ST31655W Kas ses ers SE 2 e el zone sour nen orv eracare eet Choose View and Edit SCSI Drives in the main menu All drives attached to the drive channels will be displayed on the screen Scanning New Drive Sr 14 1 THE er Cal Am End pa Ti Va ak l ft oe Fal 1 remy rive Beaerv i neces Z Ab Sos SESI Oriwe T P wea ke L3 Terminal Operation 7 22 If there is a drive connected after the array is started choose a drive and press ENTER Choose Scan SCSI drive then press ENTER The menu may vary according to the drive status Choose the drive channel and ID of the drive you wish to scan then press ENTER Slot Number Drive Entry These two functions are reserved for Fault Bus configuration Identifying Drive Status Vendor and Product ID ON LINE TUE DDRS 34562 Ze SEENEN DDRS 3456 D set slot Number DDRS 34560D add drive Entr ident tty scat drive DDRS 3456 D clone Failing drive z ee DDRS 34560D dr i z flash all But selected PPS eee EE EE T r DDRS 34560D NEW DRV IBM DDRS 34560D Move the cursor bar to the drive you wish to identify then press ENTER Choose Identify SCSI d
27. The surviving controller sounds alarm The ATTEN LED flashing on the existing controller The surviving controller sends event messages notifying controller failure Connection The channels of the two controllers that are connected together must be the same For example if controller A uses channel 2 to connect a group of drives controller B must also use channel 2 to connect to the same group of drives 10 13 Infortrend 10 2 Preparing Controllers 10 2 1 Requirements Cabling Requirements Communications Channels Controller Communications Cache Synchronization Paths Controller RCC cable SentinelRAID A SCSI cable CH 0 EonRAID 2510FR Dedicated RCC or RCC over driveloops EonStor Pre configured RCC routes over the system backplane Using one or two of the I O channels for controller communications as listed above is necessary especially when write back caching is preferred If controllers are running in write back mode a battery module is recommended for each controller Usethe default channel CH 0 for the SentinelRAID controllers Out of Band Configuration RS 232C cable for Terminal Interface Operation connection Ethernet connection If management through Ethernet is preferred connect the Ethernet interface from both controllers to ports on a hub The IP address assigned to one controller will be inherited by the surviving controller Host and Drive Connection
28. Infortrend s external RAID controllers provide complete RAID functionality and enhanced drive failure management 1 1 Logical Drive Figure 1 1 Logical Drive po ea The advantages mentioned above are achieved by creating logical drives A logical drive is an array of independent physical drives The logical drive appears to the host as a Ne See ee A contiguous volume the same as a local hard disk drive does The following section describes the different methods to create f logical arrays of disk drives such as spanning mirroring and data parity These methods are referred to as RAID levels Logical Drive 1 2 Logical Volume What is a logical volume The concept of a logical volume is very similar to that of a logical drive A logical volume is the combination of one or several logical drives These logical drives are combined into a larger capacity using the RAID 0 method striping When data is written to a logical volume it is first broken into data segments and then striped across different logical drives in a logical volume Each logical drive Functional Description 1 1 1 3 then distributes data segments to its member drives according to the specific RAID level it is composed of The member logical drives can be composed of the same RAID level or each of a different RAID level A logical volume can be divided into a maximum of 64 partitions During operation the host sees a non par
29. Mapping a Logical Drive Logical Volume to the Host LUNs Choose View and Edit Host Luns from main View and Edit menu and press EN T to proceed Host Luns d Use Y or A to navigate through the created IDS Map Sec Ctir and press ENT to select one of them Note that CH 0 ID 000 a logical unit previously assigned to a Primary controller can only be mapped a Primary ID and vice versa Use Y or A to choose mapping Logical Drive Map to Logical Volume or Physical Drive to host Logical Drive LUN If the logical unit has been partitioned map each partition to different D LUNs CHO IDO LUNO Use Y or A to choose a LUN number and press NO Mapped ENT to confirm Map Host LUN Press EN T again to confirm LGO RAID5 Use Y or to choose a logical drive logical 9999MB G volume if there are many ar LG 0 PART 0 Press ENT and choose a partition if the logical 999MB unit has been partitioned Map Host LUN Press ENT again to confirm or scroll down to Edit Host Filter Parameter You may refer to Chapter 8 for more details to LGO PRTO Press ENT to confirm the mapping Press ENT to re ensure Map Sec Ctlr CH 0 ID 0 This message indicates that the logical unit has been successfully mapped to the ID LUN eee LUNO combination Use Y or A to continue mapping other logical units or press ENT to delete the mapped LUN 10 24 Infortrend Repeat the process to map
30. Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connection then press ENTER A list of available selections will appear Move cursor bar to an item then press ENTER Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting Advanced Configurations 9 12 Maximum Queued I O Count This function allows you to configure the maximum number of I O queue the controller can accept from the host computer Cache Status Clean Main Menu Quick installation view view Run Queued 70 Count 6 i UNs per Host D 8 view view Max Number_of Concurrent Host LUN Connection Def view Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connectio 32 Peripheral Device Type Parameters v Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Confisuration Fibre Connection Option Loop only Host s ide Parameters Drive side Parameters Disk Array Parameters Redundant Controller Parameters Controller Parameters Choose Host side SCSI Parameters then press ENTER Choose Maximum Queued I O Count then press ENTER A list of available selections will appear Move cursor bar to an item then press ENTER Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting The controller supports the following Host side SCSI configurations Maximum Queued I O Count LUNs per Host SCSI ID Num of Host LUN Connect Tag per Host LUN Connect Peripheral Dev Type Parameters and Cyl Head
31. and press ENTER ache Status San Write Cache Enable 2 o 3 Selected LN ID Size MB LD ES LEET sess GOOD ie oo a lst ES LEET Tes coo ie er H Pe aoaa7eea najraroo 19558 sooo 2 of C Select one or more logical drive s available on the list The same as creating a logical drive the logical drive s can be tagged for inclusion by positioning the cursor bar on the desired drive and then press ENTER to select An asterisk mark will appear on the selected drive Press ENTER again will deselect a logical drive lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Beo Use arrow keys to select a sub menu and make change to the initialization mode write policy or the managing controller 7 10 Infortrend Logical volumes can be assigned to different controllers primary or secondary Default is primary Logical Drive Count Logical Volume Assignment Primar Controller Write Policy Write Through Initial Mode On Line Create Logical Volume tes No Note that if a logical volume is manually assigned to a specific controller all its members assignment will also be shifted to that controller As all the member logical drives are selected press ESC to continue The confirm box displays Choose Yes to create the logical volume E Delete logical volume Partition losical volume logical volume Assisnments Expand yogic volume
32. load Upload C Download FW Download FWIBR C Download NVRAM C Upload NVRAM File name Open Files oftype Ju Files C zl Cancel 1 Connect to the RAID system locally or from a remote host using RAIDWatch Manager While connected to the RAID system there will be icon s with IP address specified on the left of the menu screen Select by double clicking the icon of the RAID system which firmware is to be upgraded Select the controller icon and then select the RAID system to host bus usually appears as In band SCSI Double click the RAID to host bus to connect to the desired controller Choose the RAID view icon on the controller panel or the RAID view icon on the control bar The RAID view window will appear Choose Controller gt Download gt and click among the selections Download FW BR Firmware and Boot Record 2 Provide the boot record binary filename the RAIDWatch Manager will start to download the boot record binary to the controller 3 After the boot record download is completed provide the firmware filename to the RAIDWatch Manager It will start to download the firmware to the controller 4 Shutdown the system which is accessing the RAID then reset the controller in order to use the new downloaded firmware With firmware release 3 21 and above host I Os will not be interrupted by the download process Users may find a chance to stop host UO and reset th
33. ou Eyi roza E ke Enry 2 2 wor SES Q rat Axan freed E Hot ixan Denied RO feed Ces R Ben md Write Hort Arer Heat E oops at bom Fo F e Logical drives are LDO and LD1 LDOis partitioned into two PO and P1 e Filter Entry LUN map list Configuration Procedure 1 Create an entry list for the specific logical unit from View and Edit Host LUN Host Channel Create H ost Filter Entry 2 Select Host Channel ID and then select a configured logical unit alogical drive logical volume or one of its logical partitions to create the entry The entry submenu will appear 3 Enter and modify the Host ID Host ID Mask Filter Type and Access M ode The exemplary entry list is shown below Please refer to the diagram above Entry 1 LDO PO ID 0x F111 Mask Ox FFFE Filter Type Include Access Mode Read Write and B can read write PO of LDO It means Host A Entry 2 LDO P1 ID 0x F222 Mask 0x FFFF Filter Type Exclude Access Mode Read Write It means Host A and B can read write P1 of LDO but this partition is inaccessible for Host C 8 21 Entry 3 LD1 PO D 0x F111 Mask 0x FFFE Filter Type Include Access Mode Read Only It means PO of LD1 is Read Only for Host A and B Entry 4 LD1 P0 ID 0x F222 Mask 0x FFFF Filter Type Include Access Mode Read Write It means Host C can read write PO of LD1 8 22 Infortrend Cha
34. 2 r jeme of one i 2 2 o sens ona j Choose View SCSI Drives Drive member information will be displayed on the screen 7 16 Infortrend Deleting a Logical Drive Choose the logical drive you wish to delete then press ENTER Choose Delete logical drive Choose Yes when prompted to confirm Deleting a Partition of a Logical Drive enee e ele Choose the logical drive which has a partition you wish to delete then press ENTER Choose Partition logical drive Partitions of the logical drive will be displayed in tabulated form Move the cursor bar to the partition you wish to delete then press ENTER Enter 0 on the partition size to delete the partition Figure 7 1 Drive Space Allocated to the Last Partition Logical Drive Logical Drive 1000MB 1000MB emmmer fee Partition 0 100MB Partition 0 100MB 1 The capacity of the deleted w partitions will be added to Partition 1 200MB D the last partition iti Delete ts Partition 2 300MB partition 1 Partition 1 300MB Ke Partition 3 400MB Partition 2 600MB u 400 200 seenen As illustrated above the capacity of the deleted partition will be added to the last partition WARNING e Aslong as a partition has been changed it is necessary to reconfigure all host LUN mappings All data kept in the partition and the host LUN mappings will be removed with any partiti
35. A logical drive can only use the capacity of each drive up to the maximum capacity of the smallest drive Infortrend Assign Spare Drives E Drive Capacity 29 99MB Slot Chl1 ID Size MB Speed LG_DRV Status Vendor and Product ID 4 9999 40MB NON NEW DRY 1 5 9999 40MB NONE NEW DRY 1 6 9999 40MB NONE NEW DRY 1 8 9999 40MB NONE NEW DRY You can add a spare drive from the list of the unused drives The spare chosen here is a Local spare and will automatically replace any failed drive in the event of drive failure The controller will then rebuild data onto the replacement drive A logical drive composed in a noneredundancy RAID level NRAID or RAID 0 does not support spare drive rebuild Disk Reserved Space Maximum Drive Capacity 244MB Assign Spare Drives A ackwar ompat ible The reserved space is a small section of disk space formatted for storing array configuration and RAIDWatch program Do not change the size of reserved space unless you want your array to be accessed by controllers using older firmware Logical Drive Assignments Maximum Drive Capacity 9999MB Assign Spare Drives Disk Reserved Space 256 MB hogica Drive Assignments I Redundant Controller Logical Drive Assign to Secondary Controller ECE No If you use two controllers for a dual active configuration a logical drive can be assign
36. No 11 RES REH Secondary Controller D 111 lt To Range 7 gt Infortrend Limitation 1 If host connection is made in FC AL mode there can be a total of 16 of Primary and Secondary IDs 2 Although host connection in point to point mode is supported problems might occur when passing IDs of the failed controller to its counterpart HA failover software is required in this situation to redirect IO access during the controller failover operation Redundant Controller Cache Coherency Channel RCC Channel A host channel can be selected and converted into a communications channel To convert a drive channel change it into host mode and then select RCCOM Details can be found in the proceeding discussions View Channel WWN lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes u yiiChl Rode PID SID DefSynCIk DefHid S Term CurSynC1k Curllid channel Mode view and edit scsi Id 2 view chip inFormation acy U WWNN 20 68 HA DO 23 OH HA Bi oa WWPN 21 68 46 DA 23 HH HH DI 70 gt RCCom l l l l Port name is the unique eight byte address assigned to a FC port The controller has multiple channels I O paths and each channel is powered by an I O processor This function allows users to inspect the processor s node name and port name Some management software run
37. Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time Drive Predictable Failure Mode SMART Detect Only c Fibre Channel Dual Loop Enabled Drive side Parameters Dis Array Parameters Redundant Controller Parameters Controller Parameters The controller supports tag command queuing with an adjustable maximum tag count from 1 to 128 The default setting is Enabled with a maximum tag count of 32 Choose Maximum Tag Count then press ENTER A list of available tag count numbers displays Move cursor bar to a number then press ENTER Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting IMPORTANT e Every time you change this setting you must reset the controller for the changes to take effect e Disabling Tag Command Queuing will disable hard drives built in cache for Write Back operation 9 21 Infortrend Detection of Drive Hot Swap Followed by Auto Rebuild SCSI Motor Spin Up Disabled SCSI Reset at Power Up Disabled Disk Access Delay Time GD seconds SCSI I1 0_Timeout L seconds Maximum Tag Count eriodic Drive Check Time 1 seconds Periodic aie TE EE Check Time 5S seconds isal seconds _ 10 seconds 15 seconds 30 seconds 6 seconds H Se a ot ao Dis Array Parameters Redundant Controller Parameters Controller Parameters Choose Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time then press ENTER Move the curs
38. SCSI Bus Reset Issued 1111 CHL _ ID SCSI Target ALERT Unexpected Drive Not Ready 1112 CHL ID SCS Drive ALERT Drive HW Error _ 1113 CHL ID SCSI Drive ALERT Bad Block Encountered _ _ 1114 CHL _ ID SCSI Target ALERT Unit Attention Received 1115 CHL _ ID SCSI Drive ALERT Unexpected Sense Received _ 1116 CHL ID SCSI Drive ALERT Block Reassignment Failed _ _ 1117 CHL ID _ SCSI Drive ALERT Block Successfully Reassigned _ _ 1118 CHL _ ID SCSI Drive ALERT Aborted Command _ 1142 SMART CH _ ID Predictable Failure Detected TEST 1142 SMART CH _ ID Predictable Failure Detected 1142 SMART CH _ ID _ Predictable Failure Detected Starting Clone 1142 SMART CH _ ID Predictable Failure Detected Clone Failed 11c1 CHL ID SCSI Drive NOTICE Scan SCSI Drive Successful Channel Warning 113f CHL _ ALERT Redundant Loop Connection Error Detected on ID _ 113f CHL _ SCSI Drive Channel ALERT SCSI Channel Failure 113f CHL _ ALERT Fibre Channel Loop Failure Detected 113f CH L _ ALERT Redundant Loop for Chl _ Failure Detected 113f CHL _ ALERT Redundant Path for Chl _ ID Expected but N ot Found 113f CHL _ ID ALERT Redundant Path for Ch ID Failure Detected Notification 113f CHL _ NOTICE Fibre Channel Loop Connection Restored Infortrend 113f CHL 1D _ NOTICE Redundant Path for Chl _ ID Restored Logical Drive Event Alert 2101 LG lt NA Logical Dri
39. Sector Mapping Config LUNs per Host SCSI ID Wed Ju S 39 200 ache Status ean Main Menu Quick installation view Max imum Queued 170 Count _ 256 view view view ax Number_o oncurrent Host onnection view Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connectio Peripheral Device Tepe Parameters Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Configuration G Fibre Connection Option Loop only Gees side Parameters ES side Parameters Disk Array Parameters Redundant Controller Parameters Controller Parameters ele Choose LUNs per Host SCSI ID then press ENTER A list of selections will appear Move cursor bar to an item then press ENTER Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting LUN Applicability If no logical drive has been created and mapped to a host LUN and the RAID controller is the only device connecting to the host SCSI card usually the operating system will not load the driver for the 9 13 Infortrend host adapter If the driver is not loaded the host computer will not be able to use the in band utility to communicate with the RAID controller This is often the case when users want to start configuring a RAID using management software from the host It will be necessary to configure the Peripheral Device Type setting for the host to communicate with the controller If the LUN O s only is selected only LUN O of the host ID will appear as a device with
40. commands when an event occurs Terminal dial in Supported Can be configured to accept a remote terminal dial in for remote administration Custom Inquiry Serial Number Custom Inquiry Serial Number for support of multi pathing software like Veritas QLogic etc Remote Redundant Controller Configuration Supported Remote redundant controller configuration support fully automatic failback user s interaction free B 10 Infortrend JBOD Specific Format Restore controller maintained defect list to default Reassign Blocks Add entry to the defect list maintained by controller on disk drives Write verification Write following by a verify SMART Sense data and mode parameters support Special mode Error handling page Enable Disable retry parameters Caching page Enable Disable Read Write caching SMART enable parameters Geometry saved on format command completion Others Customization of default Via the IAPPEND utility settings Private logo Supported WWN seed read from Supported subsystem Customizable SNMP trap Supported messages Customizable inquiry serial Supported no data to enable clustering customization Firmware Functionality Specifications B 11 Appendix C System Functions Upgrading Firmware Upgrading Firmware The RAID controller s firmware resides in flash memory that can be updated through the CO
41. gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns u Host Channel vi CHL B ID B Primary Controller CHL i ID 1 Secondary Controller u system Functions view system Information view and edit Event logs Assign Logical Unit Numbers LUNs to logical units logical drives logical volumes logical partitions Select a host channel ID and then select a LUN number Select a Host LUN and associate a logical unit with it lt Main Menu gt Quick installation LUM LU LD DRU Partition Size lt HB gt RAID view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes 4 LD 1 a 3008 RAIDS view and edit Host luns D Host Channel 1 1 1 3008 RAIDS vw CHL ID A Primary Controll imeem 2 up 3 3000 RAIDS 3 1 system Part ition Offset MB gt Size MB gt LD 3008 RAIDS When a logical unit is selected you may choose to Map Host LUN or Create Host Filter Entry If you select to map the logical unit directly to a host LUN without LUN masking the particular logical unit will be accessible for all host computers connected through the network DEER D 6 LD 1 1 LD 1 1 2 LD 3 8 3 LD 3 1 o L Map Host LUN Create Host Filter Entr Add from current device lists Manual add host filter entry If you want the logical unit
42. memory Press ENT for two seconds to Reset Ctlr confirm and reset the controller or power off the controller Controller Maintenance For Controller Maintenance functions please refer to Appendix C Saving NVRAM to Disks You can choose to backup your controller dependent configuration information to disk We strongly recommend using this function to save configuration profile whenever a configuration change is made The information will be distributed to every logical drive in the RAID system If using the RAIDWatch manager you can save your configuration data as a file to a computer system drive A RAID configuration of drives must exist for the controller to write NVRAM content onto it From the main menu choose System controller Functions Use arrow keys to scroll maintenance on down and select Controller Maintenance Save NVRAM to Disks then press ENT Press ENT for two Save NVRAM seconds on the message prompt Save To Disks NVRAM to Disks A prompt will inform you that NVRAM information has been successfully saved Restore NVRAM from Disks Once you want to restore your NVRAM information from what you previously saved onto disk use this function to restore the configuration setting From the main menu choose System restore NVRAM Functions Use arrow keys to scroll from Disks down and select Controller Maintenance Restore NVRAM from Disks and then press EN
43. on a per logical drive basis Dual loop hub or switch Unpredictable situations like a cable coming loose can cause system down time Fibre channel dual loop or redundant data paths using flexible LUN mapping method can guarantee there is no single point of failure The use of Fibre channel hub or switch makes cabling and topology more flexible Change the channel mode connection type and other associated settings to adjust the controller to your demands Infortrend Optimization Mode Figure2 1 Optimization Setting View and EI Misis Wes Cer ein role Creftpnsikrg G a Parameters Iesi d rarirrdler You should select an optimization scheme best suited to your applications before configuring a RAID array Once the optimization mode is selected it will be applied to all arrays managed by the RAID controller Two options are available Sequential 1 Os and Random Os You may refer to the Caching Parameters section in Chapter 5 and Chapter 7 for the stripe size variables and its relations with RAID levels Numerous controller parameters are tuned for each optimization mode Although stripe size can be adjusted on a per logical drive basis users are not encouraged to makea change to the default values For example smaller stripe sizes are ideal for I Os that are transaction based and randomly accessed H owever using the wrong stripe size can cause problems When an array of the 4KB stripe size receives fil
44. such as the RAIDWatch Manager Driveside S E S device identification monitoring and control are likewise supported over drive loops 8 4 Configuration Host and Drive Drive Channel Host Channel 8 6 Parameters Channel Mode Q Chl Mode PID SID DefSynC1lk DefWid S Term E CurWid V o Host 112 NA 1 GHz Serial F 1 Host NA 113 1 GHz Serial F 1 GHz Serial 2 C DRV RCC 119 118 1 GHz Serial F 1 GHz Serial hannel Mode erial AE iu ES E id Jerial IF ww IT Drive ation ES OM Drive RCCOM All Fibre channels can be changed to operate as Host Drive RCCOM or Drive RCCOM Choose the channel you wish to change its mode then press ENTER Choose Channel Mode then press ENTER A dialog box will appear asking you to confirm the change lt lt u lt lt lt lt lt Primary and Secondary Controller IDs Select a channel by highlighting its status bar and press ENTER Each drive channel should be assigned with both a Primary Controller ID and a Secondary Controller ID The factory defaults for the primary and secondary IDs on drive loops are 119 and 120 Create host IDs on each specific host channel Host IDs are designated as the Primary controller or Secondary controller IDs lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes ecvecMece Lies
45. then press ENT for two Primary Ctlr seconds to complete the process Front Panel Operation 5 2 OH Deleting a Channel ID Press ENT on an existing host channel ID you want to delete Press W or A to choose Delete Channel SCSI ID then SCST ID press ENT Press ENT for two seconds to confirm Delete ID 2 Primary Ctlr IMPORTANT e Every time you make changes to channd IDs you must reset the controller for the configuration to take effect e Thereserved ID s for SCSI based controllers are shown below Single controller configuration SC SI based controllers Drivechannes 7 Redundant controller configuration Drivechanne s 8 and 9 For IDs reserved in different controller configurations please refer to the hardware manual that came with your system For controllers connected through back end PCBs firmware can detect its board type and automatically apply the preset IDs There is no need to set IDs for these models e In single controller mode you should set the Secondary Controller s ID to NA Ifa secondary controller exists you need to set an ID for it on each of your drive channels e Multiple target IDs can be applied to Host channels while each Drive channel has only one or two IDs in redundant mode e Atleast a controller s ID has to be present on each channel bus Setting a SCSI Channel s Primary ID Drive Channel Press ENT for two seconds to enter the View and
46. will Terminal Operation 7 3 display the current setting with the Write Back caching Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting The Write through mode is safer if your controller is not configured in aredundant pair and there is no battery backup Write back caching can dramatically improve write performance by caching the unfinished writes in memory and let then be committed to drives in a more efficient manner In the event of power failure a battery module can hold cached data for days In the event of controller failure data cached in the failed controller has an exact replica on its counterpart controller and therefore remains intact IMPORTANT e Theoriginal 512GB threshold on array optimization modeis canceled If the size of an array is larger than 16TB only the optimization for sequential I O can be applied Logical drives of this size are not practical therefore there is actually no limitation on the optimization mode and array capacity e Every time you change the Caching Parameters you must reset the controller for the changes to take effect e In theredundant controller configuration write back will only be applicable when thereis a synchronized cache channel between partner controllers 73 Viewing the Connected Drives Prior to configuring disk drives into a logical drive it is necessary to understand the status of physical drives in your enclosure Cache Status Clean Quic
47. 0 1010MB connected drives information screens New DRV SEAGATE You may first examine whether there is any drive installed but not shown here If there is a drive installed but not listed the drive may be defective or not installed correctly please check your enclosure installation and contact your system vendor Press ENT on a drive Choose View View Drive SCSI drive will be shown Press W to 0274 see other information Drive Information by pressing ENT Use Y or A to navigate through the screens The Revision Number of the selected Other information screens include Serial Number and Disk Capacity displayed in blocks each block equals 512K Bytes IMPORTANT e Drives of the same brand model capacity might not have the same block number e The basic read write unit of a hard drive is block If members of a logical drive have different block numbers capacity the smallest block number will be taken as the maximum capacity to be used in every drive Therefore use drives of the same capacity You may assign a Local Global Spare Drive to a logical drive whose members has a block number equal or smaller than the Local Global Spare Drive but you should not do the reverse Front Panel Operation 5 oi 5 4 Creating a Logical Drive To create a logical drive press EN T for two seconds to enter the Main Menu Use Y or to navigate through the menus Choose View and Edit Logical Drives
48. 3456 D NEW DRY IBM DDRS 34568D meer ON LINE IBM DDRS 3456aD ee et el al gt eys Move Cursor nter HEF Terminal Operation 7 42 SCSI Drive Low level Format Quic Slot Chl ID Size MB Speed LG_DRV Status Vendor and Product ID drive information ocal spare drive L ee 1 Channel 2 ID 6 SCSI Drvie 345600 l data on the disk will be erased 345600 34560D t Low Level Format Disk ii Drive Low Leve PINEN ead Write Test 2 a 7229 40MB 1 ON LINE IBM DDRS 34560D Choose SCSI Drive Low level Format and confirm by selecting Yes IMPORTANT Do not switch the controller s and or SCSI disk drive s power off during the SCSI Drive Low level Format If any power failure occurs during the formatting process the formatting must be performed again when power resumes All data stored in disk drives will be destroyed during the low level format The disk drive on which a low level disk format will be performed cannot be a spare drive local or global nor a member of a logical drive The SCSI Drive Low level Format option will not appear if the drive is not indicated as a New Drive or a Used Drive Also a drive formatted with a 256M B reserved space is also excluded from selection 7 43 Infortrend SCSI Drive Read Write Test From the View and Edit SCSI Drives menu select a new or used drive that the utility is to perform o
49. 39 3 3 3 11 1 3 9 12 B 2 2 7 2 3 2 10 5 1 7 1 3 4 3 6 10 14 5 19 5 32 7 31 5 32 7 31 5 17 7 17 5 12 7 11 partitioning the logical volume partitions mapping them to LUNs pass through SCSI commands LCD Pass through SCSI Commands terminal password disabling password changing Password Validation Timeout LCD Password Validation Timeout terminal password setting a new Periodic Drive Check Time periodic drive swap auto check Peripheral Device Type Peripheral Device Type Parameters for Various Operating Systems Peripheral Device Type Settings Perpetual Clone Clone Failing Drive Perpetual Clone S M A R T Primary and Secondary Controller ID Fibre Primary Controller primary controller setting SCSI ID drive channel for primary ID SCSI channel setting LCD Primary Secondary Controller ID terminal Q Quick Installation LCD Quick Installation terminal R RAID RAID 0 1 RAID 3 0 2 9 5 22 7 21 7 36 5 34 5 37 7 39 7 35 9 22 9 23 9 14 9 15 9 3 9 6 8 6 10 16 7 27 5 27 7 26 4 1 6 2 7 6 1 17 1 17 Index 5 RAID 5 0 RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 3 RAID 5 RAID Expansion Example RAID Expansion RAID expansion with logical volume RAID Level LCD RAID Levels RAID advantages RAID definition of RAID level 0 1 disk striping with mirroring RAID level 0 disk striping RAID level 1 disk mirroring RAID level 3
50. 7 L Yes No NONE ecucecec lt A Choose the logical drive that has a failed member drive then press ENTER Choose Rebuild logical drive then press ENTER When prompted to Rebuild Logical Drive select Yes Rebuilding 14 Completed The rebuild progress will be displayed Infortrend When rebuild has already started choose Rebuild progress to see the rebuilding progress IMPORTANT e The Rebuild function is only available when a logical drive with RAID level 1 3 or 5 has a failed member NRAID and RAID 0 configurations provideno data redundancy Regenerating Logical Drive Parity Applies to RAID1 3 and 5 If no verifying method is applied to data writes this function can be often performed to verify parity blocks of a selected array This function compares and recalculates parity data to correct parity errors LG ID LV RAID Size MB Status 1 2 3 o c LN sB FL NAME Vieu scsi drives 999 Delete logical drive Partition logical drive 9299 logical drive Name Expand logical drive add Scsi drives See e par items cOpy and replace drive Media scan Write policy TT NONE Choose the logical drive that you want to regenerate the parity for and then press ENTER Choose Regenerate Parity then press ENTER When prompted to Regenerate
51. Current Sensor_ Vendor descriptor strings Device Not Available gt MAlert OWarning ON otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Infortrend General Peripheral Device 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do Power Supply Failure Detected 3f21 Peripheral Device ALERT Power Supply Failure Detected MAlert OWarning Power supply failure detected Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Cooling Fan Not Installed 3f22 Cooling Fan N ot Installed MAlert OWarning Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Cooling Fan Failure Detected 3f22 Cooling Fan Failure Detected MAlert OlWarning Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Elevated Temperature Alert 3f24 Elevated Temperature Alert MAlert OWarning Press lt ESC gt to clear the message UPS Power Failure Detected 3f24 UPS Power Failure Detected MAlert OWarning Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Event Messages ON otification ON otification ON otification ON otification ON otification Notification SAF TE Device 2 LineLCD SAF TE_ Fan _ Back to On Line Terminal 3fa2 SAF TE _ NOTICE Fan Back On Line Event Type DAlert OWarning MIN otification Wh
52. Define Peripheral Device Active Signal Adjust LCD Contrast Controller Peripheral Device Configuration Set Peripheral Device Entry Redundant Controller Enabled Disabled Power Supply Status Enabled Disabled Fan Status Enabled Disabled Temperature Status Enabled Disabled UPS Status Enabled Disabled Define Peripheral Device Active Signal Power Supply Fail Signal Active High Active Low Fan Fail Signal Active High Active Low Temperature Alert Signal Active High Active Low UPS Power Fail Signal Active High Active Low Drive Failure Outputs Active High Active Low View System Information Total Cache Size Bootrecord Version Serial Number Battery Backup On Event Threshold Parameters Thresholds for 3 3V Record of Settings 11 11 Thresholds for 5V ae i o Thresholds for 12V lowr temperature Temperature 11 8 Save NVRAM to Disk Restore from Disk ewwwwwvwW www Cache Status Clean lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes and edit Host luns and edit scsi Drives and edit Scsi channels and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices E Download Firmware M Advanced Maintenance Functions c IREVSIT SET TI EES R Restore nuran from disks s Controller maintenance iEnter Select iEsc Exit iCtrl L Refresh Screen Update Date Save NVRAM to Dat
53. Drives D RAIDS amp lt lt Ma Re Ja See Logical Lave ECH Volume Ge EE RAIDS ra a a Logical Logical Volume EE 24 drives 4 redundancy drives LEE i RAID5 amp eric Logical i S L Drive J f ee o Configuration B One logical volume with 4 logical drives Configuration B can help to reduce the chance of encountering points of failure a Higher Redundancy Configuration A has one dedicated spare while Configuration B allows the configuration of four spares In Configuration B the risk of simultaneous drive failure in a logical drive is significantly reduced than in Configuration A The total array capacity is comparatively smaller by the use of spares b Less Rebuild Time The time during rebuild is a time of hazard For example a RAID 5 logical drive can only withstand single drive failure if another drive fails during the rebuild process data will be lost The time span for rebuilding a faulty drive should be 1 13 Infortrend minimized to reduce the possibility of having two drives to fail at the same time Configuration A is a large logical drive and takes a long time to rebuild All members will be involved during the rebuild process In Configuration B the time span is shorter because only 6 members will participate when rebuilding any of the logical drives c Channel Failure Protection Channel failure may sometimes result from absurd matters like a c
54. Elevated Temperature Alert MAlert OWarning O Notification Detected temperature exceeding safety range Check cooling fan status Contact your system provider for an immediate replacement of fan modules UPS Power Failure Detected 3f24 SES C_I_ UPS UPS Power Failure Detected MAlert OWarning O Notification UPS power failure detected Check UPS status If power should fail and UPS is not able to sustain power data loss might occur Infortrend General Peripheral Device 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do Event Messages Power Supply Failure Detected 3f21 Peripheral Device ALERT Power Supply Failure Detected MAlert OWarning O Notification Power Supply Failure Detected Check power module status and contact your supplier for a replacement unit Cooling Fan_ Not Installed 3f22 Cooling Fan N ot Installed MAlert OWarning Cooling fan missing or not detected O Notification Check proper fan installation or contact your supplier to replacea failed unit Cooling Fan_ Failure Detected 3f22 Cooling Fan Failure Detected MAlert OWarning Cooling fan failure detected O Notification Contact your system provider for an immed
55. Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do C SCSI Drive Channel Notification SCSI Bus Reset Issued 110f CHL _ SCSI Drive Channel Notification SCSI Bus Reset Issued DAlert MWarning ONotification SCSI bus reset issued C I SCSI Target ALERT Unexpected Drive Not Ready 1111 CHL _1D _ SCSI Drive ALERT CHL ID _ Clone Failed DAlert MWarning ONotification Drive installed does not respond with Ready Check hard drive and drive side cabling termination canister connections C l Drive HW Error 1112 CHL _ ID SCSI Drive ALERT Drive HW Error Sense key Sense code DAlert MWarning ONotification Drive Side SCSI drive unrecoverable hardware error reported Replace hard drive and the rebuild may begin with a hot spare or a replacement drive C Bad Block Encountered 1113 CHL ID SCSI Drive ALERT Bad Block Encountered Block number Sense key Sense code DAlert MWarning ONotification Hard drive unrecoverable media error reported A bad block is encountered in the specified hard drive The RAID controller will ask the hard drive to retry Press ESC to clear the message C l _ UnitAttention Received 1114 CHL _ID _ SCS Target ALERT Unit Attention Received Sense key Sense code DAlert MWarning Drive side SCSI target
56. Failing Drive is a manual function There are two options for cloning a failing drive Replace after Clone and Perpetual Clone Replace after Clone Data on the source drive the drive with predicted error or any selected member drive will be cloned to a standby spare and replaced later by the spare The status of the replaced drive the original member drive with predicted error will be redefined as an used drive System administrators may replace the used drive with anew one and then configure the new drive as a spare drive Locate the logical drive to which the specific member drive with predictable errors belongs Select the clone failing drive function Select Replace After Clone The controller will automatically start the cloning process using the existing stand by dedicated global spare drive to clone the source drive the target member drive with predicted errors If there is no standby drive local global spare drive you need to add a new drive and configure it as a standby drive Cache Status Clean Status ender and Product ID Ss View drive information ON LINE ss Sean scsi drive ON LINE set slot Number ON LINE add drive Entry Identify scsi drive STAND BY clone Failing drive opying SE Not it icat Ton 21A1 LG Logical Drive NOTICE CHL 1 ID 3 Starting Clone The cloning process will begin with a notificat
57. Host 1 luns e Ki vill v LG ID CECE Status O SB FL NAME PO 34456224 NA BEER S S vie view al Partition Offset MB Size MB D 9999 L l l Ee The added capacity will be automatically included meaning that you do not have to expand logical drive later Map the added capacity to another host ID LUN to make use of it As diagrammed above in View and Edit Host LUN the original capacity is 9999MB its host LUN mapping remains unchanged and the added capacity appears as the second partition IMPORTANT Expansion by adding drives can not be canceled once started If power failure occurs the expansion will be paused and the controller will NOT restart the expansion when power comes back on Resumption of the RAID expansion must be performed manually If a member drive of the logical drive fails during RAID expansion the expansion will be paused The expansion will resume after logical drive rebuild is completed 12 6 Infortrend 12 3 Array Expansion Mode 2 Expansion Copy and Replace Drives with Drives of Larger Capacity You may also expand your logical drives by copying and replacing all member drives with drives of higher capacity Please refer to the diagram below for a better understanding The existing data in the array is copied onto the new drives and then the original members can be removed When all t
58. Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters Pyiew and edit Peripheral devices s v View Peripheral Device Status v D A C o PEBE EE ontroller Disabled enable redundant controller i as Primary enable redundant controller function as Secondary Enter the Main Menu Use the arrow keys to navigate through the menus Choose View and Edit Peripheral Devices then press EN TER Choose Set Peripheral Devices Entry then press ENTER Choose Redundant Controller Function and then press ENTER Note The 10 26 Infortrend current setting will be displayed on the screen If this controller has never been set as a redundant controller before the default setting is Disabled The message Redundant Controller Disabled will be displayed on the screen Press ENTER to proceed The message Enable Redundant Controller in Autoconfigure Mode will appear Main Menu gt Quick Installat tion view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives i edit Scsi channels igur mary enable redundant controller Funct ten as EE Use the arrow keys to scroll through the available options Primary Secondary or Autoconfigure then press ENTER to select Autoconfigure When prompted by enable redundant
59. ID by pressing ENTER Several details are noticeable here 1 A logical group of drives logical drive logical volume previously assigned to the primary controller can not be mapped to a secondary ID Neither can those assigned to the secondary controller mapped to a primary ID 2 For a SCSI based controller ID 7 is reserved for the controller itself If there are two controllers controllers might occupy ID6 and ID7 or ID8 and ID9 Please check your system Hardware Manual for details on preserved IDs lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit lo ical Volumes view and edit Hoct lors HL ID Primar ontro gi rx ontro on C WESSEN troller ogica olume ry Controller me List Choose the channel ID combination you wish to map then press ENTER to proceed Choose mapping a Logical Drive or a Logical Volume on the drop box Terminal Operation 7 13 1 A list of LUN entries and their respective mappings will be displayed To map a host LUN to a logical volume s partition select an available LUN entry one not mapped yet by moving the cursor bar to the LUN then press EN TER 2 A list of available logical volumes displays Move the cursor bar to the desired logical unit then press ENTER 3 A list of available partitions will prompt Move cursor bar to the desired partition then press ENTER If you have not partitioned the logical
60. ID or LUN will appear to the host adapter as one virtual hard drive There are alternatives in mapping for different purposes 1 Mapping a logical configuration to IDs LUNs on different host channels allows two host computers to access the same array This method is applicable when the array is shared in a clustering backup 2 Mapping partitions of an array to IDs LUNs across separate host channels can distribute workload over multiple data paths 3 Mapping across separate host channels also helps to make use of all bandwidth in a multi path configuration Firmware automatically manages the process when one data path fails and the workload on the failed data path has to be shifted to the existing data paths Figure 2 8 Mapping Partitions to LUNs under ID Logical Drive 1 Logical Drive 0 u Partition 0 Partition 2 Logical Drive 0 Fo Partition 0 LUN 5j LUN Akt LUN 3 LUN 2 LUN Jl LUN O pa Host SCSI Channel fe IDO L Drive 0 Ki Logical Drive 1 Logical Drive 1 Partition 1 Partition 2 Controller SCSI Chip RAID Planning 2 9 2 4 Tunable Parameters Fine tune the controller and the array parameters for your host applications Although the factory defaults guarantee the optimized controller operation you may refer to the table below to facilitate tuning of your array Some of the performance and fault tolerance settings may also be changed later during the preparation process of yo
61. LCD messages may vary when using controllers running different firmware versions Chapter 1 introduces basic RAID concepts and configurations including RAID levels logical drives spare drives and the use of logical volumes It is recommended that users unfamiliar with RAID technologies should read this chapter before creating a configuration Chapter 2 tells the user how to begin with a RAID At the beginning of this chapter we raise some basic questions of which the user should know the answers prior to creating aRAID Chapter 3 teaches the user how to configure the RS 232C terminal emulation interface and the connection through aLAN port Chapter 4 helps the user to understand screen messages on the LCD display Chapter 5 gives step by step instructions on creating a RAID using the LCD keypad panel Chapter 6 teaches the user how to interpret the information found on the RS 232 terminal emulation Chapter 7 gives step by step instructions on how to create a RAID via the RS 232 session Chapter 8 includes all the Fibre channel specific functions implemented since the firmware release 3 12 Chapter 9 provides the advanced options for RAID configuration Some of the new functions from firmware release 3 11 and above are given the detailed explanations in this chapter Chapter 10 addresses the concerns regarding the redundant controller configuration and the configuration process Chapte
62. LUN map combines Host ID in the Fibre case a 64 bit port name in the SCSI case the initiator ID with the list of attributes of a LUN map that originally only consisted of the channel target ID and the LUN number 8 15 To create LUN masks select View and Edit Host LUNs from the Main Menu then select a host data path channel ID combination In active to active mode selecting a host channel means selecting either the Primary or the Secondary controller I O path WWN Name List Before mapping host LUNs you may add host adapter port names to a WWN name list to combine with a nickname given to each adapter Names will be recorded in controller NVRAM ee Lache Status Clean Main Menu Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes E luns I a v vi CHL 6 ID 112 Primary Controller vi CHL 7 ID 113 Secondary Controller v dit Host IB WWN Name List s vieu system Information view and edit Event logs A named adapter by location or the nature of host applications can be easily identified and later combined with filtering masks Infortrend lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns O S CHL Z ID 113 Secondary Controller RS Get G support KICHE GB AEN Add Host ID HWN Name List Delete Host ID WWN Name List Logical Unit to Host LUN Mapping lt Main Menu
63. Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit GE Parameters view and edit SE eral devices v Mute beeper change Passuor d Reset controller C Reset Controller 7 ves No To reset the controller without powering off the system move the cursor bar to Reset Controller then press ENTER Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows then press ENTER The controller will now reset as well as power off or re power on Shutdown Controller Before powering off the controller unwritten data may still reside in cache memory Use the Shutdown Controller function to flush the cache content Move the cursor bar to Shutdown Controller then press ENTER Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows then press ENTER Thecontroller will now flush the cache memory lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Cone aur Ss ten Parameters view and edit Peripheral devices sys t e Shutdown Controller 7 v Yes No utdown controller ontroller maintenance For Controller Maintenance functions such as Download Firmware please refer to Appendix C Terminal Operation 7 36 7 14 Controller Parameters Controller Name Loo EE Main Menu Quick install
64. Loops 8 12 8 5 Multi host Access Control LUN Filtering 8 14 Creating LUN Masks 8 15 WWN Name List 8 16 Logical Unit to Host LUN Mapping 8 16 LUN Mask ID Range Configuration 8 18 Filter Type Include or Exclude 8 18 Access Mode Read Only or Read Write 8 19 Configuration Procedure 8 20 Chapter9 Advanced Configurations Page number 9 1 Fault Prevention 9 1 Clone Failing Drive 9 2 Replace after Clone 9 2 Perpetual Clone 9 3 9 1 2 S M A R T with enhanced features 9 5 SMART Features Enabling M A R T 9 7 Detect Only 9 7 Detect Perpetual Clone 9 7 Detect Clone Replace 9 8 9 2 Host side amp Drive side SCSI Parameters 9 11 9 2 1 Host side SCSI Parameters 9 11 Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN 9 12 Connection Maximum Queued I O Count 9 13 LUNs per Host SCSI ID 9 13 LUN Applicability 9 13 Peripheral Device Type 9 14 In band SCSI Fibre 9 14 Peripheral Device Type for Various Operating Systems 9 15 Peripheral Device Type Settings 9 15 XV Cylinder Head Sector Mapping 9 16 9 2 2 _Drive side Parameters 9 18 SCSI Motor Spin up 9 18 SCSI Reset at Power up 9 19 Disk Access Delay Time 9 20 SCSI I O Timeout 9 20 Maximum Tag Count Tag Command Queuing 9 21 Detection of Drive Hot Swap Followed by Auto Rebuild 9 22 SAF TE and S E S Enclosure Monitorin
65. Manageahbility u uu u u u 10 JBOD Specitlis isi uu TA n A nackte coastal goncnadtevdetesveeencteves 11 Others cesses cinta Ee 11 Appendix C System Functions Upgrading Firmware Upgrading Firmware u uu uu u u u J J T 1 New Features Supported with Firmware 3 21 1 Background RS 232C Firmware Download 1 Redundant Controller Rolling Firmware Upgrades 1 Redundant Controller Firmware Sync version 2 Upgrading Firmware Using In band SCSI RAIDWatch Manager 2 Upgrading Firmware Using RS 232C Terminal Emulation 4 Appendix D Event Messages xii Functional Table of Contents This functional table of contents hdps you to quickly locate the descriptions of firmware functions Chapter 1 Functional Description Page number 1 4 2 Identifying Drives 1 8 Flash Selected SCSI Drive 1 8 Flash All SCSI Drives 1 8 Flash All but Selected Drives 1 8 1 4 3 Automatic rebuild and manual rebuild 1 9 Automatic rebuild 1 9 Manual rebuild 1 10 1 4 4 Concurrent Rebuild
66. NEE 31 Disconnecting Gupport 32 Maximum Tag Count u mauina aaa aaah a aaia adaa 32 Data Ratex aga uy my a ae at DS EE ayu At e Ee 32 Syst m FunctionS u a tet da cede side aaa EEN 34 Mute Beeper uu ie ei ANEN EEA EAA NEEE 34 Change Password z a u a aan enti ENEE SEENEN ENEE 34 Changing the Password 35 Setting a New Password 35 Disabling the Password 36 Reset Controller u aa aaa assssaaasssasasqss sa danie aanva aa da nnaaia na ssa saa 36 Shutdown Controller AAA 36 Controller Parameters 37 eltren 37 LCD Title Display Controller Name 37 Saving NVRAM to Dieks 38 Restore NVRAM from Dieks 38 Password Validation Timeout a 39 Controller Unique Identifier aa 39 Set Controller Date and Time a a a 41 Tue Te EE 41 BEIS ue AR EEN 41 Drive Informat ON Seeerei 42 View Drive Informa a 2 u uay sayaq a aaa aaa aaar aaa 42 SCSI Drive Utilities tute unuqa aa aa aaa Deiere 42 SCSI Drive Low level Formatl sassa 43 SCSI Drive Read Write Test 44 Chapter 8 Fibre Operation 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 viii OV GN VICW eet EES SC 1 Major Contes iian raa 1 l S EES 2 S pported Features s sc u u cca ccentedeccncerentiescneeescnatssasesscuederencesseceetzacse 4 Fibre Chip uuu m gees Ata aea aa Ate de D GS 4 Multiple Target IDSs
67. S M A R T function enabled controller will send command to enable all drives S M A R T function If a drive predicts a problem controller will report in the form of an event log Controller will clone the drive if there is a Dedicated Global spare available The drive with predicted errors will not be taken off line and the clone drive will still behave as a standby drive If the drive with predicted errors fails the clone drive will take over immediately Under the circumstance that the problematic drive is still working and another drive in the same logical drive should fail the clone drive will resume the role of a standby spare and start to rebuild the failed drive immediately This is to prevent a fatal drive error if yet another drive should fail Clone Replace Controller will enable all drives S M A R T function If a drive predicts a problem controller will report in the form of event log Controller will then clone the problematic drive to a standby spare and take the problematic drive off line as soon as the cloning process is completed NOTE e If you are using drives of different brands in your RAID system as long as they are ANSI SCSI Informational Exception Control IEC document X 3T10 94 190 compatible it should not be an issue working with the controller Advanced Configurations 9 6 Configuration Procedure Enabling the S M A R T Feature Follow the procedure below to enable S M A R T on all drives
68. SCSI ID LUNs The figure on the left illustrates the idea of mapping a system drive to host ID LUN combinations The host ID is like a cabinet and the drawers are the LUNs LUN is short for Logical Unit Number Each cabinet host ID can have up to 32 drawers LUNs Data can be made available through one of the LUNs of a host ID Most host adapters treat a LUN like another device 2 3 2 Grouping Drives into an Array Figure 2 4 Connecting Drives SCSI cable x T P Terminator fH i af 15 drives A Terminator Up to 15 drives SCSI cable RAID Controller The physical connection of a RAID controller should be similar to the one shown above Drives are connected through I O paths that have been designated as drive channels The next diagram shows two logical configurations of drives and the physical locations of its members Using drives from different channels can lower the risk of fatal failure if one of the drive channels should fail There is no limitation on the locations of spares Figure 2 5 Physical locations of drive members Drog Chanza d DS Dese Chanel 1 oe preion tr spas i A iid Fv sl 2 i GB 1 DR tr a f G8 L i i k HH r qu Li a D d 3 1 E op E DR i Da H D3 ER i IDB Dirr D I 14 A AL Local Spare A oba a E Drive of LD1 pt Drive RAIDS RAID 3 466 S08 Logical Orie Logical Orre 1 A drive c
69. Secondary controller By default logical drives will be automatically assigned to the Primary controller It can be assigned to the Secondary controller if the host computer is also connected to the Secondary controller Access View and Edit Logical Drives from main menu Create a logical drive by selecting members and then a selection box will appear on the screen Move cursor bar to Logical Drive Assignments and press EN TER if you want to assign logical drive to the Secondary controller LG ID LV RAID Size MB Status LN SB FL NAME P 1F 10E040 NA RAIDS 9998 GOOD 3 1 o gg eg S Maximum Drive Capacity 949MB Assig gn Spare Drives Redundant Controller Logical Drive Assign to Secondary Controller Lies No ecucceceecBo NONE Logical drive assignment can also be changed after a logical drive is created Create a logical drive or choose an existing logical drive then press ENTER to see the logical drive menu Choose Logical Drive Redundant Controller 10 29 Assignments then press ENTER Choose Yes and press ENTER to confirm reassignment to the Secondary Controller a LL EE a View scsi drives kA Delete logical drive Partition logical drive settee See ical drive Name 6 ogical drive Assig P logical drive Assignments lt lt uc lt lt e ler Redundant Controller Logical Drive Assign to Secondary Controller Yes No NONE 7 NON
70. Serial p na ote Seriar F NA 1 GHz Serial lt lt m lt lt lt lt lt lt lt DRV RCC Serial 1 GHz S 4 C DRV RCC 119 118 GHz Serial F NA As displayed above channed s selected as the communications paths will be displayed as channd number C connected or channel number D disconnected If channels configured in a dual loop are selected channel status will be displayed as channd number pair loop C or D If any of the communications loops should fail the inter controller traffic will be automatically shifted to the remaining Drive RCC loop s 8 13 8 14 8 5 Multi Host Access Control LUN Filtering RAID based mapping provides access control over a Storage Area Network where 1 Servers may share common storage 2 File integrity becomes a problem and access contentions might occur 3 File access must be coordinated among multiple servers Figure 8 1 Storage Pool Host A RAID Storage Host B LUNO LUNI Host C LUN2 Host D LUN3 LUN4 Host E LUNS Storage Pool RAID based mapping provides the centralized management for host storage access It is derived from the concept that storage can be divided into manageable pieces by mapping storage units to different Logical Unit Numbers LUNs The storage can then be managed in the context of
71. Time a 24 hours clock To change the clock to your local time zone enter the hours later than the Greenwich mean time following a plus sign For example enter 9 for Japanese time zone Choose Time Zone by pressing ENT Time Zone Front Panel Operation 5 3 CO Use the A key to enter the plus sign and the YW key to enter numeric representatives Date and Time Use your arrow keys to scroll down and select Date and Time by pressing ENT Use your arrow keys to select and enter the numeric representatives in the following order month day hour minute and the year GMT 08 00 Date and Time MMDDhhmm YYYY 5 39 Infortrend 5 15 SCSI Drive Utilities View and Edit From the View and Edit SCSI Drives SOSI Drives menu select the drive that the utility is to be performed on then press ENT Select SCSI Drive Utilities then press ENT Choose either SCSI Drive Low level Format or Read Write Test Utilities S These options are not available for drives already configured in a logical Test configuration and can only be performed before a reserved space is created on drive SCSI Drive Low level Format Drive Low Level Choose SCSI Drive Low level Format Format and confirm by selecting Yes IMPORTANT e Do not switch the controller s and or disk drive s power off during the Drive Low level Format If any power failur
72. Tit Enter Ctlr Name le Disp ler Logo le Disp Controll ler Name PasswdValidation Timeout 5 mins Ctlr Unique ID Infortrend Ctlr Unique ID then press ENT Enter any hex number between 0 and FFFFF and press ENT to proceed Enter a unique ID for any RAID controller no matter it is configured in a single or dual controller configuration The unique ID is recognized by the controller as the following L A controller specific identifier that helps controllers to identify its counterpart in a dual active configuration 2 The unique ID is combined to generate a unique WWN node name for controllers or RAID systems using Fibre channel host ports The unique node name helps to prevent host computers from mis addressing the storage system during the controller failback failover processes 3 MAC addresses for the controller s Ethernet port that should be taken over by a surviving controller in the event of controller failure Controller Date and Time This submenu is only available for controllers or subsystems that come with a real time clock on board Time Zone See View and Edit Choose View and Edit Configuration Config Parms parameters Controller Parameters then press ENT Press Y or A to scroll Controller down and select Set Controller Date Parameters and Time then press ENT Set Controller Date and Time The controller uses GMT Greenwich Mean
73. Users will be notified by audible alarm 0111 Controller ALERT Redundant Controller Failure Detected After a controller takes over it will act as both controllers If it was the Primary controller that failed the Secondary controller becomes the Primary controller If the failed controller is replaced by a new one later the new controller will assume the role of the Secondary controller NOTE e Some operating systems SCO UnixWare and OpenServer for example will not attempt to retry accessing thehard disk drives while the controller is taking over 10 3 3 When and How Is the Failed Controller Replaced Remove the failed controller after the take over of the working controller has been completed For a controller with hot plug capability all you have to do is to remove the failed controller The new controller has to be pre configured as the Secondary Controller The replacement controller provided by your supplier should have been configured as the Secondary controller It is recommended to safety check the status of the replacement controller before installing it to your redundant system Simply attach power to the new controller and configure it as the Secondary When safety check is done remove the failed controller and install the replacement controller into its place Redundant Controller 10 31 Cache Status Clean Main Menu Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and
74. View drive information Delete global local spare drive DDRS 3456aD can scsi drive set slot Number Delete Spare Drive DDRS 3456aD add drive Entry Identify scsi driv es No DDRS 34562aD DDRS gop view NOTE e Thesparedrive you deleted or any drive you replaced from a logical unit will be indicated as a used drive Terminal Operation 7 24 7 12 Viewing and Editing SCSI Channels Except for those shipped in dual redundant chassis SCSl based controllers use channel 0 as the host channel and also as the communications path between controllers If redundant controller configuration is preferred you may need to assign other channels as host Flexibility is added for all channels can be configured as host or drive Cache Status Clean Main Menu Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels Mode PID SID DefSynC1k DefWid S Term CurSynC1lk CurWid Tost s EW EK oe gs SS Wai async _ Narrow H Drive 7 F Choose View and Edit SCSI Channels in the main menu Channel status displays Redefining Channel Mode Secondary controller sez Change Mode to Host Channel 7 scsi Terminator sync transfer Clock Hide transfer View and edit scsi target Parity check_ En
75. Volume Physical SCSI Drive Map to Host LUN Create Host LUN Entry NOTE e The redundant function of the controllers can be enabled via the front keypad or a terminal emulation program Section 10 3 describes the procedures for using the terminal emulation and LCD front panel T he same result can be achieved regardless of the interface used Redundant Controller 10 15 10 16 10 2 2 Limitations e Both controllers must be exactly the same Namely they must operate with the same firmware version the same size of memory the same number of host and drive channels etc If battery backup is preferred both should be installed with a battery module e The takeover process should take less than one second using SCSI or Fibre for controller communications to complete e In redundant mode each controller takes an ID on each channel bus This leaves the maximum number for disk drives on a SCSI bus to be 14 e Connection through Fibre hubs or switches is necessary for joining host Fibre interfaces between controllers The EonRAID 2510FR is an exception Its type 1 ports come with an onboard hub e Thecontroller defaults for ID settings are listed below Host Host channel Drive channel interface Primary Secondary Primary Secondary SCSI 0 1 7 6 Fibre 112 113 119 120 e SCSI IDs 8 PID and 9 SID are the recommended defaults to the drive channels of the SCSl based dual controller chassis us
76. Y or A to select Scan N ew SCSI Drive then press ENT again Press Y or A to select a SCSI channel then press ENT for two seconds Press W or A to select a SCSI ID then press ENT for two seconds The information of the scanned SCSI drive will be displayed on the LCD If the drive was not detected on the selected SCSI channel and ID the LCD will display Scan Fail View and Edit SCSI Drives Scan new SCSI Drive Scan Channel 1 Scan Channel 1 Scan Channel 1 ID 1 Scan Fail Infortrend An empty drive entry is added for this channe SCSI ID for enclosure management The drive status is ABSENT To clear the empty drive entry press ENT and use arrow keys to select Clear Drive Status then press ENT to proceed Press ENT for two seconds to confirm the drive entry s deletion Information of other drives will be displayed instead Identifying a Drive Press ENT for two seconds to enter the Main Menu Press Y or A to select View and Edit SCSI Drives then press ENT SCSI drive information will be displayed Press Y or A to select a SCSI drive then press ENT Press Y or A to select Identify Drive then press ENT to continue Press W or A to select Flash All Drives Flash Selected Drive or Flash All But Selected Drive Press ENT for two seconds to flash the read write LEDs of all the connected drives Or press W or A to sel
77. a SAF TE S E S device directly from the host To perform such a function the SCSI device must be mapped to a host SCSI ID From the Main Menu press Y or to View and Edit select View and Edit Host LUNs Host Luns If you have primary and secondary controllers use the W or A to select the Map Channel 0 controller for the device that you ID 0 Pri Ctlr would liketo map Press Y or A to choose to map a SCSI Map to ID to Physical Drive or other device Physical Drive and then press ENT N Front Panel Operation 5 2 5 23 5 11 WARNING Pass through SCSI Commands are only intended to perform maintenance functions for a drive or device on the drive side Do not perform any destructive commands to a disk drive i e any commands that write data to a drive media If a disk drive is a spare drive or a member of a logical drive such a destructive command may cause a data inconsistency Whe a drive device is mapped to a host SCSI ID so that Pass through SCSI Commands can be used the data on that drive device will not be protected by the controller Users who employ Pass through SCSI Commands to perform any write commands to drive media do so at their own risk Viewing and Editing SCSI Drives Scanning New SCSI Drive Press ENT for two seconds to enter the Main Menu Press W or A to select View and Edit SCSI Drives then press ENT SCSI drive information will be displayed on the LCD Press ENT ona drive Use
78. abled Cache Synchronization on Write Through Disable Redundant Controller Parameters ontroller Parameters The item is display only showing the current communications route Secondary Controller RS 232 This is an option reserved for debug purposes When enabled you can access the secondary controller through its serial port When combined into a redundant controller system only status display is available through the terminal session with a secondary controller No configuration change can be done through a secondary controller Remote Redundant Controller This is an advanced option reserved for system integrators Cache Synchronization on Write Through If your redundant controller system is not operating with Write back caching you may disable the synchronized cache communications You system can be spared of the efforts duplicating and transferring data between partner controllers This tremendously increases array performance but you risk losing cached data if power outage or controller failure should occur 10 34 Infortrend Chapter Record of Settings In addition to saving the configuration data in NVRAM to disk keeping a hard copy of the controller configuration is also recommended This will speed the recreation of the RAID in the event of a disaster The following tables are provided as a model for recording the configuration data As a general rule the configuration data in the NVRAM
79. above support 64 bit LBA A maximum of 64TB capacity can be included in single logical drive Up to 128 members can be included in each logical drive Extreme array sizes can cause operational problems with system backup and should be avoided 9 4 Infortrend 2 2 Configuring the Array 2 2 1 Starting a RAID System Here is a flowchart illustrating basic steos to be taken when configuring a RAID system Hardware installation should be completed before any configuration takes place Figure 2 2 Array Configuration Process Create Logical Drive Create Logical Volume Initialize System System Optimization Drives Map Host LUN System Drive Save Configuration Drives must be configured and the controller properly initialized before a host computer can access the storage capacity 1 Use the LCD panel terminal program or the RAIDWatch manager to start configuring your array 2 When powered on the controller scans all the hard drives that are connected through the drive channels If a hard drive is connected after the controller completes initialization use the Scan SCSI Drive function to let the controller recognize its presence 3 Optimize controller s parameters for your applications 4 Configure one or more logical drives to contain your hard drives based on the desired RAID level and or partition the logical drive or logical volume into one or several
80. all the logical units to host ID LUNs Front Panel View of Controller Failure What will happen when one of the controllers fails Should one of the controllers fail the existing controller will automatically take over within a few seconds The red ATTEN LED will light up and the Redundant Ctlr message Redundant Ctlr Failure Detected will Failure Detected appear on the LCD Users will be notified by audible alarm NOTE e Although the existing controller will keep the system working You should contact your system vendor for a replacement controller as soon as possible Your vendor should be able to provide the appropriate replacement unit e Some operating systems SCO UnixWare and OpenServer for example will not attempt to retry accessing thehard disk drives while controller is taking over When and how is the failed controller replaced Remove the failed controller after the working controller has taken over For a controller with hot plug capability all you have to do is to remove the failed controller The replacement controller has to be pre configured as the Secondary Controller The replacement controller provided by your supplier should have been configured as the Secondary controller It is recommended to safety check the status of the replacement controller before installing it to your redundant system Simply attach power to the replacement and configure it as Secondary When safety check is
81. amp bit SCSI The default SCSI bus width has changed Reset the controller for the changes to take effect Infortrend 6 8 Controller Voltage and Temperature Controller voltage and temperature monitoring ache Status ean e Cache Enable Main Menu Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view edit Scsi channels view zng edit Configuration parameters pieu and edit Peripheral devices umu View Peripheral Device Status Set Peripheral Device Entry Define Peripheral Device Active Signal Adjust LCD Contrast Ptontroller Peripheral Device Configuration View Peripheral Device Status Voltage and Temperature Parameters Choose from main menu View and Edit Peripheral Devices and press ENTER From the submenu choose Controller Peripheral Device Configuration View Peripheral Device Status then press ENTER Main Menu Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view an ache Status ean e Cache Enable view an VALUE STATUS 3 3V 2 Operation Normally Operation Normally View 12V Gs 868V Operation Normally Def i CPU Temperature 32 C Temperature within Safe Range Boardi Temperature 45 5 C Temperature within Safe Range Board Temperature 43 C Temperature within Safe Range View Peripheral Device Status Voltage and
82. bar to a channel then press ENTER Select Wide Transfer then press ENTER A dialog box Disable Wide Transfer or Enable Wide Transfer will appear Choose Yes to confirm IMPORTANT e Every time you change the SCSI Transfer Width you must reset the controller for the changes to take effect 7 29 Infortrend Viewing and Editing SCSI Target Drive Channel lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view view channel Mode Primary controller scsi id Secondary controller scsi id v scsi Terminator vi Ch sync transfer Clock efWid Term CurSynClk CurWid s Hide transter Ee curna vi ac v Parity check Enabled view chip inFormation arrow te Mz GEET Move the cursor bar to a Drive channel then press ENTER Select View and Edit SCSI Target then press ENTER ESN SS TT Dre corneet Testenni ral ra STS Enabled Def 32 maximum s xfer oc max imum x xfer Width Enabled Def 32 aril cl eck GE Support Enabled Def 32 maximum Tag count Restore to default setting Ibled Enabled Def 32 Enabled Enabled Def 32 af sf to wiae Enseres enabiea Der 2 x T z o tol hae enabled Enabled pert32 A list of all the SCSI targets and their current settings will appear Press ENTER on a SCSI target and a menu list will appear on the screen NOTE e tis only recomm
83. capacity Please refer to Advanced Features in Appendix B and also to the related documents provided with your operating system Cylinder Head Sector counts are selectable from the menu To avoid the difficulties with Sun Solaris configuration the values listed below can be applied Table 9 3 Cylinder Head Sector Mapping under Sun Solaris ET a EE lt 64GB 64 32 64 128 GB 64 64 128 256 GB 127 64 256 512 GB 127 127 512GB 1TB 255 127 Older Solaris versions do not support drive capacity larger than 1 terabyte Advanced Configurations 9 16 Configuring Sector Ranges Head Ranges Cylinder Ranges Selecting Sector Ranges Cache Status Clean Main Menu Quick installation view view Maximum Queued Lob Count 256 LUNs per Host SCSI ID 8 Max Number of Concurrent Host LUN Connection Def 4 Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connection Def 32 Peripheral Device u BS nan este view Ranges Variable riable Variable ector Selecting H ead Ranges lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view i Maximum Dueued I O Count 256 LUNs per Host SCSI ID 8 Max Number_of Concurrent Host LUN Connection Def 4 Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connection Def 32 RE EE Ee Parameters leads 127 Heads 255 Heads Selecting Cylinder Ranges Main Menu gt Quick installation Maximum Queued 1 0 Co
84. drive loops selectable No Single point of failure Supported Automatic engagement of replacement controller Supported in PowerPC series Dynamic cache memory allocation Yes Cache memory is dynamically allocated not fixed Environment Supported SAF TE SES ISEMS I C interface and management on board controller voltage temp monitor are all supported in both single and redundant controller mode In the event of controller failure serves can be taken over by the existing controller Cache battery backup Supported Battery backup solutions for cache memory are supported in both single controller and redundant modes Load sharing Supported Workload can be flexibly divided between different controllers by assigning logical configurations of drives LDs LVs to different controllers User configurable channel mode Supported Channel modes configurable SCSI or Fibre as HOST or DRIVE in both single controller and redundant controller mode Require a special Firmware for redundant controller Redundant Coniroller rolling firmware upgrade No All firmware and all Infortrend external RAID controllers support redundant controller function Firmware upgrade can be downloaded to the primary controller and then be adopted by both controllers without interrupting host I O Redundant Controller firmware synchronization In the event of controller failure a replacement c
85. drive members in the logical drive Standby drives available for the logical drive This includes all the spare drives local spare global spare available for the specific logical drive Number of Failed member s in the logical drive Logical drive name user configurable 6 5 Logical Volume Status ID Size M B LD Terminal Screen Messages ache Status ean Size MB Parameters vices Logical Volume number PO Logical Volume 0 managed by the Primary Controller S0 Logical Volume 0 managed by the Secondary Controller Logical Volume ID number controller randomly generated Capacity of the Logical Volume The number of Logical Drive s included in this Logical Volume 6 6 SCSI Drive Status Eun Jan 6 03 03 40 2002 M Cache Status Clean lt Main Menu gt uick installation view and edit ogical drives view and edit logical olumes i and edit ost luns and edit scsi Drives Chl ID Size lt MB gt Speed LG_DRU Status Vendor and Product ID ew E IESSEN 17568 2098MB B ON LINE SEAGATE 1T318384FC 23 gt 19 17568 200ME B ON LINE SEAGATE ST318304FCG Slot Slot number of the drive S indicates this is the drive used for passing through SES signals Chl The drive channel where the drive is connected X lt Y gt indicates two channels are configured in a dual loop ID The channel ID assigned to this drive Size MB Drive capacity Speed XxMB Maximum transfer rate o
86. drives in a RAID system LA eed Local Seare Brive 7 ries H gt 1 Choose View and Edit SCSI Drives on the main menu press ENTER Move the cursor bar to a SCSI drive that is not assigned to a logical drive or as a spare drive usually indicated as a New Drive and then press ENTER 2 Choose Add Local Spare Drive and press ENTER A list of logical drives displays 3 Movethecursor bar to a logical drive then press EN TER The unassigned SCSI drive will be associated with to this logical drive as a Local Spare 4 When prompted to Add Local Spare Drive choose Yes to confirm Terminal Operation 7 15 Adding a Global Spare Drive A global spare replaces the failed drive in any logical drive of a RAID system e information CR drive Move cursor bar to the SCSI drive that is not a member drive or a spare usually indicated as a New Drive and then press ENTER Choose Add Global Spare Drive When prompted to Add Global Spare Drive choose Yes 7 9 Viewing and Editing Logical Drive and Drive Members Choose View and Edit Logical Drives in the main menu The array status will be displayed Refer to the previous chapter for more details on the legends used in Logical Drive s Status To see the drive member information choose the logical drive by pressing ENTER ac S ta an Ca he Enable es oo SERRE EEE EEE re Orne aaa a
87. eerste ats See iti tate eas 4 Drive NDS 28 seet eege eene egene kasunku bt Seege east 5 In band Fibre and S E S Gupport a 1 5 Configuration Host and Drive Parameters 6 Ghannel Mod t 2 0 i a tai ie Dee ebe ee 6 8 5 Redundant Controller Cache Coherency Channel RCC Channel 7 View Channel WWN n nanas 7 View Device Port Name List WWPNJ u 8 View and Edit Fibre Drive S AA 8 User Assigned ID Scan SCSI Drive U 8 View Drive Information ccccceeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeees 9 View and Edit Host Side Parametere 9 1 Fibre Channel Connection Type 10 View and Edit Drive Side PDarameiers 10 2 Drive Side Dual Loop 10 Controller Unique Identifier a 11 Controller Communications over Fibre LOOPS 12 Multi Host Access Control LUN Filtering 14 Creating LUN Maske 15 WWN Name Piel yu aaa es bene A ARARSA EERO A Er AERAR AREATA KERRE 16 Logical Unit to Host LUN Mapping 16 LUN Mask ID Range Configuration retn nsennenn nnn 18 Filter Type Include or Exclude U 18 Access Mode Read Only or Read Write
88. improve MTBF Clone Failing Drive Users may choose to clone data from a failing drive to a backup drive manually Automatic Shutdown on over temperature condition Controller automatically starts a shutdown sequence upon the detection of high ambient temperature for an extended period of time System Security Password protection Supported All settings requires the correct password if set to ensure system security User configurable Password validation timeout Supported After certain time in absence of user interaction the password will be requested again This helps to avoid unauthorized operation when user is away SSL enabled RAIDWatch Agents Agents communicate to the controller through limited set of authorization options B 8 Infortrend Environment Management SAF TE S E S support Supported The SAF TE S E S modules can be connected to the drive channel the controller will detect errors from SAF TE S E S devices or notify drive failure via SAF TE S E S e Both SAF TE S E S via drive and device self interfaced are supported e Redundant SAF TE S E S devices are supported e Multiple GES devices are supported Dynamic on lining of enclosure services Once an expansion unit JBOD with supported monitoring interface is combined with a RAID system its status will be automatically polled SAF TE S E S polling period User confi
89. in RAID 0 1 1 11 Chapter 3 Out of Band via Serial Port and Page number Ethernet Communication Parameters 3 1 configuring RS 232 connection Configuring Ethernet connection reserved space and port 3 6 IP NPC Onboard 3 9 Chapter 4 LCD Screen Messages Page number View and Edit Event Logs 4 7 Chapter 5 Starting RAID via the LCD Page number Chapter 7 Panel Terminal Emulation LCD Terminal Starting RAID Configuration 5 2 7 2 Caching Parameters 5 1 7 1 Optimization mode and stripe size 5 2 7 3 Optimization for sequential or random I O 5 3 7 3 Write Back Write Through Cache Enable Disable 5 3 7 3 5 3 7 3 Viewing Connected Drives 5 5 7 4 5 4 7 4 Creating a Logical Drive 5 6 7 5 Choosing a RAID Level 5 6 7 6 Choosing Member Drives 5 6 7 6 Maximum Drive Capacity 5 7 7 6 Spare Drive Assignments 5 7 7 7 Logical Drive Assignments 7 7 Disk Reserved Space 5 7 7 7 Write Policy 5 7 7 7 Initialization Mode 5 7 7 8 Stripe Size 5 8 7 8 5 5 7 5 Creating a Logical Volume 5 10 7 10 Initialization Mode 5 10 7 10 xiii Xiv Write Policy 5 10 7 10 5 6 7 6 Partitioning a Logical Drive Logical Volume 5 12 7 11 5 7 7 7 Mapping a Logical Drive Logical Volume to Host LUN 5 13 7 13 5 8 7 8 Assigning Spare Drive Rebuild Settings 5 14 7 15 Adding a Local Spare D
90. may occur when a hard drive writes data To avoid the write error the controller can force hard drives to verify written data There are three selectable methods Verification on LD Initialization Writes Performs Verify after Write when initializing a logical drive Verification on LD Rebuild Writes Performs Verify after W rite during rebuild process Verification on LD Normal Drive Writes Performs Verify after W rite during normal Os Each method can be enabled or disabled individually Hard drives will perform Verify after Write according to the selected method lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Contiguration parameters Communication Parameters Caching Parameters lt lt lt Host Zei Verification on Verification on LD Di Verification on Normal Re Hrites Disabled kima Move cursor bar to the desired item then press EN TER Main Menu gt Quick Installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters Communication Parameters Caching Parameters lt lt lt Choose Yes in the confirm box to enable or disable the function Follow the same procedureto enabl
91. may still be intact Locate and replace the faulty drive and rebuild LG Starting Init 2181 LG_ Logical Drive N OTICE Starting Initialization DAlert OWarning MN otification The controller starts initialize the logical drive Press lt ESC gt to clear the message LG Initialization Completed 2182 Initialization of Logical Drive Completed DAlert OWarning MN otification The initialization process of LG_ has been completed Press lt ESC gt to clear the message See if host computer can recognize the RAID drive LG Starting Rebuild Infortrend Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do Event Messages 2183 LG_ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Rebuild DAlert OWarning MIN otification The rebuild process has begun This is the message displayed when a stand by spare is available or when a faulty driveis replaced The controller automatically detects a drive for rebuild LG Rebuild Complete 2184 Rebuild of Logical Drive_ Completed DAlert OWarning MN otification The controller has successfully rebuilt a logical drive Press lt ESC gt to clear the message LG Starting Parity Regen 2185 LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Parity Regeneration
92. not have to come from the same drive channel Grouping drives from different drive channels helps reduce the chance of downtime by channel bus failure Each logical drive can be configured a different RAID level and several logical drives can be striped across to compose a larger logical volume Each of the logical units logical drives logical volumes or one of their partitions can be made available on host ports through host LUN mapping Each of these logical units appears as a virtual hard drive 10 5 Figure 10 3 Grouping Hard Drives Drive Channel 0 ID 14 Local Spare Drive of LD1 Logical Drive 0 Logical Drive 1 As diagrammed above choosing the members of an array can be flexible You may divide a logical drive or logical volume into several partitions as diagrammed below or use the entire logical drive as a single partition with or without the support of one or several spare drives Figure 10 4 Partitioning of Logical Units a so ee Partition 0 2GB 8GB Partition 1 1GB ee eee See Logical Drive 0 Partition 2 5GB CS Partition 0 RAID 0 ence 6GB a Wee Partition 1 Logical Drive 1 1 5GB Each logical unit can be associated mapped with a host ID Primary or Secondary ID or the LUN numbers under host IDs System Drive Mapping Primary and Secondary IDs Host Channel Keep in mind that when controllers are successfully combined host port IDs are available a
93. press ENTER to proceed The remaining size will be automatically allotted to the next partition Choose Yes to confirm when prompted to the Partition Logical Volume message Press ENTER to confirm Follow the same procedure to partition the remaining capacity of your logical volume a la am Z 9956 This operation will result in the SS OF ALL DATA on the Partition Partition Logical Volume When a partition of a logical drive logical volume is deleted the capacity of the deleted partition will be added to the last partition WARNING e As long as a partition has been changed it is necessary to reconfigure all host LUN mappings All data in it will be lost and all the host LUN mappings will be removed with any changeto partition capacity Infortrend 7 7 Mapping a Logical Volume to Host LUN Select View and Edit Host luns in the main menu then press ENTER Main Menu gt Quick installer tae view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes peana eai eg Primary Control ler econdary Controller HHN Name List A list of host channel ID combinations appears on the screen The diagram above shows two host channels and each is designated with both a primary and a secondary ID Multiple IDs on host channels are necessary for redundant controller configuration Details on creating multiple IDs and changing channel mode will be discussed later Choose a host
94. select the host or drive SCSI Channels channel on which you wish to create Primary Secondary IDs CH1l Drive PID 7 SID NA SXF 80 0M Press EN T to proceed Use WY or A to select Set SCSI Channel Pri Ctlr set SCSI Channel ID or Set SCSI Channel Sec Ctlr ID Press Sec Ctlr ID ENT to proceed 10 22 Infortrend Use Y or A to select a SCSI ID and press ENT to Set Sec Ctlr confirm The configuration change will take 1D NA to ID 6 effect only after controller reset Host Channel The process of creating Primary and Secondary IDs on host channels is basically the same CHL 0 ID 0 In View and Edit SCSI Channels press ENT Tor Ctl to select a host channel Use Y or A to select Set nad hannal SCSI Channel ID A preconfigured ID will scsr tp Se appear press ENT to proceed Use Y or A to select Add Channel SCSI ID and then press primary ENT for two seconds on the Primary or Controller Secondary Controller to proceed When prompted by this message use Y or A to Add CHL 0 ID 2 select an ID Press ENT to confirm and you will Primary Ctlr be prompted for resetting the controller A message will prompt to remind you to reset the change Setting controller Press ENT to reset the controller or Do Reset Ctlr press ESC to move back to the previous menu The change of ID will only take effect afte controller reset Assigning a Logical Drive Log
95. should be saved to disk or as a file using RAIDWatch M anager whenever a configuration change is made see Chapter 6 and 7 11 1 View and Edit Logical Drives Size MB Status RAID LN SB FL 4 Record of Settings NAME Disk reserved Loe 11 2 Infortrend 11 2 View and Edit Logical Volumes Parameters vices Record of Settings 11 3 11 3 View and Edit Host LUN s Main Men Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns I Vi r Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller rimary Controller HHN Name List Cache Status Clean LUN Mappings Host Channel Pri Sec SCSI ID LUN Logical Drive Partition Size Controller Logical Volume Host ID WWN Name List Host ID WWN Name List Access Restriction Setting Logical Drive Partition Read Only Access Denied to R W Logical by Vol ONS HBA WWN list 11 4 Infortrend Record of Settings Main Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes View and edit Host luns _ v v H Primar ont ro v H D econdar ont v Edit Host ID WWN Name List s vieu system Information view and edit Event logs Cache Status Clean H
96. the user defined peripheral device type If all undefined LUNs is selected each LUN in that host ID will appear as a device with the user defined peripheral device type Different LUN applicability selections are available Device Type selection Device Qualifier Support Support Removable media LUN O s only and All undefined LUNs Please refer to the table of peripheral device setting for details concerning various operating systems Peripheral Device Type For connection without a preset logical unit to a host the in band SCSI protocol can be used for the host to see the RAID controller Please refer to the reference table below You will need to make adjustments in the following submenu Peripheral Device Type Peripheral Device Qualifier Device Support for Removable Media and LUN Application Cache Status Clean Main Menu Quick installation 1 0 Count 256 Maximum Queued LUNs per Host SCSI ID Max Nunber o oncurrent Host LUN Connection Def 4 Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connection Def 32 RE Perip i p ice Pre z Perip Device Qu d w l Device Supports BEE Me dia Beak LUN Applicability All ndef ined Pins is Redundant Controller Parameters Controller Parameters In band SCSI or Fibre What is In band External devices require communication with the host computer for device monitoring and administration In addit
97. through a Fibre switch F_Port or directly toa server choose Point to point only Proper selection is necessary and will decrease overhead on data transmission A redundant controller configuration should always have its host connection configured in FC AL mode For a switched fabric configuration a redundant controller system can be connected to the FL_ports on an FC switch and then the host computers connect to its F_ports View and Edit Drive Side Parameters ache Status ean SCSI Motor Spin Up Disabled view SCSI Reset at Power Up Enabled i Disk Access Delay Time 15_seconds view SCSI Leon Timeout Defsu ult 7 seconds n v Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap heck Skea Disabled C Drive Predictable Failure Mode SMART Disable E ibre Channel Dual Loop Enabled e Disable Fibre Channel Dual Loop 7 is Redu Yes 1 No Cont 2 Drive Side Dual Loop Fibre drives are usually configured in a JBOD enclosure Through the enclosure backplane these drives form one or two circuit loops You may choose to assemble certain number of disk drives into a dual loop configuration using two of the controller channels To configure a dual loop connect two of the drive channels each to an FC AL port on the drive enclosure JBOD Please refer to the related documents that came with your drive enclosure for the connection details The dual loop configuration not only doubles traffic bandwidth by se
98. to be removed during the controller failover process Fibre Based Controllers Connection between controllers is more flexible with the Fibre based controllers Figure 10 2 Dual Controller Configuration Using Fibre fro ERE Hii Redundant Controller Based Controllers gt Host Ded raied Comn Parka e E Cantrelber Comiroller A Exterial poria Irmie dh keap JERII 10 3 10 4 The basic configuration rules are L All channels should be connected to both controllers as diagrammed above 2 To reduce the chance of downtime more than one hub or switch can be used to connect to host computer for path redundancy For the Fibre to Fibre controllers or RAID systems there are two options with configuring the communications loops between controllers 1 Dedicated Communications Loops RCC The first option is choosing one or two Fibre loops as the dedicated communications paths Two for communications is recommended for the path redundancy it provides Using two channels for the communications offers a greater throughput and hence a better performance 2 Communications over D rive Loops Drive RCC Configure all drive loops into the Drive RCC mode to let them share the communications traffic The controllers can automatically distribute the communications traffic across all drive loops Workflow is balanced among loops Using the drive RCC mode allows more channels to be
99. to choose the terminal emulation mode and ESC to return to the previous menu screen ache Status ean Write Cache Enable 8 10MB7S erminal VT 100 Mode PC Graphic ANSI Color Mode Show Transfer Rate Show Cache Status 7 2 Caching Parameters Optimization Modes Mass storage applications can be roughly categorized into two as database and video imaging according to its read write characteristics To optimize the controller for these two categories the controller has two embedded optimization modes with controller behaviors adjusted to different read write parameters They are the Optimization for Random I O and the Optimization for Sequential I O Terminal Operation 8 1 7 2 Limitations There are limitations on the use of optimization modes 1 You can select the stripe size of each array logical drive during the initial configuration However changing stripe size is only recommended for experienced engineers who have tested the effects tuning stripe sizes for different applications 2 The array stripe size can only be changed during the initial configuration process 3 Once the controller optimization mode is applied access to different logical drives in a RAID system will follow the same optimized pattern You can change the optimization mode later without having to re organize your array Database and Transaction based Applications This kind of applications usually incl
100. to light for a configurable period of time the faulty drive can be identified and thus reducing the chance of removing the wrong drive This function is especially helpful in an installation site operating with hundreds of drives Flash Selected SCSI Drive The Read Write LED of the drive you selected will light steadily for a configurable period of time from 1 to 999 seconds Flash All SCSI Drives The Read Write LEDs of all connected drives will light for a configurable period of time If the LED of the defective drive did not light on the Flash Selected SCSI Drive function use Flash All SCSI Drives to verify the fault If the Flash All SCSI Drives function is executed and the defective drive s LED still does not respond it can be a drive tray problem or the drive is dead LED LED St Flash All but Selected Drives LED LED Steadily ON a LED Steadily ON a LED Steadily ON a LED Steadily ON a LED Steadily ON onnected drives will light for a configurable period of time ranging LED driveifails and is about to be replaced come the selected drive the Read Write LEDs of all RW C 1 to 999 seconds If an administrator can not be sure of the Sie exact location of specific drive this function will help to indicate it is This can prevent removal of the wrong drive when a The drive iden
101. two controllers controllers might occupy ID 6 and ID 7 Please check your system Hardware Manual for details on preserved IDs Press Y Vor A to select a configured CH 0 ID 000 host ID and then press ENT for two Pri Ctlr seconds to confirm IDs are available as Primary or Secondary Controller IDs Press W or A to select the type of logical configuration Available Logical Volume choices are Map to Logical Volume Map to Logical Drive or Map to Physical Drive Confirm your choice by pressing ENT Press Y or A to select a LUN number then press ENT to proceed Press ENT for two seconds to confirm the selected LUN mapping Press W or A to select a partition from the logical volume Press ENT for two seconds to map the selected partition to this LUN If the logical configuration has not been partitioned Front Panel Operation 5 13 5 8 you can map the whole capacity to a host LUN Mapping information will be displayed on the subsequent screen Press ENT for two seconds to confirm the LUN mapping CH 0 IDO LUNO MAP to LV 0 PRT 0 With any of the Host ID LUN successfully associated with a logical capacity the No Host LUN message in the main menu will change to Ready If you want to create more host IDs please move to section 5 11 for more details on channel mode and channel IDs setting Assigning Spare Drive and Rebuild Settings Adding a Local Spare Drive Pre
102. unique identifier The value you enter MUST be different for each controller The Controller Unique Identifier is required for configuring every RAID controller The controller automatically notifies users to enter a unique identifier when the first logical drive is created in a dual controller system 7 39 Infortrend Enter a unique ID for any RAID controller no matter it is configured in a single or dual controller configuration The unique ID is necessary for the following 1 A controller specific identifier that helps controllers to identify its counterpart in a dual active configuration 2 The unique ID is generated into a Fibre channel WWN node name for controllers or RAID systems using Fibre channel host ports The node name is used to prevent host computers from mis addressing the storage system during the controller failover failback processes 3 MAC addresses for the controller s Ethernet port that should be taken over by a surviving controller in the event of controller failure In redundant mode configuration data is synchronized between controllers Host ports on both controllers appear with the same node name but each with a different port name WWPN When a controller fails and a replacement is combined as the Secondary controller the node name will be passed down to the Secondary controller The host will not acknowledge any differences so that controller failback is totally transparent The unique ide
103. used for drive connection With a 6 channel controller for instance there can be as many as two channels for host and four channels for drive drive RCC All channels are used for IO traffic while the system is still benefited from controller communications 10 1 3 Grouping Hard Drives and LUN Mapping Listed below are the array settings that need to be considered when configuring a dual controller system 1 How many logical drives logical volumes or logical partitions and in what sizes System drive mapping primary secondary ID how many storage volumes will appear to which host port and managed by which controller Infortrend Will those storage volumes be accessed in a multi host or multi path configuration Fault Tolerance Enabling the controllers for transparent failover and failback See 10 1 4 Logical Drive Logical Volume and Logical Partitions Redundant Controller Listed below are the basics about configuring a logical drive for a redundant controller system All configuration options are available through the Primary controller Two controllers behave as one and there is no need to repeat the configuration on another controller Drive configuration process is the same using single or redundant controllers Logical units can be manually assigned to different controllers to facilitate the active active configuration There is no limitation on drive allocation The members of a logical drive do
104. volume the whole capacity will be displayed as one logical partition 4 When prompted to Map z UN Host LUN press ENTER reate Host Filter Entry to proceed For access control over Fibre network find in Chapter 8 details about Create H ost Filter Entry 5 When prompted to Map Logical Volume select Yes to continue A prompt will display the mapping you wish to create Choose Yes to confirm the _ LUN mapping you selected Map Logical Volume Partition To Channel ID u Lun WR The detail in the confirm box reads partition 0 of logical volume 0 will map to LUN 0 of SCSI ID 0 on host channel 0 Continue to map other partitions to host LUNs With any of the Host ID LUN successfully associated with a logical capacity the No Host LUN message in the LCD screen will change to Ready If your controller has not been configured with a host channel and assigned with SCSI ID please move on to section nS Chel Infortrend 7 8 Assigning Spare Drive Rebuild Settings Adding Local Spare Drive A spare drive is a standby drive automatically initiated by controller firmware to replace a failed drive A spare drive must have an equal or larger capacity than the array members A local spare should have a capacity equal or larger than the members of the logical drive it is assigned to A global spare should have a capacity equal or larger than all physical
105. with Drives of Larger Capacity 7 Copy and Replace Procedure ccccccceceeeeseteceeeeeceeeeeeaeeseaeeseeeeesaeeesaeeeeneeeaas 7 12 4 Making Use of the Added Capacity Expand Logical Drive 9 12 5 Expand Logical Volum es l u u 11 12 6 Configuration Example Volume Extension in Windows 2000 Server 12 Appendix A LCD Keypad Navigation Map Appendix B Firmware Functionality Gei eet EE 1 Basic RAID Management l l u u u J J T 1 Advanced Features EECH 2 Caching Operations 2 uu ence J u us Sus aa teesnencedenctends Saatan PE unae eeii Seaia Ee 3 RAID Expansion ceiien naera Enna NO EEEE SEERE SANA aA NO eeneg 4 On line RAID Expansion J J J J J J J T J J 4 Fibre Channel Supporr U u u u uu uu u u 5 SMART Ee ee 6 Redundant Controlletisicsccccccctcpisccseeceeecchetshccedecedncedeettsccesccaedeeceedincuecsecaesatetsacececacecen 6 Data Sate ty E 7 System Security Seege 8 Environment Management U u u u J J T 9 SAF TE S E S e E 9 User Inter eege secre 22855 Sec eege eg 10 RAIDWatch el le Elte TEE 10 RS 232G OT E 10 Remote
106. with drives from different drive channels to avoid the fatal loss of data caused by bus failure Partitioning partitioning the logical drive or partitioning the logical volume Once a logical drive has been divided into partitions the logical drive can no longer be used as a member of a logical volume The members of a logical volume should have one partition only with the entire capacity If you want to use a partitioned logical drive for a logical volume delete the other partitions in this logical drive until there remains one partition only with the entire capacity Mind that deleting the partition of the logical drive will also destroy all data Data should be backed up before making partition configuration When a logical drive is used as a member to a logical volume this logical drive can no longer be partitioned in View and Edit Logical Drives Instead the Logical Volume can be partitioned into 8 in View and Edit Logical Volume The procedure for partitioning a logical volume is the same as that for partitioning a logical drive After the logical volume has been partitioned map each partition to a host ID LUN to make the partitions available as individual drives Infortrend Different write policies within a logical volume As members of a logical volume all logical drives will be forced to adopt a consistent write policy Whenever the write policy of a logical volume is changed for example the correspond
107. 03 gt 2344ILG NOTICE Media Error Encountered During Check Parit lt Thu Jun 19 15 68 38 2003 gt 11131 Slot Drive ALERT Bad Block Encountered 0x220 Thu Jun 19 15 68 36 2003 gt 2344 1LG NOTICE Media Error Encountered During Check Parity Block 66606622 lt Thu Jun 19 15 68 22 2003 gt Slot Drive ALERT Bad Block Encountered 0x120 Jun 19 15 68 14 2003 gt LG Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Parity Regeneration Jun 19 15 08 07 2003 gt On Line I ialization of Logical Drive Completed Jun 19 15 07 37 2003 gt s Move Cursor tEnter Select tEsc Exit iCtrl L Refresh Screen The P or S icon on the right indicates which one of the controllers Primary or Secondary issued an event in a dual controller configuration To clear the saved event logs scroll the cursor down to the last event and press ENTER Clear Above 8 Event Logs Yes No Choose Yes to clear the recorded event logs 6 10 Infortrend Chapter 7 Terminal Operation 7 1 Power on RAID Enclosure Hardware installation should be completed before powering on your RAID enclosure Drives must be configured and the controller properly initialized before host computer can access the storage capacity The configuration and administration utility resides in controller s firmware Open the initial terminal screen use arrow keys to move cursor bar through menu items then press ENTER
108. 1 SES C_I_ Power Supply_ Vendor descriptor strings Device Not Available gt MAlert OWarning ON otification Device missing Check loop connection and contact your system provider for help _ _ Cooling element Device N ot Supported 3f22 SES C_I_ Cooling element_ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Not Supported gt MAlert OWarning ONotification Unrecognizable device type Check loop connection and contact your system provider for help _ _ Cooling element Device Not Installed Infortrend Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 LineLCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Event Messages 3f22 SES C_I_ Cooling element_ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Not Installed gt MAlert OWarning Theinstalled deviceis missing ON otification Check loop connection and contact your system provider for help _ _ Cooling element Device Unknown Status 3f22 SES C_I_ Cooling element_ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Unknown Status gt MAlert OWarning Device reports unknown status strings ON otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ Cooling element_ Device Not Available 3f22 SES C_I_ Cooling element_ lt Vendor descr
109. 24 Peripheral Device ALERT UPS Battery Failure Detected MAlert OWarning ON otification UPS battery failure If UPS protection is lost inconsistency may occur to cached data upon power interruption Contact your system provider for help Infortrend Event Messages D 27 SES Device 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD D 28 _ _ Power Supply_ Device N ot Supported 3f21 SES C_I_ Power Supply_ Vendor descriptor strings Device Not Supported gt MAlert OWarning ON otification Unrecognizable device type Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ Power Supply_ Device Not Installed 3f21 SES C_I_ Power Supply_ Vendor descriptor strings Device Not Installed gt MAlert OWarning ONotification Theinstalled power supply is missing Check loop connection and contact your system provider for help _ _ Power Supply_ Device Unknown Status 3f21 SES C_I_ Power Supply_ Vendor descriptor strings Device Unknown Status gt MAlert OWarning ON otification Device reports unknown status strings Check loop connection and contact your system provider for help _ _ Power Supply_ Device Not Available 3f2
110. 3 Figure 1 17 Logical Volume with 4 Logical Drtves 1 13 Figure 1 18 Logical Volume with Drives on Different Channels 1 14 Chapter 2 Figure 2 1 Optimization Geng 2 3 Figure 2 2 Array Configuration Process 2 5 Figure 2 3 SGCGIIDUNe 2 7 Figure 2 4 Connecting Drives a 2 7 Figure 2 5 Physical locations of drive members ese eee eee 2 8 Figure 2 6 Partitions in Logical Configurations eeeseesseesseesseesreseressenees 2 8 Figure 2 7 Mapping Partitions to Host ID LUNS 2 9 Figure 2 8 Mapping Partitions to LUNs under ID 2 9 Chapter 5 Figure 5 1 Drive Space Allocated to the Last Partition 5 17 Chapter 7 Figure 7 1 Drive Space Allocated to the Last Partition 7 17 Chapter 8 Figure 8 1 Storage Pool 8 14 Figure 8 2 Host LUN Mapping u 8 15 Figure Ga LUN MasK L u uu ed au asas aaraa ae aaaea aaa sa syechevbeavens 8 15 Figure 8 4 LUN Filtering Configuration Sample 8 20 Chapter 9 Figure 9 1 SCGIIDAUNS 9 11 Chapter 10 Figure 10 1 Redundant Controller Configuration Flowchart 10 2 Figure 10 2 Dual Controller Using SCSI Based Controllers 0s 00ss00se 10 2 Figure 10 3 Dua
111. 32 Restoring the Default Setting SCSI Bus 5 33 Data Rate 7 32 5 13 7 13 System Functions 5 34 7 34 Mute Beeper 5 34 7 34 Change Password 5 34 7 34 Disabling the Password 5 35 7 36 Reset Controller 5 35 7 36 Shutdown Controller 5 35 7 36 Saving Configuration Data Saving NVRAM to Disks 5 36 7 38 Restore NVRAM from Disks 5 36 7 38 5 14 7 14 Controller Parameters 5 37 7 37 Controller Name 5 37 7 37 LCD Title Display Controller Name 5 37 7 37 Time Zone 5 38 7 41 Date and Time 5 39 7 41 Setting Password Password Validation Timeout 5 37 7 39 Controller Unique Identifier 5 37 7 39 5 15 7 15 SCSI Drive Utilities 5 40 7 42 Low level format 5 40 7 43 Read Write test 5 41 7 44 Chapter 8 Fibre Operation Page number 8 5 Host and Drive Parameters 8 6 View and Edit Fibre Channel 8 6 Channel Mode 8 6 Primary and Secondary Controller IDs 8 6 Communications Channel for cache coherency 8 7 View Channel WWN 8 7 View Device Port Name List WWPN 8 8 View and Edit Fibre Drives 8 8 User Assigned ID Scan Fibre Drive 8 8 View Drive Information 8 9 View and Edit Host side Parameters 8 9 Fibre Connection Types 8 10 View and Edit Drive side Parameters 8 10 Connecting Drives with Dual Loop 8 10 Controller Unique Identifier 8 11 Controller Communications over Fibre
112. 3f21 Peripheral Device ALERT Power Supply Not Present 3f21 Peripheral Device ALERT lt high low threshold gt Power Supply Voltage Detected _ 3f24 Peripheral Device ALERT UPS_ AC Power Failure Detected 3f24 Peripheral Device ALERT UPS _ Battery Failure Detected SES Devices 3f21 SES C_1_ Power Supply _ Vendor descriptor strings Device N ot Supported gt 3f21 SES C_1_ Power Supply _ Vendor descriptor strings Device N ot Installed gt 3f21 SES C_ l_ Power Supply _ Vendor descriptor strings Device Unknown Status gt 3f21 SES C_1_ Power Supply _ Vendor descriptor strings Device N ot Available gt 3f22 SES C_ _ Cooling element Vendor descriptor strings Device N ot Supported gt 3f22 SES C_ _ Cooling element lt Vendor descriptor strings Device N ot installed gt 3f22 SES C_ _ Cooling element lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Unknown Status gt 3f22 SES C_ _ Cooling element lt Vendor descriptor strings Device N ot Available gt 3f23 SES C_ _ Temperature Sensor lt Vendor descriptor strings Device N ot Supported gt 3f23 SES C_ _ Temperature Sensor Vendor descriptor strings Device Not installed gt 3f23 SES C_ _ Temperature Sensor Vendor descriptor strings Device Infortrend Unknown Status gt 3f23 SES C_ _ Temperature Sensor Vendor descriptor strings Device Not Available gt 3f24 SES C_ _ UPS_ lt Vendor descr
113. A OTP MULT 9zIS WWUCS NVUOGA 2061 WVA redAL Nd piomssed PIO myss vong piomssed asueyo gt prlomsseg d WA 2y f p omssed M N 1 d g INW oupu lureW 1 lonuoo 1 llonuo sty uwoplnus IonuoO SUL 19S2x priomsseg 8upuo radaag IN uoTeULIOyUy WIJS S A IA t suomun g ut sK s Navigation Map Appendix B Firmware Functionality Specifications Basic RAID Management Specification Feature RAID Levels 0 1 0 1 3 5 10 30 and 50 Multi level RAID with the logical volume implementation Maximum Number of logical drives 64 or 128 through OEM IAPPEND utility RAID level dependency to each logical drive Independent Logical drive configured in different RAID levels can co exist in a logical volume and ina RAID system Maximum number of drives for each logical drive 128 Configurable stripe size 4KB to 256KB per logical drive Configurable write policy Write back or write through per logical drive Logical drive identification Unique controller randomly generated logical drive ID Logical drive name user configurable Maximum number of partitions for each logical drive 128 through OEM iappend exe program Maximum number of 128 logical drives in a logical volume Maximum number of 32 logical volumes Maximum numb
114. Alert OWarning ON otification Voltage monitor detects the abnormal voltage has back to the normal range Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ UPS Device Not Installed 3f24 SES C_I_ UPS lt Vendor descriptor strings Device N ot Installed gt MAlert OWarning ONotification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ UPS Device Unknown Status 3f24 SES C_I_ UPS lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Unknown Status gt MAlert OWarning ON otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ UPS Device N ot Available Infortrend Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Event Messages 3f24 SES C_I_ UPS Vendor descriptor strings Device N ot Available gt MAlert OWarning ON otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ Voltage Sensor_ Device Not Supported 3f21 SES C_I_ Voltage Sensor_ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Not Supported gt MAlert OWarning ON otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ Voltage Sensor_ Device N ot Installed 3f21 SES C_I_ Voltage Sensor_ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Not Installed gt MAlert OWarni
115. C gt to clear the message Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Temperature_is present 3fa3 NOTICE Temperature_is present DAlert OWarning MN otification Event Type What Happens W hat to Temperature sensor_ detected Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Do 2 Line LCD Terminal FAN_ Back On Line 3fa2 NOTICE FAN_ Back On Liine DAlert OWarning MIN otification Event Type What Happens What to FAN_ back online Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Do 2 Line LCD Terminal FAN _ is present 3fa2 NOTICE FAN_ is present DAlert OWarning MIN otification Event Type What H appens What to FAN_ detected Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Do D 36 Infortrend 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do Power Supply _ Back On Line 3fal NOTICE Power Supply_ Back On Line DAlert OWarning Power supply back online MN otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Power Supply_ is present 3fal NOTICE Power Supply_ is present DAlert OWarning Power supply_ detected MIN otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message UPS_ AC Power Back On Line 3fa4 Peripheral Device NOTICE UPS_AC Power Back On Line DAlert OWarning MIN otification UPS AC
116. D 5 0 alogical volume with several RAID 5 members Infortrend Chapter 2 1 RAID Planning RAID Planning This chapter summarizes the procedures and provides some useful tools for first time configuration 2 1 Considerations things you should know before setting up 2 2 Configuring the the most common configuration Array procedure 2 3 Operation Theory the theory behind data bus and system drive mapping 2 4 Functional Table of a useful tool that helps you to quickly Contents locate a firmware function Considerations After you understand the basic ideas behind RAID levels you may still be wondering about how to begin Here are the answers to some questions that may help you through the decision making 1 How many physical drives do you have When initially creating the drive groups you should know how many drives you have in your RAID system or in the JBOD attached to the RAID controlling unit 2 How many drives on each drive channel The optimal system planning is always a compromise between pros and cons As a general rule the number of drives you should connect on each channel equals the data bus bandwidth divided by the maximum transfer rate you can get from each of your hard drives Knowing the mechanical performance of your hard drives can help to determine how many drives should be connected over a drive channel Always use fast and large drives of the same capacity for your disk array A logical dr
117. DAlert OWarning MN otification Start regenerating parity of a logical drive Press lt ESC gt to clear the message LG Parity Regen Completed 2186 Parity Regeneration of Logical Drive_ Completed DAlert OWarning MIN otification The regeneration process completed Press lt ESC gt to clear the message LG Start Expand 2187 LG_ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Expansion DAlert OWarning MIN otification Start expanding the logical drive Press lt ESC gt to clear the message 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do D 20 LG Expansion Completed 2188 Expansion of Logical Drive Completed DAlert OWarning Logical drive expansion completed MIN otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message LG Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Add SCSI Drive Operation 2189 LG_ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Add SCSI Drive Operation DAlert OWarning MN otification Expansion by adding new drive has started Press lt ESC gt to clear the message LG Add SCSI Drive Completed 218a Add SCSI Drive to Logical Drive Completed DAlert OWarning MIN otification The expansion by adding new drive is completed Press lt ESC gt to clear the m
118. Drive Test for Read and Write Drv Testing 23 Please Wait View Read Write Test Progress List Current Bad Block Table Abort Read Write Testing 5 41 Infortrend Chapter 6 Terminal Screen Messages 6 1 Date amp Time The Initial Screen Controller Name Cache Status Enables HaT E Hrite Cache Cursor Bar Controller Name Transfer Rate Indicator Gauge Range Cache Status Write Policy Date amp Time PC Graphic ANSI M ode Terminal VT 100 M ode PC Graphic ANSI Color M ode Show Transfer Rate Show Cache Status Terminal Screen Messages Write Policy Gauge Range Be Gree AMS SH e H sua Es e Show Laien Gi Zu Statue L Ret rear Move the cursor bar to a desired item then press ENTER to select Identifies type of controller or a preset name Indicates the current data transfer rate Use or keys to change the gauge range in order to view the transfer rate indicator Indicates current cache status Indicates current write caching policy Current system date and time generated by controller real time clock Enters the Main Menu and operates in ANSI mode Enters the Main Menu and operates in VT 100 mode Enters the Main Menu and operates in ANSI color mode Press EN TER on this item to show the cache status and transfer rate 6 2 6 3 Main Menu ean Enable ache Status i 47 i1 Wr
119. Drives C 1 I 0 1010MB GlobalSB SEAGATE Delete Spare Drive Delete Spare Drive Successful 5 12 Viewing and Editing SCSI Channels View and Edit SCSI Channels CHO Host PID 0 SID NA SXF 20 0M Redefine Channel Mode Redefine CHL 0 To Drive Channel CHO Drive PID 7 SID NA SXF 20 8M 5 25 5 3 a gt IMPORTANT Every time you change channel mode you must reset the controller for the changes to take effect Setting a SCSI Channel s ID Host Channel Viewing IDs Press ENT for two seconds to enter the Main Menu Press W or A to select View and Edit SCSI Channels then View and Edit SCSI Channels press ENT Channel information will be displayed CHO Host PID 0 Press ENT on the host channel you SID NA SXF 20 0M wish the ID changed Set SCSI Channel Press W or A to select Set SCSI ID Channel ID then press ENT Press Y or A to browse through the CHL 0 ID 0 existing ID settings Press ENT on any Primary Ctrl to continue Adding a Channel ID Press ENT on a host channel on Set SCSI Channel ID and then on an existing ID Press Y or to choose Add Channel Add Channel SCSI ID then press ENT SCSI ID Press Y or A to choose Primary Primary Controller or Secondary Controller Controller then press ENT for two seconds to confirm Press Y or to choosethe SCSI ID you Add CHL 0 TD 2 wish to add
120. Drives Logical Driyes The first logical drive displays If you have more than one logical drive use the W or A keys to select the logical drive you want to scan and then press ENT LGO RAID5 DRV 3 4095MB GD SB 0 Press W or A to select Media Scan Media Scan and then press ENT Press ENT again to display the first Priority configuration option Press ENT on it Normal and use arrow keys to select an option Press ENT to confirm the change on Priority priority level Ce Use arrow keys to move one level Iteration Count down to another option Iteration Single Count This option determines how many times the scan is performed on Iteration Count the logical drive If set to the continuous the scan will run in the background continuously until it is stopped by user Press ENT on your option to confirm Press ENT for two seconds to display Execute Media the confirm message press ENT to Scanning start scanning the array Front Panel Operation 5 2 Write Policy From the Main Menu press Y or A to View and Edit select View and Edit Logical Drives Logical Drives The first logical drive displays If you have more than one logical drive use LGO RAIDS DRV 3 the W or amp keys to select the logical 4095MB GD SB 0 drive you want to change the write policy of and then press ENT Use arrow keys to select Write Policy Write Policy and then press ENT Write Policy Write Back fs The
121. E The reassignment is evident from the View and Edit Logical Drives screen SO indicates that the logical drive is logical drive O assigned to the Secondary Controller renee a o P1 4DB655C0 NA RAID3 Ss 3 Di NONE BEES D Mapping a Logical Drive Logical Volume to the Host LUNs ache Status ean Main Menu Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes isu and edite Host luns sss Choose host channel ID system presicel Scat Drive Choose mapping to which logical unit view anzesetzen LUN LV LD DRV Partition Size MB RAID Select LUN number gt Bo Be ee E E LG ID LV RAID Size MB Status O LN SB FL NAME Select partition A a a A Partition Offset MB Size MB z Mapping optioin i reate ost Filter Entry Logical Drive Confirming mapping Partition d Channel scheme ID tes Infortrend Terminal Interface View of Controller Failure What will happen when one of the controllers fails When one of the controllers fails the other controller will take over in a few seconds Warning 11 F CHL SCSI Drive Channel ALERT SCSI Bus Reset Issued A warning will be displayed that a SCSI Bus Reset Issued for each of the SCSI channels In addition there will be an alert message that reads Redundant Controller Failure Detected
122. ER to proceed You may create as many as 128 logical drives from drives on any drive channel When prompted to Create Logical Drive select Yes and press Create Logical Drive 7 ENTER to proceed WER No Terminal Operation 7 5 Choosing a RAID Level A pull down list of supported RAID levels will appear In this chapter RAID 5 will be used to demonstrate the configuration process Choose a RAID level for this logical drive Choosing Member Drives Choose your member drive s from the list of available physical drives The drives can be tagged for inclusion by positioning the cursor bar on the drive and then pressing ENTER An asterisk mark will appear on the selected physical drive s To deselect the drive press ENTER again on the selected drive The mark will disappear Use T J keys to select more drives ache Status ean Write Cache Enable 3 of 8 Selected SE a ia ee Sw palma mirar EE x s s soe so new ow CC pa Dr Disk Reserved Boece 256 MB Logical Drive Assignments Write free am Default rite Back od Initialize On Line Stripe Size Default After all member drives have been selected press ESC to continue with the next option A list of array options is displayed Maximum Drive Capacity Maximum Available Drive Capacity MB 9993 Maximum Drive Capacity MB 3993 As a rule a logical drive should be composed of drives of the same capacity
123. ERT UPS Power Failure Detected _ Event Type MAlert OWarning ONotification What UPS Power Failure Happens What to If UPS protection is lost inconsistency may occur to cached data upon Do power interruption Auto switch to write through cache upon the D 22 detection of UPS failure will be available in future release of firmware Contact your system provider for help Infortrend Controller On board 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do Event Messages CPU _ _ Temp Detected 3f23 Peripheral Device ALERT CPU Temperature lt high low threshold gt Temperature Detected _ C MAlert OWarning ONotification The detected CPU temperature is higher or lower than the preset thresholds Check the enclosure ventilation condition If necessary temperature thresholds can be modified to suit different working conditions Board 1 _ _ Temp Detected 3f23 Peripheral Device ALERT Board 1 Temperature lt high low threshold gt Temperature Detected _ C MAlert OWarning ON otification The detected main circuit board temperature is higher or lower than the preset thresholds Check the enclosure ventilation condition If necessary temperature
124. Edit Main Menu Press Y or A to select SCSI Channels View and Edit SCSI Channels then press ENT 5 27 Infortrend Channel information will be displayed CH1 Drive PID 7 Press ENT on the drive channel you SID NA SXF 80 0M wish the ID changed Press Y or A to select Set SCSI Set SCSI Channel Channel Pri Ctlr ID then press Pri Ctlr ID ENT Press Y or A to select a new ID then Set Pri Ctlr press ENT for two seconds to confirm ID 7 to ID 8 Setting a SCSI Channel s Secondary ID Drive Channel Press ENT for two seconds to enter the View and Edit Main Menu Press Y or A to select SCSI Channels View and Edit SCSI Channels then press ENT Channel information will be displayed CHl Drive PID 7 Press ENT on the drive channel you SID NA SXF 20 0M wish the ID changed Press W or A to select Set SCSI Set SCSI Channel Channel Sec Ctlr ID then press Sec Ctlr ID ENT Press Y or A to select a new ID then A Set Sec Ctlr press ENT for two seconds to confirm ID NA to ID 9 Setting Channel Bus Terminator Press ENT for two seconds to enter the D View and Fdit Main Menu Press Y or A to select SCSI Channels View and Edit SCSI Channels then press ENT Channel information will be displayed EE Press Y or A to select a channel Press SID NA SXF 20 0M ENT on a channel you wish the terminator mode changed Set SCSI Channel Press Y or A to select Set SCSI SE Channel Te
125. Happens What to Do Event Messages CHL ID DriveFailure 2101 LG lt NA Logical Drive Index gt Logical Drive ALERT CHL ID SCSI Drive Failure MAlert OWarning ON otification The specified hard drivein the specified logical drive has failed If aspareis available the controller will automatically start rebuild If there is no spare replace the faulty drive and rebuild will be automatically initiated LG ALERT Rebuild Failed 2103 LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Rebuild Failed MAlert OWarning ON otification Logical drive rebuild failed It could result from one of the following reasons 1 The rebuild has been canceled by user 2 The drive used for rebuild might have failed during rebuild 3 Bad blocks are encountered on another member drive during the rebuild Carefully identify and replace the faulty drive and perform logical drive initialization again LG ALERT Add Drive Failed 2106 LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Add SCSI Drive Operation Failed MA lert OWarning ON otification This is a fatal error encountered when a new drive is being added to an existing logical drive It could result from one of the following reasons 1 Unrecoverable hardware failure during the expansion process 2 Errors are found concurrently on two member drives 3 Bad blocks are encountered on another member drive during the expansion Data in the target logical drive will be lost Warning 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H
126. ID izeCMB gt Speed LG_DRU Status View drive information N ON LINE SEAGATE ST318304FC view 5 view s _Revision Number DIAS 8304FC view all Serial Number 3ELBBFUNBBBB7 B47 sust I Disk Capacity blocks 35964380 8304FC view dj Node Name WWNN gt 26 B B 26 37 65 7B DA view Redundant Loop ID D 82 75FC 2 5 17366 18BHB NONE FRHT DRU SEAGATE 5ST318275FG 2 6 17366 100MB NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE 1318275F C 2 7 17366 100MB NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE 5ST318275FG If the selected drive belongs to a drive group that is configured in a dual loop the Redundant Loop ID will be displayed here View and Edit Host Side Parameters ain installation Maximum Queued Lo Count 256 LUNs per Host SCSI ID Max Number _of Concurrent Host LUN Connection 32 Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connection Def 32 Peripheral Device pe Parameters Host C Linder Head Sector Mapping Configuration PEN to point Cup Loop preferred otherwise point to point Point to point preferred otherwise Loop Fibre Operation 8 9 1 Fibre Channel Connection Type Use the T keys to scroll down to View and Edit Configuration Parameters Host side SCSI Parameters and then Fibre Connection Option A prompt will display all the options Select one appropriate for your Fibre channel topology If connection to host is through a Fibre hub choose Loop only If connection to host is
127. IDO array has no redundancy Interruptions during the expansion process may cause unrecoverable data loss 4 Interruption to the Process Expansion should not be canceled or interrupted once begun A manual restart should be conducted after the occurrence of power failure or interruption of any kind Infortrend Expand Logical Drive Re Striping Figure 12 1 Logical Drive Expansion 4GB 4GB 4GB Inuse 2G Unused 26 Dese EE EE ae P Expand Logical Drive Ee ARAOS 515 A a asss 4GB 4GB 4GB N partitions I Partition N 1 new partition After expanding logical drive the additional capacity will appear as another partition new partition RAID levels supported RAID 0 3 and 5 Expansion can be performed on logical drives or logical volumes under the following conditions 1 Thereis an unused capacity in a logical unit 2 Capacity is increased by using member drives of larger capacity see Copy and Replace in the discussion below Data is recalculated and distributed to drive members or members of alogical volume On the completion of the process the added or the previously unused capacity will become a new partition The new partition must be made available through host LUN mapping in order for a host adapter to recognize its presence Array Expansion 12 3 12 4 12 2 Mode 1 Expansion Adding Drives to a Logical Drive Use drives of the same capacity as that of the orig
128. In View and Edit SCSI Drives choose one drive to test to Press ENTER on the drive a sub menu will appear 5 Note that a new item Predictable Failure Test appears in the sub menu If the SMART feature is not properly enabled this item will not appear in the sub menu Infortrend Cache status Cl an Quic Slot Chl ID Size MB view view view Vendor and Preduct ID Speed LG_DRV Status view View drive information view Scan scsi drive view set slot Number view add drive Entry syst Tdentif scsi drive vlew view NEW DRY NONE NEW DRY 6 Choose Predictable Failure Test the controller will force the drive to simulate predictable drive errors View drive information Sean scsi drive set slot Number add drive Entry Identify scsi drive 7 Press ENTER and after a while the next time the controller performs Periodic Drive Check the controller will detect the errors simulated by the drive An error message displays like this 1142 SMART CH ID Predictable Failure Detected TEST If this error message appears it means your drive supports S M ART features 1115 CHL 2 ID SCSI Drive ALERT Unexpected Sense Received 5276 8 Otherwise you may simply refer to related documentation or contact drive manufacturer for information about whether the drive model and drive firmware v
129. Infortrend Drive E now has a capacity of about 25GB New Volume E Properties Array Expansion 12 17 i aua oi pungay lt ku zepma NT ve au aur uo t av SW I 3 1Ps ox mua 8SG W AS GVA D71 p at 3opuo A ANa Ma aanse lech AY aang pa o rode osu OT pitnq s d p snun EEN Supusdxq GET tg 101S gg ZztSxeW AN IVA 91 1 995 r HEEN AND 12894 oq 8S CD AN xe AU IVa 9T qta oumy asua poor VPA P MITA antag t uonnma uontuta AT191ppy mme s id eao satt SAIA ISIS MAA aua Teao l q GCH30pu9A NT 4 971 Sg lei sumag xuq aquo qumu pun ue salva ava lava SOL PS AIVA anq as AQLAY BEES I 30pu A AAG MAN PLIES atvu t s 151 AWD AN 4 SI THO au s 0 AIVA IVAN Aud A AMC MIN LCD Keypad Navigation Map Appendix AW see sl O PWO LANL aa Wesss OLS Hi ZSXYEW i stet zum 1307 Honq mds AIVA uondo mamm ay pua 10 noue poue pim DSA NATISOH au sava Duren suondo aow o no peaj ao uon j s snod mamen sad Open HLON ege amdg Cu day mone umoq ss 14 S lava ava Kay moan dr seau e 1 aiva BIO IVAN Win A0 PS
130. Infortrend External RAID Controller amp Subsystem Generic Operation Manual Revision 1 61 Firmware Version 3 31 Infortrend Asia Pacific International headquarter Infortrend Technology Inc 8F No 102 Chung Shan Rd Sec 3 Chung Ho City Taipei Hsien Taiwan Tel 886 2 2226 0126 Fax 886 2 2226 0020 sales infortrend com tw support infortrend com tw www infortrend com tw China Infortrend Technology Limited Room 1236 Tower C Corporate Square No 35 Financial Street Xicheng District Beijing China 100032 Tel 86 10 88091540 Fax 86 10 88092126 sales infortrend com cn support infortrend com cn www infortrend com cn Copyright 2003 Americas Infortrend Corporation 3150 Coronado Drive Unit C Santa Clara CA 95054 USA Tel 408 988 5088 Fax 408 988 6288 sales infortrend com support infortrend com www infortrend com Europe Infortrend Europe Limited Ground Floor Chancery House St Nicholas Way Sutton Surrey SM1 1JB United Kingdom Tel 44 0 20 8770 1838 Fax 44 0 20 8770 7409 sales infortrend europe com support infortrend europe com www infortrend europe com This Edition First Published 2003 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manua
131. M port LAN port or via In band SCSI New releases of firmware are available in the form of a DOS file in the pub directory of Infortrend s FTP site or on a 3 5 diskette The file available at the FTP site is usually a self extracting file that contains the following FW30Dxyz_ Firmware Binary where xyz refers to the firmware version B30Buvw Boot Record Binary where uvw refers to the boot record version README TXT Read this file first before upgrading the firmware boot record It contains the most up to date information which is very important to the firmware upgrade and usage These files must be extracted from the compressed file and copied to a directory in boot drive New Features Supported with Firmware 3 21 Background RS 232C Firmware Download Host I Os will not be interrupted during the download process After the download process is completed user should find a chance to reset the controller for the new firmware to take effect Redundant Controller Rolling Firmware Upgrade When download is performed on a dual controller system firmware is flashed onto both controllers without interrupting host I Os After the download process is completed the Primary controller will reset and let the Secondary take over the service temporarily When the Primary comes back on line the Secondary System Functions Upgrading Firmware C 1 will hand over the workload and then reset itself for the new firmware to take
132. Multiple target IDs can be applied to the Host channels while each Drive channel has only one or two IDs in redundant mode e Atleast a controller s ID has to present on each channel bus Setting a Primary Controller s SCSI ID Drive Channel lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view ID o view channel Mode ID 1 Mery Primary controller scsi id ID 2 econdary controller scsi id ID 3 v scsi Terminator ID 4 v Ch syne transfer Clock efWid S Term CurSynClk Curf ID 5 s Wide transfer ID 6 vila iew and edit scsi target Hide L On Async Nar Dl vlt parity check Enabled _ 1 view chip inFormation H Change Primary Controller SCSI ID r NA 40 OME H Lies n No 3 Drive 7 NA Ap MHz Hide LI On Async Nar ID 13 ID 14 ID 15 Choose a drive channel then press ENTER Choose Primary Controller SCSI ID A list of channel IDs displays Choose an ID The dialog box Change Primary Controller SCSI 1D displays Select Yes then press ENTER 7 27 Infortrend For more details on ID settings in redundant mode please refer to Chapter 10 Setting a Secondary Controller s SCSI ID Drive Channel Main Menu gt Quick Installation ID view and edit Logical drives ID 1 view ID 2 i channel Mode ID 3 Primary controller scsi id ID 4 ESecondary control fer coi ig s ID 5 scsi Terminator 7 7 ID _ amp
133. N otification The designated temperature sensor has failed This may be caused by mistakes with device target setting or device failure Check 12C cable connection and contact your system supplier Temp Sensor_ Not Present 3F23 Peripheral Device ALERT Temperature Sensor_ Not Present MAlert OWarning ON otification The controller failed to detect the presence of the designated temperature sensor Check ZC cable connection ZC device setting and contact your system supplier High Low _ Temperature Detected 3F23 Peripheral Device ALERT lt high low threshold gt Temperature_ Detected _ F C MAlert OWarning Critical high or low temperature detected ON otification Check enclosure ventilation status and then contact your system provider for help Fan_ Failure Detected 3F22 Peripheral Device ALERT FAN_ Failure Detected MAlert OWarning ON otification Cooling fan failure detected by 12C enclosure management Check cooling fan s status and contact your system supplier Fan_ Not Present 3F22 Peripheral Device ALERT FAN_ Not Present MAlert OWarning ONotification The controller failed to detect the presence of the designated temperature sensor Check 12C cable connection 12C device setting and contact your system supplier Fan _ _ Speed Detected _RPM D 25 Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal E
134. Parity select Yes IMPORTANT e If a regenerating process is stopped by a drive failure the process cannot restart until the logical drive is successfully rebuilt by having its failed member replaced Media Scan Media Scan is used to examine drives and is able to detect the presence of bad blocks If any data blocks have not been properly committed and are found during the scanning process data from Terminal Operation 7 19 those blocks are automatically recalculated retrieved and stored onto undamaged sectors If bad blocks are encountered on yet another drive during the rebuild process the block LBA Logical Block Address of those bad blocks will be shown If rebuild is carried out under this situation rebuild will continue with he unaffected sectors salvaging a majority of the stored data ache Status ean Write Cache Enable There are two options with performing the media scan 1 Media Scan Priority determines how much system resources will be used for drive scanning and recalculating process 2 Iteration Count Media Scan Priority Normal Pireration Count Sinal ount ingle Time Set Media Scan Iteration Count to Continuous Scan WEN No The iteration setting determines how many times the scan is performed If set to the continuous the scan will run in the background continuously until it is stopped by user Write Policy View scsi drives Delete logical drive Parti
135. Power Back On Line Press lt ESC gt to clear the message UPS Battery Back On Line 3fa4 Peripheral Device NOTICE UPS Battery Back On Line DAlert OWarning MN otification UPS_ battery back online Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Event Messages D 37 SES Device Alert 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do D 38 Power Supply_ Failure Detected 3f21 SES C_I_ Power Supply_ Power Supply Failure Detected MAlert OWarning O Notification Power supply failure detected Check power module status and contact your supplier for a replacement unit Cooling Fan_ Not Installed 3f22 SES C_ _ Cooling element_ Cooling Fan Not Installed MAlert OWarning O Notification Cooling fan missing or not detected Check proper fan installation or contact your supplier to replacea failed unit Cooling Fan_ Failure Detected 3f22 SES C_I_ Cooling element Cooling Fan Failure Detected MAlert OWarning O Notification Contact your system provider for an immediate replacement of fan modules Contact your system provider for an immediate replacement of fan modules C_ _ Elevated Temperature Alert 3f23 SES C_I_ Temperature Sensor_
136. S and other countries All other names brands products or services are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies RMA Policy Please visit our websites www infortrend com www infortrend com tw ww infortrend com cn www infortrend europe com where our RMA policy is givena detailed explanation Supported M odels This manual supports the following Infortrend controllers subsystems e SentinelRAID SCSl based external RAID controllers including the 5 25 full height and 1U canister configuration e EonRAID Fibre based external RAID controllers including the 5 25 full height and 1U canister configuration e EonStor subsystems that come with SCSI or Fibre host channels e FT 6230 and 6330 series ATA RAID subsystems Printed in Taiwan Table of Contents Chapter 1 RAID Functions An Introduction 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 L ogical DIV u u u ege EES qaway ENEE EEN 1 Logical VolUMe uy l l I ee EEN 1 What is a logical volume a 1 RAF ele ee eege ec 2 What are the RAID levels asss 2 NA eege ie teen eeh ee i ee at Zei bet hia 3 JBOD EE 3 RAID Oi EE A PRA Ge Dee ege EE Ee 4 RAID Oca EE 4 RAID EE 5 RAID Best 8 telnet ian Ea sua niin see aaa eee 5 Spare DIVO eoi eeen oe eao apaa aeaee eo ore EEEo aeae ae Ea ar Eate Ae Saee HEE esidan 6 Global and Local Spare Drives r a 6 Iden
137. SC to clear the error message 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do C l Predictable Failure Detected TEST 1142 SMART CH _ ID Predictable Failure Detected TEST DAlert MWarning ON otification This message appears when simulating the SMART detect function This message shows that your drives support SM ART functions Press ESC to clear the error message CL Predictable Failure Detected 1142 SMART CH _ ID Predictable Failure Detected DAlert MWarning ONotification SM ART related errors detected This message will only be displayed when SMART detect is enabled CL Predictable Failure Detected Starting Clone 1142 SMART CH _ ID Predictable Failure Detected Starting Clone DAlert MWarning ON otification SMART errors detected a spare is conducted to rebuild and to replace the faulty drive This is a response to the preset scheme C l Predictable Failure Detected Clone Failed 1142 SMART CH _ ID _ Predictable Failure Detected Clone Failed DAlert MWarning ON otification SMART errors detected and a spare is conducted to rebuild The cloning process is halted due to power interruption and some other reasons C l Scan SCSI Drive
138. SC gt to clear the message Board_ Temp Back N on Critical 3fa3 Board_ lt high low gt Temperature Back To Non Critical Levels OCritical OWarning MNotification Board_ temperature back to non critical level Press lt ESC gt to clear the message 3 3V Back to Non Critical 3fal 3 3V lt high low gt Voltage Back within Acceptable Limits OCritical OWarning MNotification 3 3V voltage source back within acceptable limits Press lt ESC gt to clear the message 5V Back to Non Critical 3fal 5V lt high low gt Voltage Back within Acceptable Limits OCritical OWarning MNotification 5V voltage source back within acceptable limits Press lt ESC gt to clear the message 12V Back to Non Critical 3fal 12V lt high low gt Voltage Back within Acceptable Limits OCritical OWarning MNotification 12V voltage source back within acceptable limits Press lt ESC gt to clear the message D 35 2 Line LCD Terminal Contlr FAN_ Back On Line _ 3fa2 NOTICE Controller FAN_ Back On Line _RPM DAlert OWarning MIN otification Event Type What Happens What to Controller fan operating status back to normal Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Do IC Device 2 Line LCD Terminal Temp_ Back to Non Critical 3fa3 NOTICE Temperature_ Back to Non Critical Levels Event Type What H appens What to DAlert OWarning MIN otification Detected temperature back to non critical levels Press lt ES
139. SCSI Drive menu and click on the spare drive either a local or a global one Choose from the menu items if you want to know about the status of the source drive the cloning progress or to abort cloning Slat OT TO Sree Specs CORN CL ass a CL ziel e e 2 a ame a TTT TT Quic Vendor and Product ID view view view view view view view syst view view ON LINE ON LINE ON LINE ource Drive Talat AS View clone progress EW DRY Abort clone one Failing drive my in Die 0 NONE NEW DRY NOTE With the precaution of untimely drive failure of yet another drive when configured as perpetual clone thespare drive will only stay mirrored to the source drive the drive with signs of failure but not replacing it until the source drive actually fails 4d When the spare drive is mirroring the source drive any occurrence of drive failure when there is no other spare drives will force the spare drive to give up the mirrored data and resume its 9 9 Infortrend original role it will become a spare drive again and start rebuilding the failed drive 5 The Detect Clone Replace Function 5a In View and Edit Configuration Parameters Drive side SCSI Parameters Drive Predictable Failure Mode lt SMART gt choose Detect Clone Replace 5b Make sure you have at least one spare drive to the logical drive Either Local Spare Drive
140. Slot Size MB Speed LG_DRV Status Vendor and Product ID 2 9 2010 ZOMBI NONE NEI DRY 2018 20MB NONE NEW DRY Use arrow keys to scroll down to View and Edit SCSI Drives This will display information of all the physical drives installed 7 4 Infortrend Drives will be listed in the table of View and Edit SCSI Drives Use arrow keys to scroll the table You may first examine whether there is any drive installed but not listed here If there is a drive installed but not listed the drive may be defective or not installed correctly please contact your RAID supplier IMPORTANT e Drives of the same brand model capacity might not have the same block number e Thebasic read write unit of a hard drive is block If members of a logical drive have different block numbers capacity the smallest block number will be taken as the maximum capacity to be used in every drive Therefore use drives of the same capacity e You may assign a Local Global Spare D rive to a logical drive whose members has a block number equal or smaller than the Local Global Spare D rive but you should not do the reverse 7 4 Creating a Logical Drive Browse through the main menu and select View and Edit Logical Drive ache Status ean Write Cache Enable Tis 10 Lv RAlo sizeW Status 1 2 ee 1 i tr For the first logical drive on RAID early aed LG 0 eg Drees ENT
141. Successful 11c1 CHL ID SCSI Drive NOTICE Scan SCSI Drive Successful DAlert MWarning ON otification Scanning a new drive from on a SCSI drive successful Infortrend Channel Warning 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do Event Messages Chl _ Redundant Loop Connection Error Detected on ID 113f CHL _ ALERT Redundant Loop Connection Error Detected on ID DAlert MWarning ON otification One of the dual loop members may have failed or been disconnected Make sure all channels are properly connected and topological configuration properly set Check the redundant fibre channel loop connection is right Chl _ SCSI Drive Channel ALERT SCSI Channel Failure 113f CHL _ SCSI Drive Channel ALERT SCSI Channel Failure OAlert MWarning ON otification Specific drive channel may have failed or disconnected Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Ch Fibre Channel Loop Failure Detected 113f CHL _ ALERT Fibre Channel Loop Failure Detected DAlert MWarning ON otification Fibre channel loop failure is detected Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Chl _ Redundant Loop for Chl _ Failure Detected 113f CHL _ ALERT Redundant loop for Chl _ F
142. T Press ENT for two seconds to confirm A prompt will inform you the controller NVRAM data has been successfully restored from disks Front Panel Operation 5 36 5 37 5 14 Controller Parameters Controller Name Select View and Edit Config Parms from the main menu Choose View and Edit Configuration parameters Controller Parameters then press ENT The current name will be displayed Press ENT for two seconds and enter the new controller name by using W or A Press ENT to move to another character and then press ENT for two seconds on the last digit of controller name to complete the process LCD Title Display Controller Name Choose View and Edit Configuration parameters Controller Parameters then press ENT Use Y or A to choose to display the enbedded controller logo or any given name on the LCD initial screen Password Validation Timeout Choose View and Edit Configuration parameters Controller Parameters then press ENT Select Password Validation Timeout and press ENT Press Y or A to choose to enable a validation timeout from one to five minutes to always check The always check timeout will disable any configuration change without entering the correct password Controller Unique Identifier Choose View and Edit Configuration parameters Controller Parameters then press ENT Press Y or A to select Controller Name LCD Tit Control LCD
143. Temperature Parameters The current specimens of voltage and temperature detected by the controller will be displayed on screen and will be stated as normal or out of order Terminal Screen Messages 6 9 6 9 Viewing Event Logs on the Screen There may be a chance when errors occur and you may want to trace down the record to see what has happened to your system The controller s event log management will record all the events from power on it can record up to 1 000 events Powering off or resetting the controller will cause an automatic deletion of all the recorded event logs To view the events logs on screen choose from main menu view and edit Event logs by pressing ENTER Cache Status Clean ain Menu Quick installation view Logical drives view it logical Yolumes view and Hest luns view it scsi Drives view and it Scsi channels view and i kond iguration Parameters view and it Peripheral devices system Functions view system Information view and edit Event logs The controller can store up to 1000 event logs for use in modifying the configuration with reference to the present time shown on the upper left of the configuration screen and the time when the events occurred nu Jun 17 D D El ache Status Event Logs 2186 Parity Regeneration of Logical Drive Completed Thu Jun 19 15 68 48 2003 gt 2544 1LG NOTICE Media Error During Check Parity Block 0080000520 Recovered 08 38 20
144. View and Edit Configuration Parameters Host side SCSI Parameters then press ENTER Choose Max Number of Concurrent Host LUN Connection then press ENTER A list of available selections will appear Move cursor bar to an item then press ENTER Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm your setting The default setting is 4 Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connection Each nexus has 32 the default setting tags reserved When the host computer sends 8 of I O tags to the controller and the controller is too busy to process all the host might start to send less than 8 tags during every certain period of time since then This setting ensures that the controller will accept at least 32 tags per nexus The controller will be able to accept more than that as long as the controller internal resources allow if the controller does not have enough resources at least 32 tags can be accepted per nexus Cache status Clean Main Quick installation Maximum Queued_ L Count 256 LUNs per Host SCSI ID 8 Max Number of Concurrent Host LUN Conosci ien Def 4 Pe SES Parameters Host ey Tinder Head ector Mapping Configuration Fibre Connection Option Loop only Host side Parameters Drive side Parameters Disk Array Parameters Redundant Controller Parameters Controller Parameters Choose Host side SCSI Parameters then press ENTER Choose
145. Write Back cache setting is configurable on a per array basis Setting to the default value means the array setting is coordinated with the controller s general setting The controller s general setting option can be found in View and Edit Config Parms gt Caching Parameters gt Write Back Cache Note that cached writes are lost if power failure should occur unless cached data has been duplicated to a partner controller and a battery is supporting cache memory 5 21 Infortrend 5 10 Viewing and Editing Host LUNs Viewing and Deleting LUN Mappings Press ENT for two seconds to enter the Main Menu Press Y or A to select View and Edit View and Edit Host Luns then press Host Huns l ENT Press Y or A to select a host ID then CH 0 ID 002 press ENT to proceed Sec Ctlr Press Y or A to browse through the CH 0 ID 0 LUN 0 LUN number and its LUN mapping Mapto LGO PRTO information Press ENT on the LUN you wish to Delete CHO IDO delete LUN 00 Mapping Press ENT for two seconds to confirm CH 0 ID 0 LUN 0 deletion The deleted LUN has now Not Mapped been unmapped For LUN Filtering functions e g Create H ost Filter Entry Edit H ost ID WWN Name List please refer to Chapter 8 Fibre O peration Pass through SCSI Commands Pass through SCSI commands facilitate functions like downloading firmware for drives or devices not controller firmware setting SCSI drive mode parameters or monitoring
146. Write Poli add Logical Ygrive Steg Press ENTER and the information of the created logical volume displays LV Logical Volume ID PO Logical Volume 0 managed by the primary controller SO Logical Volume 0 managed by the secondary controller ID Unique D for the logical volume randomly generated by the controller Size Capacity of this volume LD Number of the included members 7 6 Partitioning a Logical Drive Logical Volume The process of partitioning a logical drive is the same as that of partitioning a logical volume We take the partitioning of a logical volume for an example in the proceeding discussion Please note that partitioning can be very useful when dealing with a very large capacity but partitioning a logical drive or logical volume is not a must for RAID configuration Terminal Operation 7 11 ache Sta an Write Gow Enable Choose the logical volume you wish to partition then press ENTER Choose Partition logical volume then press ENTER Select from the list of undefined partitions and Press ENTER A list of partitions displays If the logical volume has not yet been a all volume will list as partition 0 af tv mp Size MB Partition Offset MB Size MB SN al 2236 v v v Partition Size MB 59956 _ v arameter v ces s v Vv Press ENTER and type the desired size for the selected partition and then
147. a LUN map We then append filtering mask s to the LUNs making specific storage unit accessible or inaccessible to one or multiple host adapters H BA s Infortrend Fibre Operation Figure 8 2 Host LUN Mapping fost Channel ID LUN Lume wows aga Parma j Logical Drive Peri ke 1 Parties 1 BG Op Physical Drives Creating LUN Masks User can configure the storage subsystem to appear as 32 LUNs per Fibre target ID Each LUN can be mapped with a storage unit a partition or the entire logical drive The configuration of logical units depends on host applications and how many drives and drive channels have been employed in the storage system The diagram below shows the idea of the virtual connection and the physical connection from host computers to drives There can be many host computers connected across a storage network and a system administrator may want to make each storage unit available for certain host systems while forbidden for some others Figure 8 3 LUN Mask Hoot Mrt Heat B Het A SAN 6 l C m l i k l LUN Mak Se Y EE LURI BALD Sexatenm z LUN Mask te LUND mersine heer C ra poser whi ferbiiting Bes i irem cam ra adie dee The access control can also be implemented by filter drivers However comparing to the control by software access control based on controller LUN mapping can avoid overheads on server and the additional I O latency The
148. a weer oe st 1 af aes7 san so wenom ooi Il 4es7 es weier _ Infortrend When formatted a meta filesystem is created on the 256MB reserved space A drive configured with a reserved space will be stated as a formatted drive 3 Assign an IP Address to Ethernet Port Assign an IP address to the controller Ethernet port and specify the Net Mask and gateway values Power off your system and then power on again for the configuration to take effect Select View and Edit Configuration Parameters from the main menu Select Communication Parameters gt Internet Protocol TCP IP gt press ENTER on the chip hardware address gt and then select Set IP Address lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters View SES Sec NS nternet Protoco P IP ile System Maintenance Provide the IP address NetMask and Gateway values accordingly lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters a Not Set nternet Protoco P IP i ystem Maintenance PING the IP address from your management computer to ma
149. able view chip inFormation 2 orie 7 mal 40 048 Hide 5 on 20 o Hide fs prive 7 nal 40 cnr wide e on arne Narrow For Fibre and SCSlI based controllers all channels can be operated in host or drive mode Choose the channel you wish to change then press ENTER Choose Channel Mode then press ENTER A dialog box will appear asking you to confirm the change IMPORTANT e Every time you change the channel mode you must reset the controller for the change to take effect 7 25 Infortrend Viewing and Editing SCSI IDs Host Channel channel Mode view and edit scsi parity check Enabled view chip inFormation i ETT maaa vice Jl On Async Narrow a er E EE Choose a host channel then press ENTER Choose View and Edit SCSI ID A list of existing ID s will be displayed on the screen You may then choose to add or delete an existing ID Viewing and Editing SCSI IDs Adding a SCSI ID Primary Secondary Controller ID Main Menu gt Quick installati view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels i CurSynClk Bee Ph S000 OSC D BH Boo 000000000 Aad elete anne In single controller mode you should set the Secondary Controller s ID to NA In dual controller mode you need
150. able failure A channel failure will cause multiple drives to fail at the same time and inevitably lead to a fatal failure Using a logical volume with drives coming from different drive channels can get around this point of failure Figure 1 18 Logical Volume with Drives on Different Channels CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 SE CLA JA De olli Al RAID 5 GC i CH1 1D0 cH2noo crano cranpo cHsipo CH6ID0 Logical Ad gc Drive z E at SE Li RAID 5 CH1 ID1 CH2 ID1 CH3 ID1 CH4 ID1 CH5 ID1 CH6 ID1 Logical H ra a Drive m m m M mm Logical Volume S A oo Le RAID 5 i a F a z ap pe F Logical i AA CH2 ID2 CH3 ID2 Seel CH5 ID2 CH6 ID2 Drive KA Kl A Za E Seit A At FT Resmi a Logical Volume 24 drives 4 redundancy drive eS i 17 S 7 RAID 5 dem CH1 ID3 CH2 ID3 CH3 ID3 CH4 ID3 CH5 ID3 CH6 ID3 Logical L Drive J ae 20 wc Dei
151. ablish the communication with a terminal e If you are using a PC as a terminal any VT 100 terminal emulation software will suffice Microsoft Windows includes a terminal emulation program as presented with the Hyper Terminal icon in the Accessories window e For other details of connecting serial port please refer to the Hardware M anual that came with your controller Out of Band via Serial Port and Ethernet 3 1 3 2 3 1 1 Configuring RS 232C Connection via Front Panel Take the following steps to change the baud rate using the front panel keypad Press ENT for two seconds to enter the Main Menu Press Y or A to select View and Edit Configuration then press ENT Select Communication Parameters then press ENT Select RS 232 Configuration then press ENT Select COM1 Configuration then press ENT Select Baud rate 38400 then press ENT The baud rate default is 38400 If other baud rate is preferred press W or A to select the baud rate then press ENT for 2 seconds to confirm the selected baud rate Set identical baud rate to your RAID array and your terminal computer View and Edit Config Parms Communication Parameters RS 232C Configuration COM1 Configuration Baud rate 38400 Baud rate 38400 Change to 192002 e The following baud rates are available 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 e Terminal connection should work properly using the ab
152. aching Operation Write back Cache Supported Write through Cache Supported Supported Memory type SDRAM memory for enhanced performance Fast Page Memory with Parity for enhanced data security Read ahead Operation Intelligent Dynamic read ahead operation for sequential data accessing Multi Threaded Operation Yes Scatter Gather Supported UO sorting Supported Optimized I O sorting for enhanced performance Variable Stripe Size Opt for Sequential Opt for LO Random I O RAIDO 128 32 Firmware Functionality Specifications B 3 RAID1 128 32 RAID3 16 4 RAID5 128 32 Caching Optimization e Cache buffer sorting prior to cache flush operation e Gathering of writes during flush operation to minimize the number of IOs required for parity update e Elevator sorting and gathering of drive IOs e Multiple concurrent drivelOs tagged commands e Intelligent predictive multi threaded read ahead e Multiple concurrent host IO threads host command queuing RAID Expansion On line RAID Expansion Supported Mode 1 RAID Expansion add Drive Mode 2 RAID Expansion Copy and Replace drives Supported Multiple drives can be added concurrently Supported Replace members with drives of larger capacity Expand Capacity with no extra drive bays required Supported in Mode 2 RAID expansion Provide Copy and Replace Driv
153. after Change Logical the initial configuration Volume Params I Logical Volume If the redundant controller function has Assignments a been enabled secondary controller IDs assigned to lO channels the Red Ctlr Assign assignment menus should appear as to Sec Ctlr listed on the right If settings related to redundant controllers have not been accomplished you may find the option 8 Logical Volume after the volume is successfully created g Assignment Press ENT on a configured logical Red Ctlr Assign volume Use arrow keys to select to Sec Ctlr Logical Volume Assignment and press ENT to proceed Press ENT for two seconds to confirm Press ESC and the LCD will display the logical volume s information when initialization is finished Front Panel Operation 5 11 5 6 Partitioning a Logical Drive Logical Volume Partitioning as well as the creation of logical volume are not the requirements for creating a RAID system The configuration processes for partitioning a logical drive are the same as those for partitioning alogical volume Press ENT for two seconds to enter the Main Menu Press W or A to select View and Edit Logical Volume then press ENT Press Y or A to select a logical volume then press ENT Press W or A to select Partition Logical Volume then press ENT The total capacity of the logical volume will be displayed as the first partition partition 0 Pres
154. ailure Detected To delete a specified item and all events press 2 seconds prior to this event press ENT for 2 to Clear Events seconds IMPORTANT e Theevent log will be cleared after the controller is powered off or reset 4 7 Infortrend Chapter LCD Keypad Operation 5 1 Power on RAID Enclosure Before you start to configure a RAID systen make sure that hardware installation is completed before any configuration takes place Power on your RAID enclosure 5 2 Caching Parameters Optimization Modes Mass storage applications can be categorized into two according to its read write characteristics database and vide imaging To optimize the controller for these two categories the controller has two embedded optimization modes with controller behaviors adjusted to different read write parameters They are the Optimization for Random I O and the Optimization for Sequential IO Limitations There are limitations on the use of optimization modes 1 You can select the stripe size of each array logical drive during the initial configuration However changing stripe size is only recommended for experienced engineers who have tested the effects tuning stripe sizes for different applications 2 The array stripe size can only be changed during the initial configuration process 3 Once the controller optimization mode is applied access to different logical drives in a RAID system will follow the same opti
155. ailure Detected DAlert MWarning ON otification The pair loop has failed Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Ch Redundant Path for Chl _ ID Expected but N ot Found 113f CHL _ ALERT Redundant Path for Chl ID Expected but Not Found DAlert MWarning ON otification Disconnection with the pair loop may have occurred Press lt ESC gt to clear the message 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do Notification 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do D 16 C l Red Path for C I Failure Detected 113f CHL _ ID ALERT Redundant Path for Ch ID Failure Detected DAlert MWarning ONotification Disconnection with the pair loop may have occurred Press lt ESC gt to clear the message C Fibre Chl Loop Connection Restored 113f CHL _ NOTICE Fibre Channel Loop Connection Restored DAlert OWarning MIN otification Fibre loop connection restored Press lt ESC gt to clear the message C l Red Path C I Restored 113f CHL ID _ NOTICE Redundant Path for Chl _ ID _ Restored DAlert OWarning MN otification The connection with pair loop regained Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Infortrend Logical Drive Event Alert 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What
156. ailures can be predicted S M A R T predictability is limited to the attributes the drive can monitor which are selected by the device manufacturer based on the attribute s ability to contribute to the prediction of degrading or fault conditions Although attributes are drive specific a variety of typical characteristics can be identified e head flying height e data throughput performance espin up time e reallocated sector count e seek error rate e seek time performance e spin try recount e drive calibration retry count Drives with reliability prediction capability only communicate a reliability condition as either good or failing In a SCSI environment the failure decision occurs at the disk drive and the host notifies the user for action The SCSI specification provides a sense bit to be flagged if the disk drive determines that a reliability issue exists The system then alerts the user system administrator B Infortrend s Implementations with S M ART Infortrend is using ANSI SCSI Informational Exception Control IEC document X3T10 94 190 standard Infortrend There are four selections related to the S M A R T functions in firmware Disable Disable S M A R T related functions Detect Only S M A R T function enabled controller will send command to enable all drives S M A R T function if a drive predicts a problem controller will report the problem in the form of an event log Perpetual Clone
157. al drive the rebuild will begin automatically The default setting is Disabled meaning that the controller will not Auto Detect the swap of a failed drive To enable this feature select a time interval SCSI Motor Spin Up Disabled SCSI Reset at Power Up Disabled Disk Access Delay Time GD seconds SCSI I 0_Timeout 1 seconds Maximum Tag Count 32 Periodic Drive Check Time 10 seconds Periodic Gre Ga Poteet Pall Device Check Time i A 5 seconds i Dis Drive side Parameters Disk Array Parameters Redundant Controller Parameters ontroller Parameters Choose Periodic Drive Check Time then press ENTER Move cursor to the desired interval then press ENTER Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting 9 23 Infortrend IMPORTANT e By choosing a time value to enable the Periodic Drive Check Time the controller will poll all connected drives through the controller s drive channels at the assigned interval Drive removal will be detected even if a host does not attempt to access data on the drive e If the Periodic Drive Check Time is set to Disabled the default setting is Disabled the controller will not be able to detect any drive removal that occurs after the controller has been powered on The controller will only be able to detect drive removal when a host attempts to access data on that drive Advanced Configurations 9 24 93 M
158. al drive is immediately accessible If the Online method is used data can be written onto it before the array s initialization is completed Front Panel Operation 5 7 Users may proceed with array configuration e g including this array in alogical volume Array initialization can take a long time especially for those comprised of large capacity Setting to Online means the array is immediately accessible and that the controller will complete the initialization when IO demands become less intensive Stripe Size This menu allows you to change the Stripe size array stripe size Setting to an Default incongruous value can severely drag the performance This item should only be changed when you can be sure of the performance gains it might bring you Listed below are the default values for an array The default value for stripe size is determined by controller Optimization Mode and the RAID level chosen for an array Opt for Sequential I O Opt for Random I O RAI DO 128 32 RAI D1 128 32 RAI D3 16 4 RAI D5 128 32 When you are done with setting logical drive preferences press ESC and use your arrow keys to select Create Logical Drive Press ENT for two seconds to proceed Beginning Initialization Press ESC to return to the previous EE menu Use Y or A to choose Create Drive 2 Logical Drive then press ENT for two seconds to start initializing the logical drive The O
159. an Failure Detected _ 3f23 SAF TE Device _ ALERT Elevated Temperature Alert _ 3f24 SAF TE Device _ ALERT UPS Power Failure Detected _ Controller on board 3f23 Peripheral Device ALERT CPU Temperature lt high low threshold gt Temperature Detected _ C 3f23 Peripheral Device ALERT Board1 Temperature lt high low threshold gt Temperature Detected _ C 3f23 Peripheral Device ALERT Board2 Temperature lt high low threshold gt Event Messages D 3 Temperature Detected _ C 3f22 Peripheral Device ALERT Controller FAN Not Present or Failure Detected 3f22 Peripheral Device ALERT Controller FAN lt high low threshold gt Speed Detected _ RPM 3f21 Peripheral Device ALERT 43 3V lt upper lower threshold gt Voltage Detected _ 3f21 Peripheral Device ALERT 5V lt upper lower threshold gt Voltage Detected _ 3f21 Peripheral Device ALERT 12V lt upper lower threshold gt Voltage Detected _ C Device 3f23 Peripheral Device ALERT Temperature Sensor _ Failure Detected 3f23 Peripheral Device ALERT Temperature Sensor Not Present 3f23 Peripheral Device ALERT lt high low threshold gt Temperature Detected _ F C 3f22 Peripheral Device ALERT FAN _ Failure Detected 3f22 Peripheral Device ALERT FAN Not Present 3f22 Peripheral Device ALERT lt high low threshold gt FAN Speed Detected _ RPM 3f21 Peripheral Device ALERT Power Supply _ Failure Detected
160. an be assigned as the Local Spare Drive that serves one specific logical drive or as a Global Spare Drive that participates in the rebuild of any logical drive Spares automatically joins a logical drive when a drive fails Spares are not applicable to logical drives that have no data redundancy NRAID and RAID 0 Figure 2 6 Partitions in Logical Configurations a Paten 0 28 RAID PI p 1 16 KA we CEO KZ Logical Cria Patir 7 SC d Parii am D ch EC RADO LA BGB Panen 7 a Logical Drive GC Pariion SGB You may divide a logical drive or logical volume into partitions of desired capacity or use the entire capacity as single volume 1 It is not a requirement to partition any logical configuration Partitioning helps to manage a massive capacity 2 Notethata logical drive can not be included in a logical volume if it has already been partitioned 2 8 Infortrend 2 3 3 Making Arrays Available to Hosts Figure 2 7 Mapping Partitions to Host ID LUNs Logical Drive 1 Partition 0 Logical Drive 0 LUN 1 Logical Drive 1 L GB E Partition 1 S Partition 1 Logical Drive 1 2GB Partition 2 Logical Drive 0 Partition 0 Host ID mapping is a process that associates a logical configuration of drives with a host channel ID LUN To avail logical partitions on host channel s map each partition to a host ID or one of the LUNs under host IDs Each
161. and then press ENT Press Y or A to select a logical drive entry then press ENT for two seconds to proceed LG is short for Logical Drive Choosing a RAID Level Press W or A to choose the desired RAID level then press ENT for two seconds TDRV Total Drives refers to the number of available SCSI drives Choosing Member Drives Press ENT for two seconds a message RAID X selected To Select drives will prompt Confirm your selection by pressing ENT Press ENT then use Y or A to browse through the available drives Press ENT again to select deselect the drives An asterisk mark will appear on the selected drive s To deselect a drive press ENT again on the selected drive The mark will disappear C 11 0 refers to Channel 1 SCSI ID 0 After all the desired drives have been selected press EN T for two seconds to continue Press W or A to choose Create Logical Drive then press ENT for two seconds to start initializing the logical drive Logical Drive Preferences You may also choose Change Logical Drive Parameter then press ENT to change related parameters before initializing the logical drive View and Edit Logical Drives LG 0 Not Defined S TDRV 4 Create LG Level RAID5 RAID X Selected To Select drives Create Logical Drive 2 Change Logical Drive Parameter 5 6 Infortrend Maximum Drive Capacity Choose Maximum Drive Capacity
162. annel s Primary ID Drive Channel 27 Setting a SCSI Channel s Secondary ID Drive Channel s 28 Setting Channel Bus Terminator a 28 Setting Transfer Speed uuu sauku sawas RaRa na oia Eina nai aa 29 Setting Transfer Width uu unun usu haaie ae ena aa aa eaa aea ita papas 30 Viewing and Editing SCSI Target Drive Channel 30 Eege lu e 31 Maximum Synchronous Transfer Clock 1 31 Maximum Transfer Wd 31 Parity Check ee eebe inetd uapa KA EVEA NNA iu sasa 32 DiSCONNECtING Gupport L 32 Maximum Tag Count a L nel aie u hae elds 32 Restore to Default Geiting a 33 System FUNCUONS ya Ra pasqa EEN EEN 34 Mute Beeper u l ciel NEE deed AEN ER 34 Change Passwords ett aii aia Aa S A a u aaah 34 Ghanging Met E 34 Disabling Password cece eaaeeeeetaaeeeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeneaa 35 Reset Controller uu uawan q ass dania taatau asss daana aai aiden 35 Shutdown Controller ccccceceseeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeaaeeseeeeseeeeeseaeeseeeseneees 35 Controller Maintenance 36 Saving NVRAM to DISKS uu ai aaa Wasa i suwa Quy 36 Restore NVRAM from Dieks 36 Controller Parameters u u u u u 37 Controller Nam cones gaa sat Suatu h usa EES 37 LCD Title Display Controller Name 37 Password Validation Tmeout 37 Controller Unique Identifier
163. appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do Notification 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD D 18 LG ALERT Init Failed 2102 LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Initialization Failed DAlert MWarning ON otification Logical drive initialization failed It could result from one of the following reasons 1 Logical drive initialization canceled by user 2 On of the member drives failed during logical drive initialization 3 One of the member drive encountered bad block Carefully identify and replace the faulty drive and let the logical drive re initialize and start rebuild LG Parity Regen Failed 2104 LG_ Logical Drive ALERT Parity Regeneration Failed DAlert MWarning ON otification During the parity regeneration process one member drive has failed Rebuild the logical drive first then perform Regenerate Parity Regeneration can only be performed on a Good GD logical drive C l Clone Failed 2111 LG_ Logical Drive ALERT CHL ID Clone Failed OAlert MWarning ON otification The clone drive operation has failed or halted by system error One of the member drives might have failed during the process Replace the faulty drive and let the system rebuild Data on the source drive from where the spare clone data
164. ard use with system event notification To activate the NPC module do the following 1 Listed below is the sample configuration Specify your Create an NPC configuration file in a simple text file format using a text editor program Save it in the name of agent ini FTP it to the controller IP address and then reset the controller for the configuration to take effect configuration using simple defining parameters as shown below The configuration file is comprised of three major sections SNMP Email and Broadcast Each notifying method can be separately enabled or SNMP_TRAP ENABLED 0 1 on 0 off SEVERITY 1 COMMUNITY public RECEIVER 1 XXX XXX XXX XXX 2 2 specifies the level of events to be received by this receiver EMAIL ENABLED 0 SEVERITY 1 SUBJECT Event Message SENDER_MAIL_BOX XXXX XXXXX XXX SMTP_SERVER XXX XXX XXX XXX RECEIVER 1 XXXX XXXXX XXX 3 RECEIVER2 XXXX XXXXX XXX 1 RECEIVER3 XXXX XXXXX XXX 2 RECEIVER4 XXXX XXXXX XXX 1 BROADCAST ENABLED 0 SEVERITY 1 RECEIVER XXX XXX XXX XXX 1 RECEIVER XXX XXX XXX XXX 1 NOTE NPC will be automatically activated if any of the notifier settings email SNMP or broadcast is set to enabled disabled Connecting Terminal The SNM P_TRAP section SNMP_TRAP section header ENABLED enabled 0 disabled applies to this section only SEVERITY level of severity of the messages t
165. arry out that amount of sustained read write performance For the performance of each drive model please refer to the documentation provided by drive manufacturer Infortrend 7 13 System Functions Cache Status Clean Main Menu Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Rent iaureat ian parameters view and edit SS eral devices V Mute beeper change Password Reset controller Shutdown controller ontroller maintenance Choose System Functions in the main menu then press EN TER The System Functions menu displays Move the cursor bar to an item then press ENTER Mute Beeper lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit gonf iaurat ign Parameters view and edit ae eral devices VM v Mute beeper e R Mute Beeper C Yes No When the controller s beeper has been activated choose Mute beeper then press ENTER Choose Yes and press ENTER in the next dialog box to turn the beeper off temporarily for the current event The beeper will still be activated on the next event Change Password lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes vi
166. artition of a partitioned logical volume as one single physical drive The benefits of using a logical volume have been achieved by 1 Extending the MTBF mean time between failure by using more redundancy drives spare drives 2 Decreasing the time to rebuild and reducing the chance of data loss by simultaneous drive failures because drives are included in different drive groups using a multi level logical structure 3 Avoiding the chance of data loss by channel bus failure with flexible drive deployment As diagramed below numerous drives can be included in a logical drive and one of them is used for redundancy By grouping these drives into several logical drives and then into a logical volume chance of failing two drives in a logical unit is greatly reduced Each logical drive can have one or more local spares A failed drive can be immediately replaced by a local spare reducing the risk of losing data if another should fail soon afterwards Functional Description 1 12 Figure 1 16 Logical Drive Composed of 24 Drives EPI looe ageet joooooo Joe eo oo RAID 5 Logical Drive EE 24 drives 1 redundancy drive 9 x i Configuration A One logical drive with all 24 drives As illustrated above Configuration A is a RAID 5 logical drive consisting of 24 physical drives Configuration B is a logical volume made of four RAID 5 logical drives Figure 1 17 Logical Volume with 4 Logical
167. at Failed fan back to on line state Happens What to Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Do 2 LineLCD SAF TE_ Temp _ Back Non Critical Terminal 3fa3 SAF TE Device _ NOTICE Temperature Back to N on Critical Levels _ Event Type DAlert OWarning MN otification What Temperature back to non critical level Happens What to Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Do 2 LineLCD SAF TE_ Power Supply Back On Line Terminal 3fa1 SAF TE Device _ NOTICE Power Supply Back On Line _ Event Type DAlert OWarning MN otification What Power supply restored Happens What to Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Do 2 LineLCD SAF TE_ UPS Back On Line Terminal 3fa4 SAF TE Device _ NOTICE UPS Power Back On Line Event Type OCritical OWarning MIN otification What UPS power restored H appens What to Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Do D 34 Infortrend Controller Self Diagnostics 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do Event Messages CPU Temp Back N on Critical 3fa3 CPU lt high low threshold gt Temperature Back to N on Critical Levels OCritical OWarning MNotification CPU operating temperature back to non critical level Press lt E
168. ation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Yolumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters v ontroller Name Not Set New Controller Name ontro er Parameters nter Set to Detault serexit tri L Refres ereen Choose View and Edit Configuration Parameters Controller Parameters then press ENTER The current name displays Press ENTER Enter a name in the dialog box that prompts then press EN TER LCD Title Display Controller Name lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Yolumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters C Controller Name HQ 1 L D litle Display Controller Logo P LCD Title Display Controller Name 7 je R yes No Cont Choose View and Edit Configuration Parameters Controller Parameters then press ENTER Choose to display the embedded controller logo or any given name on the LCD Giving a specific name to controller can give you the ease of identification if you have multiple RAID systems remotely monitored lt lt mn lt CJD 7 37 Infortrend Saving NVRAM to Disks You can choose to backup your controller dependent configuration information to disks We recommend using this function t
169. by drives available to this logical drive Except the spares dedicated to other logical configurations all spare drive s will be counted in this field including Global and Local Spares xxxxM BINITING The logical drive is now initializing xxxxMB INVALID For firmware version before 3 31 The logical drive has been created with Optimization for Sequential 1 O but the current setting is Optimization for Random UO OR The logical drive has been created with Optimization for Random I O but the current setting is Optimization for Sequential 1 O Firmware version 3 31 has separate settings for array optimization and array stripe size This message will not appear when the optimization mode is changed xxxxM B GD SB x Thelogical driveisin good condition xxxxM B FL SB x Onedrivefailed in this logical drive xxxxM B RB SB x Logical Drive is rebuilding xxxxM B DRVMISS Oneof the drives is missing INCOMPLETE Two or more drives failed in this logical ARRAY drive Infortrend 4 3 4 4 Logical Volume Status Logical Volume Logical Volume ID Status LV 0 ID 09816DE9 00002021MB DRV 1 y a Volume capacity Number of drives Logical V olume The Logical Volume number DRV x The number of logical drive s contained in this logical volume Logical VolumeID The unique ID number of the logical volume controller random generated Logical Volume Status xxxM B The capacity
170. ce _ NOTICE Power Supply Back On Line Idx _ 3fa4 SAF TE Device _ NOTICE UPS Power Back On Line Idx _ Controller Self Diagnostics 3fa3 CPU lt high low threshold gt Temperature Back To N on Critical Levels _ C 3fa3 Board _ lt high low threshold gt Temperature Back To Non Critical Levels _C 3fa1 3 3V lt upper lower threshold gt Voltage Back within A cceptable Limits 3fa1 5V lt upper lower threshold gt V oltage Back within Acceptable Limits 3fa1 12V lt upper lower threshold gt Voltage Back within Acceptable Limits Event Messages D 5 3fa2 NOTICE Controller FAN _ Back On Line _ RPM IC Device 3fa3 NOTICE Temperature _ Back to Non Critical Levels 3fa3 NOTICE Temperature _ is present 3fa3 NOTICE Temperature Back to Non Critical Levels _ C F 3fa2 NOTICE FAN _ Back On Line 3fa2 NOTICE FAN _ is Present 3fa2 NOTICE FAN _ Back On Line 3fa1 NOTICE Power Supply Back On Line 3fal NOTICE Power Supply _ is Present 3fa1 NOTICE Power Supply _ Back On Line lt voltage gt 0 3fa4 Peripheral Device NOTICE UPS_ AC Power Back On Line 3fa4 Peripheral Device NOTICE UPS _ Battery Back On Line SES Devices 3f21 SES C_ I_ Power Supply _ Power Supply Failure Detected 3f22 SES C_ l_ Cooling element _ Cooling Fan Not Installed 3f22 SES C_ I_ Cooling element _ Cooling Fan Failure Detected 3f23 SES C_ _ Temperature Sensor _ Elevated Temperature Alert 3
171. channels can be manually assigned as the dedicated communications loops two are recommended for path redundancy and sufficient bandwidth 2 Drive RCC Communications traffic distributed over drive loops Connection between Controllers Cabling between controllers hardware link through a common backplane Fibre hub or switch for SA N applications and for those models that do not have by pass chips Channel Mode Assignment According to the topological plan your I O channels can be designated as e Host e RCC paths e Drive e Drive RCC Host Channel Connection Type This depends on the way your RAID system is connected to the host computer s The host connection type can be e FC AL e Fabric point to point Controller Unique ID This ID will be used to generate Fibre ports node names and is necessary for addressing the controller during the controller failover failback operation Dual Loop 1 Drive side dual loop provides data path redundancy Firmware is capable of executing a load sharing algorithm to optimize dual loop Infortrend Fibre Operation performance H ost side dual loop is passively supported and requires the support of multi path software on the host computer 8 3 Supported Features Fibre Chip 1Gbit Fibre Channel Fibre loops 1 Gbit FC AL comply with the following standards 1 2
172. choose Send file If you are not using Hyper Terminal choose Upload or Send depending on the software 7 After the Boot Record has been downloaded send the Firmware Binary to the controller In HyperTerminal go to the Transfer menu and choose Send file If you are not using Hyper Terminal choose Upload or Send depending on the software 8 When the Firmware completes downloading the controller will automatically reset itself System Functions Upgrading Firmware CB Upgrading the Firmware Binary Only Cache Status Clean lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit wakuna devices v Mute beeper e Download Firmware Arrow Keys Move Cursor tEnter Select iEsc Exit iCtr1 L Refresh ves No Download Firmware Advanced Maintanence Functions Screen 1 From the Main Menu scroll down to System Functions 2 Goto Controller Maintenance 3 Choose Download Firmware 4 Set ZMODEM as the file transfer protocol of your terminal emulation software 5 Send the Firmware Binary to the controller In Hyper Terminal select Send file If you are not using HyperTerminal choose Upload or Send depending on the software ache Status ean Main Menu Quick installation
173. configurable time span between the detection of exceeded temperature and the controller s commencing an automatic shutdown 9 4 Disk Array Parameters Cache Status Clean Main Menu Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters _ v Communication Parameters Caching Parameters Host side SCSI Parameters Drive side SCSI Parameters Dis Array Parameters ia Rebuild Priorit ow Verification on Writes Arrow Keys Move Cursor nter Select HSH trl L R Select View and edit Configuration parameters on the main menu and press ENTER Choose Disk Array Parameters then press ENTER again The Disk Array Parameters menu will appear Rebuild Priority lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters rameters Cach os rs Host orma arameters Driv Improved Parameters D High eters ters C Rebuild Priorit ow Verification on Writes Choose Rebuild Priority then press ENTER A list of the priority selections Low Normal Improved or High displays Move cursor bar to a selection then press ENTER 9 27 Infortrend Verification on Writes Errors
174. controller function in Autoconfigure mode choose Yes HM Main Mere A Quick jnalallati vite and bai k Tezis g dr sees vire and boluses view ahd edit Host Lee View and edit gosi alae view and i vie Controller Ugis Hieaqifier 112 A Controller Unique Identifier box will appear Enter a hex number from 0 to FFFFF then press ENTER to proceed The value you enter for controller unique ID should be different for each controller Power off controller 1 and then power on controller 2 Set controller 2 to Autoconfigure as described in the steps mentioned above Power off controller 2 When the redundant controller function is set to the Automatic setting the controllers will decide between themselves which will be the Primary controller If you need to specify a particular controller as Primary or Secondary do not set it as autocfg choose Primary or Secondary instead Redundant Configuration Using Manual Setting Power on controller 1 Make sure controller 2 is powered off Enter the main menu Use the arrow keys to navigate through the menus Choose View and Edit Peripheral Devices then press EN TER Choose Set Peripheral Device Entry then press ENTER Redundant Controller 10 27 Choose Redundant Controller Function and then press EN TER Note The current setting will be displayed on the screen If this controller has never been set as a redundant controller before the d
175. ctionality Specifications B 9 User Interface RAIDWatch on board Out of band configuration via LAN Browser accessible configuration option by installing RAIDWatch to reserved space on drive via ftp RS 232C Terminal Supports terminal modes ANSI VT 100 ANSI Color Provides menu driven user friendly text based interface Graphical User Interface Java based GUI Manager Provides user friendly graphical interface Communicates with RAID controller via In band SCSI In band Fibre or SNMP Windows based GUI Customers can use Infortrend RAIDWatch or develop their own GUI according to the External Interface Specification contact Infortrend support for this OEM document External Interface API for customized host based management Supported LCD Front Panel Provides easy access for user instinct operation Buzzer alarm Warns user when any failure or critical event occurs Remote Manageability Modem Support The COM 1 port of the controller can be connected to a MODEM for remote manageability Auto dial out Supported Can be configured to dial out to a remote terminal when controller is powered on for remote administration Event dial out to terminal Supported Can be configured to dial out a remote terminal when an event occurs Event dial out to pager Supported Can be configured to dial out a pager number with message user configured with AT
176. d 50 RAID Level Performance Sequential Performance Random PNRAID Dive ve O _ RAID 0 R Highest R High W Highest W Highest W Medium W Low E Is T W Medium W Low m Tona e W Medium W Low NRAID Disk Spanning Figure 1 2 NRAID L u 2 GB Hard Drive Minimum 1 Disks required 3 GB Hard Drive Capaci Redundanc 01 GB Hard Drive NRAID stands for Non RAID The capacity of all n the drives is combined to become one logical Ma ee ee ne drive no block striping In other words the ee capacity of the logical drive is the total capacity of S the physical drives NRAID does not provide data redundancy 2 r zl s HB GB Logical Drive Logical _ Drive J JBOD Single Drive Control Figure 1 3 JBOD JBOD a i Minimum Gei JCT gt B Hard Drive ee ag e Capacity s see JC 3 GB Hard Drive panai TATS a ep A i 1 GB Hard Drive JBOD stands for Just a Bunch of Drives The Tart controller treats each drive as a stand alone sep L i D 2 GB Hard Drive disk therefore each drive is an independent ee logical drive JBOD does not provide data redundancy Functional Description 1 3 RAID 0 Disk Striping Figure 1 4 RAID 0 Tooical Dive a aes Phisical Tieke Minimum 2 L Beck 4 Disks required deeg ec Redundanc No Se RAID 0 provides the highest performance Block 7 _ but no redundancy Data in the logical drive i
177. dant controller Supported Synchronized cache Supported Through single or redundant dedicated synchronizing channels Synchronized cache over Fibre loops is supported Synchronized cache can be disabled when using write through mode in redundant controllers to prevent performance trade offs Write back cache enabled in redundant controller mode Automatic Failover Yes with synchronized cache connection between controllers Yes for all PowerPC controllers user s interaction necessary Automatic Failback Yes for all PowerPC controllers user s interaction necessary Fibre channel redundant controller Supported Controller Hot Swap No need to shut down the failed controller before replacing the failed controller Customer s design in hot swap mechanism necessary Support on line hot swap of the failed controller There is no need to reset or shutdown the failed controller One controller can be pulled out during active I Os to simulate the destructive controller failure Customer s design in hot swap mechanism necessary Redundant Controller Communication channel SentinelRAID SCSI RCC Reset signals built in EonRAID Fibre channel s RCC cable necessary Parity Synchronization in redundant controller write back mode to avoid write hole Supported Infortrend Redundant Controller Communication over Fibre loops Dedicated loops or distribution over
178. de ranges and does not fall in any Exclude range then it is included 2 If an ID falls within ANY Exclude range no matter if it also falls in another Include range then it is excluded 3 If the ID falls in none of the ranges and there is at least one Include range specified then the ID should be considered as excluded 4 If the ID falls in none of the ranges and only Exclude ranges are specified then the ID is considered as included 8 19 Access Mode Read Only or Read Write A particular extended LUN map can be setup with an attribute of Read Only in the event that certain hosts may need to read the data on the media but must not be allowed to change it In the degenerate case range only includes a single ID different hosts can be mapped with completely different logical drives logical volumes logical partitions even when they address the same channel target ID and LUN When completed with configuring LUN mask press ESC to map a logical unitto LUN lt Main Menu gt Quick installation LUN LULO DRU Partition Size MB gt view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes Map Logical Drive 1 view and edit Host luns Partition 1 D Host Channel To Channel u CHL ID lt Primary Controll ID u CHL 1 ID 1 Secondary Contro Lun u sustem Functions vieu system Information view and edit Event logs hh Yes Multiple filter entries can be crea
179. der month day hour minute and the year 7 41 Infortrend 7 15 Drive Information View Drive Information Cache Status Clean Main Menu Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives ID Size MB Speed LG_DRV Status Vendor and Product ID view ERRECHEN RE El View drive information ON LINE IBM DDRS 34560D s _Revision Number DC1B DDRS 34560D a Serial Number RD1IW1911 L Disk Capacity blocks 8924999 DDRS 3456 D ON LINE IBM DDRS 3456 D sciExit tri _ Refres creen From the View and Edit SCSI Drives menu select the drive that the utility is to performed on then press ENTER Select View drive information then press ENTER SCSI Drive Utilities From the View and Edit SCSI Drives menu select the drive that the utility is to performed on then press ENTER Select SCSI Drive Utilities then press ENTER Choose either SCSI Drive Low level Format or Read Write Test Cache Status Clean ID Size MB Speed LG_DRV Status Quic Slot Ch1 Vendor and Preduct ID IBM DDRS 3456 D View drive information add Local spare drive IBM DDRS 34568D add Global spare drive Scan scsi drive IBM DDRS 3456 D set slot Number add drive Entry IBM DDRS 34568D Identify scsi drive Toggl Failure signal LINE IBM DDRS 3456 D IBM DDRS
180. disk striping with dedicated parity disk RAID level 5 striping with interspersed parity RAID Based Mapping RCC rebuild priority Rebuild Settings LCD Rebuild Settings terminal rebuild automatic rebuild logical drive Rebuilding a Logical Drive LCD Rebuilding Logical Drive terminal rebuilding logical drive Redefining Channel Mode LCD Redefining Channel Mode terminal Redundant Configuration Fibre interface redundant configuration SCSI interface redundant controller Index 6 1 5 1 5 8 14 8 7 9 27 5 14 15 7 15 1 9 5 18 5 18 7 18 5 18 5 25 7 25 10 3 10 2 10 23 10 29 assigning logical drives to secondary redundant controller automatic configuration of redundant controller explained redundant controller if one fails redundant controller manual configuration of redundant controller starting up redundant controller automatic configuration of LCD Regenerate Parity Regenerating Logical Drive Parity LCD Regenerating Logical Drive Parity terminal Replace after Clone Clone Failing Drive Replacing a Failed Unit Reset Controller LCD Reset Controller terminal Restore NVRAM from Disks LCD Restore NVRAM from Disks terminal Restoring the Default Setting LCD rolling firmware upgrade RS 232 configuration via front panel S S M A R T SAF TE and S E S Enclosure Monitoring SAF TE periodic check time SAF TE S E S polling period Sample Configu
181. dit Host Side Parameters Fibre View Channel WWN View Connected Drives LCD View Device Port Name List View Drive Information Viewing and Deleting LUN Mappings LCD Viewing and Editing Host LUNs LCD Viewing and Editing Logical Drives LCD Viewing and Editing SCSI Channels LCD Viewing and Editing SCSI Drives LCD Index 8 9 21 5 32 3 1 3 3 3 11 6 2 5 28 10 12 5 31 6 1 5 29 5 31 C 2 B 3 8 8 B 3 9 28 B 7 8 10 4 7 8 6 8 8 8 9 8 7 5 5 8 8 8 9 5 22 5 22 5 16 5 25 5 23 viewing and redefining channel mode LCD viewing drive members logical drive VT 100 connection and setup W write policy WWN Name List WWN table Z ZMODEM 5 25 5 16 3 1 3 6 B 1 8 16 B 5 C 4 C 6 Infortrend
182. dit SCSI Drives The default value is Disabled Disabled means that if a drive is removed from the bus the controller will not be able to know so Advanced Configurations 9 22 long as no host accesses that drive Changing the check time to any other value allows the controller to check at the selected time interval all of the drives that are listed under View and Edit SCSI Drives If any drive is then removed the controller will be able to know even if no host accesses that drive SCSI Motor Spin Up Disabled view SoS Reset at Power Up Disabled i view sk Access Delay Time GH seconds Disable view SCSI 0_Timeout 10_ seconds view Count 32 secon 2 seconds i seco D seconds pen egies Rates Detect ERE Brive eam heck Time 10 seconds C Drive Predictable Failure Mode SMART Detect Only 30 seconds C Fibre Channel Dual Loop Enable Vrive side Parameters Disk Array Parameters Redundant Controller Parameters Controller Parameters Idle Drive Failure Detection Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time The Drive Swap Check Time is the interval at which the controller checks to see whether a failed drive has been swapped When a logical drive s member drive fails the controller will detect the failed drive at the selected time interval Once the failed drive has been swapped with a drive that has adequate capacity to rebuild the logic
183. done remove the failed controller and install the replacement controller into its place When the replacement is connected the Auto Failback will start automatically If the reolacement controller does not initialize execute the following steps to bring the new controller online Press ENT for 2 seconds on the existing controller to enter the main menu Use Y or A to choose View and Edit Peripheral View and Edit Dev then press ENT Peripheral Dev Redundant Controller 10 25 Choose Set Peripheral Device Entry then press set Peripheral ENT Devices Entry Choose Redundant Ctlr Function then press pagundant Ctlr ENT Function__ The message Redundant Ctlr Autocfg Degraded Redundant Ctlr will appear on the LCD Autocfg Degraded Press ENT and the message Deassert Reset on peassert Reset Failed Ctlr will appear on Failed Ctlr Press ENT for two seconds and the controller Redundant Ctlr will start to scan for the new controller and bring scanning it online The new controller will then start to initialize Once initialized it will assume the role of the SR2000 n Ek Secondary controller rT TTT Ty 10 3 2 Via Terminal Emulation Redundant Configuration Using Automatic Setting Power on Controller 1 Make sure Controller 2 is powered off ache Status ean Main Menu Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logica olumes view and edit
184. drive Name logical drive Assignments SE es drive F Add Drives to Logical Drive ves No cae Available drives will be listed Select one or more drive s to add to the target logical drive by pressing ENTER The selected drive will be indicated by an asterisk mark enee ee e Bei Press ESC to proceed and the notification will prompt i ee RAID Size MB Status o LN SB FL NAME V Cart QOD R v v Elie E vk H 21891 LG Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Add SCSI Drive Operation ka 5 V IL A v 4 NONE 5 NONE 6 NONE A js II LT PL Press ESC again to cancel the notification prompt a status bar will indicate the percentage of progress Array Expansion 12 5 m Desbats O AN FOB FL ESETONA NAIRA DSE soos __GOOD R 3 __o EE Adding 11 Completed_ deweceedeMal L d Clm III LJ Cal III Upon completion there will appear a confirming notification The capacity of the added drive will appear as an unused partition i A ng Notification 218A Add SCSI Drive to Logical Drive Completed rm lt Main Menu gt Quick installation LUN LV LD DRV Partition Size MB RAID view and edit Logical drives o w e 9999 RAIDS s o sx view and edit logical Volumes view and edit
185. dth then press ENTER Choose Yes in the dialog box to confirm the setting Parity Check ore Stet eni o erreti XP risa ParstyChe Disconnect TasCount vise af alef of wide Enebied eeler Bisabled view view Slot number Enabled Def 32 Wid row See Ch maximum syne xfer Clock a maximum xfer Width Enabled Def 32 SE P EE Check Enabled Def 32 m nable Parity ecking 7 row R Enabled Def 32 ns Enabled Def 2 nable e sf of sf wide enabled enabled Def 2 row Choose Parity Check Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting 7 31 Infortrend Disconnecting Support Quic Stet font fro SyncClk XfrHid ParityChk TagCount i sam Wide Enabled Enabled Def 32 Wide nabled Sepp ed Slot number Enabled Def 32 maximum syne xfer Clock maximum xfer Width Enabled Def 32 Parity check Disconnect support Def 32 R Di i Def 32 Def 32 Def 32 Choose Disconnect Support Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting Maximum Tag Count Choose Maximum Tag Count then press ENTER Quic Slot ParityChk Hide Enabled Disconnect TagCount Enabled Def 32 nabled De Slot number Enabled Def maximum sync xfer Clock Default maximum xfer Width Enabled Det Disable Parity check Disconnect support Enab Restore
186. e function to replace drives with drives of greater capacity No need to add another enclosure for the extra drives Operating system support for RAID Expansion No No operating system driver required No software has to be installed for this purpose Infortrend Fibre Channel Support Fibre Channel Support All Firmware supports Fibre Channels Channel Mode All channels configurable to Host or Drive mode user configurable Redundant controller Redundant using FC controllers supported Host side loop failure detection Supported The LIPs on the host channels will not be displayed to users Drive side loop failure Supported detection Point to point topology Supported Arbitrated loop topology Supported Fabric topology Supported Host Redundant loop dual loop topology Supported Also requires the host computer Fibre HBA driver support Drive side redundant loop load sharing Workloads can be automatically balanced between member loops for performance optimization Fibre channel ID User selectable from ID 0 to 125 Fibre channel CRC Supported Native Fibre Interface 3 pin Copper can be converted to optical with a MIA or GBIC HUBs DB 9 Copper MIA compliant a converter or extender is necessary Point to point and FC AL protocol User configurable LUN Filtering RAID Based Mapping Host LUN mapping with u
187. e release 3 12 xxi Xxii Version 1 4 Version 1 5 Version 1 61 added firmware features available with firmware revisions 3 14 3 15 and 3 21 revised details about redundant controllers host LUN mapping etc modified string definitions in Chapter 14 In band SCSI Drives and Utilities section Corrected descriptions of Controller Unique Identifier Added the configuration process for out of band configuration viaLAN port Removed Chapter 14 Revised the descriptions for some functional items Added firmware features available from revision 3 25 Added features available by revision 3 31 Removed Appendix E Moved array expansion to Chapter 12 Added variable stripe size write policy per array Added media scan Added controller immediate array availability time zone date and time setting Added IO channel diagnostics Added controller Auto Shutdown and cache flush mechanisms Added system monitoring via enclosure modules Added disabling cache coherency using write through mode Added descriptions about new firmware utility items Added details about enabling RAIDWatch and its sub modules via Ethernet port Chapter RAID Functions An Introduction Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks or RAID offers the following advantages Availability Capacity and Performance Choosing the right RAID level and drive failure management can increase Capacity and Performance subsequently increasing Availability
188. e Drive Swap Check Time is Enabled i e a check time interval has been selected the controller will detect whether a faulty drive has been swapped by checking the failed drive s channel ID Once the failed drive has been replaced by a healthy drive the rebuild will begin immediately Infortrend If the failed drive is not swapped but a local spare is added to the logical drive rebuild will begin with the spare If the SM A R T function is enabled on drives and the reaction scheme is selected for securing data on a failing drive spare will also be used for restoring data Please refer to Chapter 9 Advanced Functions for more details 2 Manual Rebuild When a user applies forced manual rebuild the controller will first examine whether there is any Local Spare assigned to the logical drive If yes it will automatically start to rebuild If there is no Local Spare available the controller will search for a Global Spare If there is a Global Spare logical drive rebuild will be automatically conducted Figure 1 14 Manual Rebuild Any User applies i Seene Local Spare Drive Rebuild using the rebuild assigned to this Local Spare Drive Any Global Spare Drive Rebuild using the assigned to this Global Spare Drive logical drive Has the failed drive Rebuild using the been replaced replaced drive Wait for manual rebuild l If none of the spares are available the controlle
189. e Location Restore NVRAM Date Firmware Disk or File from Disk Arrow Keus Move Cursor 11 9 RAID Security Password Ren Cache Status Clean lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit aos uae devices u u Mute beeper R s C New Password _ Enter Confirm tEsc Exit iCtr1 L Refresh Screen RAID Security Controller Name Password ss 11 12 Infortrend Chapter 12 Array Expansion The array expansion functions allow you to expand storage capacity without the costs on buying new equipment The expansion can be completed on line while system is serving host I Os This chapter is organized as follows 12 1 Overview Note on using the expansion functions 12 2 Mode 1 Expansion Theory and configuration procedure expansion by adding drives 12 3 Mode 2 Expansion Theory and configuration procedure expansion by copying and replacing drives 12 4 Making Use of the Added Capacity Configuration procedure of the Expand function for logical drive 12 5 Expand Logical Volume Configuration procedure of the Expand function for logical volume 12 6 Configuration Example Volume Extension in Windows 2000 12 1 Overview What is it and how does it work Before the invention of RAID Expans
190. e assigned to the primary or the secondary controller The host I Os directed to a logical drive will be managed by the controller which owns the Functional Description 1 16 1 17 logical drive If a controller fails the host I Os originally assigned to the failed controller will be taken over by the existing controller When the controller fails back failed controller being replaced by a new one logical drives will be returned to the replacement controller in its original configuration With logical volume logical volumes can also be assigned to different controllers The only difference is logical volumes will be used as base units when shifting control during controller failure A logical volume with logical drives of different levels Multi level RAID systems 1 RAID 0 1 this is a standard feature of Infortrend RAID controllers It brings the benefits of RAID 1 high availability and RAID 0 enhanced I O performance through striping Simply choose multiple drives more than two to compose a RAID 1 logical drive RAID 0 1 will be automatically implemented 2 RAID 3 0 a logical volume is a multi level RAID implementation by its own rights A logical volume is a logical composition which stripes data across several logical drives the RAID 0 method A logical volume with several RAID 3 members can be considered as a RAID 3 0 or RAID 53 as defined in The RAID Book from The RAID Advisory Board 3 RAI
191. e controller for new firmware to take effect System Functions Upgrading Firmware C 3 Upgrade the Firmware Binary Only RAIDWatch file Open View Help T Bis el mj Ge o fpo Logical View Caching Hastside Drive side RAID Controller E Physical View Information Operation Name Password Download system Redundant DownloadiUpload Download FW C Download FWBR C Download NVRAM C Upload NVRAM 1 Connect to the RAID system locally or from a remote host using RAIDWatch Manager While connected to the RAID system there will be icon s with IP address specified on the left of the menu screen Select by double clicking the icon of the RAID system which firmware is to be upgraded Select the controller icon and then select the RAID system to host bus usually appears as In band SCSI or PCI bus Doubleclick the RAID to host bus to connect to the desired controller Choose the RAID view icon on the controller panel The RAID view window will appear Choose Controller gt Download gt and click among the selections Download FW Firmware If both boot record and firmware are desired to upgrade choose Download Firmware 2 Provide the firmware filename to the RAIDWatch Manager It will start to download the firmware to the controller 3 Shutdown the system which is accessing the RAID then reset the controller in order to use the new downloaded fi
192. e new password The password can not be replaced unless a correct old password is provided Press Y or A to select a character then press ENT to move to the next space After entering all the characters alphabetic or numeric press ENT for two seconds to confirm If the password is correct or there is no preset password it will ask for the new password Enter the password again to confirm Disabling Password Old Password Re Ent Password Change Password Successful To disable or delete the password press ENT on the fist flashing digit for two seconds when requested to enter a new password The existing password will be deleted No password checking will occur when entering the Main Menu from the Initial screen or making configuration Reset Controller To reset the controller without powering off the system Press Y or A to Reset Controller then press ENT Press ENT again for two seconds to confirm The controller will now reset Shutdown Controller Before powering off the controller unwritten data may still reside in cache memory Use the Shutdown Controller function to flush the cache content Press Y or A to Shutdown Controller then press ENT Press ENT again for two seconds to confirm Reset This Controller Reset This Controller Shutdown 1 Contro Shutdown 1 Control 5 35 Infortrend The controller will now flush the cache ShutdownComplete
193. e occurs during a drive low level format the formatting must be started over again when power resumes e Al of the data stored in the disk drive will be destroyed during a low level format e Thedisk drive on which alow level disk format will be performed cannot be a spare drive local or global nor a member drive of a logical drive The SCSI Drive Low level Format option will not appear if the drive s status is not stated as a N ew Drive or a U sed Drive Front Panel Operation 5 4 SCSI Drive Read Write Test From the View and Edit SCSI Drives menu select a new or used drive that the utility is to be performed on then press ENT Select SCSI Drive Utilities then press ENT Choose Read Write Test and press ENT PressW or A to select and choose to enable disable the following options 1 Auto Reassign Bad Block 2 Abort When Error Occurs 3 Drive Test for Read Only Read and Write When finished with configuration select Execute Drive Testing and press ENT to proceed The Read Write test progress will be indicated as a percentage You may press ESC and select Read Write Test later and press Y or A to select to View Read Write Testing Progress or to List Current Bad Block Table If you want to stop testing the drive select Abort Drive Testing and press ENT to proceed Drive Read Write Test sie Auto Reassign Disabled ae Execute Drive Testing
194. e or disable each method IMPORTANT e The verification on Normal Drive Writes method will affect the write performance during normal use Advanced Configurations 9 28 Chapter 10 Redundant Controller 10 1 Operation Theory Sample topologies using redundant controllers can be found in theH ardware M anual that came with your controller or subsystem The proceeding discussions will focus on the theories and the firmware configuration of a redundant controller system Because I O interfaces have increasing demands on signal quality combining controllers using the cabling method may not all work well Depending on enclosure design signal paths for communications may have been strung between controllers over acommon backplane The controllers or subsystems like Infortrend s EonStor series may come with preset IDs and channel mode that require no further configuration Users who are familiar with the practice of redundant controller configuration please jump to section 10 3 Configuration Redundant Controller 10 1 10 1 1 Setup Flowchart Figure 10 1 Redundant Controller Configuration Flowchart ach e beth controllers ___ _ __ D on each controller k I ng e I Tnahir the I select Zei Comeraller Pavdral Cann actien Hedandani Centre A ele Change pe Fanii neng ED ECC Paih amp Tipi Setup be Baath Fei A dees far rrrry drive chen nel Amig the arrays D
195. ect Flash Selected SCSI Drives then press ENT for two seconds to flash the read write LED of the selected drive The read write LED will light for a configurable time period from 1 to 999 seconds Front Panel Operation Cl I 1 ABSENT Clear Drive Status Clear Drive Status View and Edit SCSI Drives C 1 I 0 GlobalSB SEAGATE 1010MB Identify Drive Flash All Drives E S F lash Sel lected CSI Drives ash all But Selected Drives 5 2 A Press ENT for two seconds to enter the Main Menu Press Y or A to select View and Edit SCSI Drives then press ENT SCSI drive information will be displayed on the LCD Press Y or A to select the spare drive you wish to delete then press ENT Press W or A to select Delete Spare Drive then press ENT to continue Press ENT for two seconds to delete the spare drive Redefining Channel Mode Press ENT for two seconds to enter the Main Menu Press Y or A to select View and Edit SCSI Channels then press ENT Channel information will be displayed Press Y or A to browse through the information of all channels Press ENT on the channel you wish the channel mode changed Press W or A to select Redefine Channel Mode then press ENT Press ENT for two seconds to change the channel mode The new setting will be displayed Deleting Spare Drive Global Local Spare Drive View and Edit SCSI
196. ed to either of the controllers to balance workload The default is primary controller press ESC if changeis not preferred Logical drive assignment can be changed any time later Write Policy Maximum Drive Capacity 9999MB Assign Spare Drives Disk Reserved Space 256 MB Logical Drive Assignments Write Policy Default Write Bac 5 Change Write Policy i Default Write Back Write Through This sub menu allows you to set the caching mode for this specific logical drive Default is a neutral value that is coordinated with the controller s current caching mode setting that you can see bracketed in the write policy status Terminal Operation 7 7 Initialization Mode Maximum Drive Capacity 9999MB Assign Spare Drives Disk Reserved Space 256 MB Logical Drive Assignments Write Policy Pa ac Back nitialize Mod On Line Off line Initialize for Create Logical Drive 7 yes No This sub menu allows you to set if the logical drive is immediately available If the online default mode is used data can be written onto it and you may continue with array configuration e g including the array into a logical volume before the array s initialization is completed Stripe Size ELTETE ytes 8K Bytes 16K apacity 9999MB ytes jssignments 256K Bytes ef sult Eikes Back This option should only be changed by experienced engineers Setting to an incongruous value can severely drag t
197. edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters Pyiew and edit Peripheral devices View Peripheral Device Status Peripheral Device Entr D A Less ontroller Disabled as Primary as Secondary When the new controller is connected the existing controller will automatically start initializing the reolacement controller IFT 3102U 2G and above If the existing controller does not initialize the replacement controller execute the Deassert Reset on Failed Controller function lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters Pview and edit Peripheral devices s vi Yiew Peripheral Device Status v et Peripheral Device Entr D A SERGE ontroller Primar C EE No Deassert Reset on Failed Controller If the replacement has been initialized normally you may proceed to examine the system status From the main menu select View and Edit Peripheral Devices and then View Peripheral Device Status to see that the new controller is being scanned Cache Status Clean lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view a
198. efault setting is Disabled The message Redundant Controller Disabled will be displayed on the screen Press ENTER to proceed The message Enable Redundant Controller in Autoconfigure Mode will appear Use the arrow keys to scroll through the available options Primary Secondary or Autoconfigure Press EN TER on Primary r lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view edit Scsi channels View Peripheral Device Status met Peripheral Device Entr tat ERE ETS ontroller Disabled enable redundant controller function in Autoconf igure mode e Power off controller 1 then power on controller 2 Set controller 2 to Secondary as described above r lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters Pview and edit Peripheral devices v View Peripheral Device Status v Poet Peripheral Device Entry k ontroller Disabled enable redundant controller function in Autoconfigure mode enable redundant controller function as Primar enable redundant controller function as Secondar e Power off controller 2 e Power on drives both controllers and host computer s fo
199. effect The rolling upgrade is automatically performed by controller firmware and user s intervention is not necessary Redundant Controller Firmware Sync version A controller used to replace a failed unit in a dual controller system is often running a newer release of firmware version To solve the contention firmware running on the replacement controller will be downgraded to that running on the surviving controller IMPORTANT e Allow the downloading process to finish Do not reset or turn off the computer or the controller while it is downloading the file Doing so may result in an unrecoverable error that requires the service of the manufacturer e Whilethe firmware is new the boot record that comes with it may be the same version as the one in the controller If this is the case there is no need to upgrade the Boot Record Binary NOTE e Controller serial port COM 2can not be used to download firmware Upgrading Firmware Using In band SCSI RAIDWatch Manager Establish the In band SCSI connection in RAIDWatch Manager Please refer to RAIDWatch User s Manual for details on establishing the In band SCSI connection for RAIDWatch Manager Infortrend Upgrade Both Boot Record and Firmware Binaries D RAIDWatch File Open View Help ciel Ble el gi ID og E fp Logical view Caching Host side Drive side RAID Controller Physical View Information Operation Name Password Download system Redundant
200. elected by the controller Whether the drive has been removed or the cabling termination canister is out of order Check drive side SCSI cable termination and drive canister connections C l SCSI Target ALERT Gross Phase Signal Error Detected 1102 CHL _ ID SCSI Target ALERT Gross Phase Signal Error Detected OAlert ON otification Event Type What MWarning Drive side SCSI phase signal abnormality detected Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do D 10 Press lt ESC gt to clear the message C l SCSI Target ALERT Unexpected Disconnect Encountered 1103 CHL _ 1 _ SCSI Target ALERT Unexpected Disconnect Encountered DAlert MWarning ON otification Drive side SCSI target unexpected disconnect detected Check cabling termination and canister connections C l SCS Drive ALERT N egotiation Error Detected 1104 CHL ID SCSI Drive ALERT Negotiation Error Detected DAlert MWarning ON otification Drive side SCSI target sync wide negotiation abnormality detected Infortrend 2 Line LCD Terminal C lJ Timeout Waiting for I O 1105 CHL _ ID SCSI Target ALERT Timeout Waiting for I O to Complete DAlert MWarning ON otification Event Type What Drive side SCSI target I O timeout Possible drive side Happens What to cabling termination and canister connection abnormal or dri
201. els 10 35 Secondary Controller RS 232 10 35 Remote Redundant Controller 10 35 Cache Synchronization on Write Through 10 35 Chapter 12 Array Expansion Page number 12 1 RAID Expansion 12 1 12 2 Mode 1 Expansion Adding Drive to a logical drive 12 4 xvi 12 3 Mode 2 Expansion Copy amp Replace Drive with drives 12 7 of larger capacity 12 4 Expand Logical Drive Making use of the added 12 9 capacity 12 5 Expand Logical Volume 12 11 12 6 Example RAID Expansion in Windows 2000 12 12 Appendix C Controller Maintenance Page number Upgrading Firmware Cl New Features Supported with Firmware 3 21 Cl Background RS 232 Firmware Download C 1 Redundant Controller Rolling Firmware Download C 1 Redundant Controller Firmware Sync version C 2 Upgrading Firmware Using In band SCSI C 2 RAIDWatch Manager Establish the In band SCSI connection in RAIDWatch C 2 Manager Upgrade Both Boot Record and Firmware Binaries C 3 Upgrade the Firmware Binary Only CA Upgrading Firmware Using RS 232 Terminal C 4 Emulation Establishing the connection for the RS 232 Terminal C 5 Emulation Upgrading Both Boot Record and Firmware Binaries C 5 Upgrading the Firmware Binary Only C 6 xvii xviii List of Tables Chapter 1 Table 1 TBA Levels risna E 1 2 Chapter 2 Table 2 T Poll weler u d r a eaS E eebe 2 4 Table 2 1 Controller Parameter Settings
202. ended to alter the SCSI target settings when adjustments should be made to specific devices on a drive channel Y ou may change the SCSI parameters for specific drives when mixing different drives or connecting other SCSI device likea CD ROM on a drive channa Please note that neither mixing drives nor connecting CD ROM is recommended for the controller Slot Number Choose Slot Number then press ENTER Enter a slot number then press ENTER again This setting is reserved for the Fault Bus option Terminal Operation 7 30 Maximum Synchronous Transfer Clock Quicl Slot ICH SyncClk EH Wid Parit Chk Disconnect T Count Se A a SE view Pnabled enabled able ai Be ree view es number Enabled Def 32 2 VIEW maximum sync x Synchronous Transfer Period Factor Maximum Sync Xfer Clock lt lt u lt lt O N B ics Q Pais use enera enabiea bef 2 ile o miae enabled Enabled Def 32 Choose Maximum Sync Xfer Clock then press ENTER A dialog box will appear on the screen Enter the clock then press ENTER Maximum Transfer Width Quie Slot oh1 1D SyncClk kerma Pari tyChk Disconnect Ta Count REESEN aa number M Enabled Def 32 TE 1 maximum sync xfer Clock Wid Enabled Def 32 D Set SCSI Target Maximum Xfer Wide Supported Ian d gra No de Enabled Enabledl Def 32 Pas shies eera enabled Der row Choose Maximum Xfer Wi
203. er terminal Controller Voltage and 4 6 Temperature LCD Controller Voltage and 6 9 Temperature terminal controller voltage B 9 monitors Controller Logical Drive B 3 Shutdown Copy and Replace 12 7 Drives Creating a Logical 5 6 Drive LCD Creating a Logical 7 5 Drive terminal Creating a Logical Volume LCD Creating a Logical Volume terminal Creating LUN Masks Creating Primary and Secondary IDs Cylinder Head Sector Mapping D Dedicated Communications loops default setting restoring Deleting a Logical Drive LCD Deleting a Partition of a Logical Drive LCD Deleting a Partition of a Logical Drive terminal Deleting a SCSI Channel s ID LCD Deleting a SCSI ID terminal Deleting Logical Drive terminal deleting partition of logical drive deleting SCSI ID deleting spare drive global or local Deleting Spare Drive LCD Deleting Spare Drive terminal deleting LUN mappings deleting partition of logical drive deleting SCSI channel ID deleting spare drive global or local Detect Only Detect Clone Replace Detect Perpetual Clone Detection of Drive Hot Swap Followed by Auto Rebuild detection idle drive 5 10 7 10 8 15 10 22 10 29 9 16 5 33 5 16 5 17 5 27 7 27 7 17 7 27 7 24 5 25 7 24 5 27 5 25 9 9 9 10 9 9 9 22 9 23 Index 2 Infortrend failure Disabling Password LCD Disabling Password terminal Disconnecting Supp
204. er of LUNs Up to 1024 Mappable Maximum number of LUNs Up to 32 user configurable per Host ID Concurrent I O Supported Tag Command Queuing Supported Dedicated Spare Drive Supported hereby defined as the spare drive specifically assigned to a logical drive Global Spare Drive Supported the spare drive serving all logical drives Global Spare Auto Assign Supported applies to non configured drives Co existing Dedicated and Global Spare Drives Supported Auto rebuild onto spare drive Supported Firmware Functionality Specifications B 1 Auto scan of replacement drive upon manually initiated rebuild Supported One step rebuild onto a Supported replacement drive Immediate logical drive Supported availability Auto rebuild onto failed drive replacement Supported With no spare drive the controller will auto scan the failed drive and starts rebuild automatically once the failed drive has been replaced Background firmware download Firmware can be downloaded during active I Os Administrators may find appropriate time to reset controller later Auto recovery from logical drive failure Supported When user accidentally removed the wrong drive to cause the Zug drive failure of a one drive failed RAID5 RAID3 logical drive fatal error may occur However you may force the controller to reaccept the logical drive by switching off the controlle
205. eriodic Drive Check Disabled Time Disabled Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time Periodic Auto Detect Disabled Failure Drive Swap Check Time Driv e Predictable Disabled Detect only Detect and Perpetual Failure Mode Clone Detect and Clone Replace Fibre Channel Dual Enabled Disabled Loop Record of Settings 11 9 Disk Array Parameters Rebuild Priority Low Normal Improved High Verifications on Writes Verifications on LD Enabled Disabled Initialization Writes Verifications on LD i Enabl Disabled Rebuild Writes nabled isable Verifications on Enabl Disabled Normal Drive Writes nabled isab Redundant Controller Parameters Redundant Controller Communication Channel Secondary controller RS Enabled Disabled 232 Cache synchronization on write through Enabled Disabled Controller Parameters Controller Name Not Set LCD Tile Display Controller Logo Controller Name Password Validation Disabled 1 minute 2 minutes 5 minutes Timeout Always Check Controller Unique Identifier SDRAM ECC Enabled Disabled 11 10 Infortrend 11 7 View and Edit Peripheral Devices Cache Status Clean Main Menu Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logica olumes view and i ost luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit csi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices View Peripheral Device Status et Peripheral Device Entry
206. ersion support S M ART Using S M A R T Functions 1 Enable SMART on the RAID controller 2 Make sure your drives do support S M A R T so that your system will work fitly 3 The Detect Only Setting 3a In View and Edit Configuration Parameters Drive side SCSI Parameters Drive Predictable Failure Mode lt SM A RT gt choose Detect Only Advanced Configurations 9 8 Cache Status Clean SCSI Motor Spin Up Disabled SCSI Reset at Power Up Disabled Disk Access Delay Time 6 seconds SCSI 1 0_Timeout 10 seconds Maximum Tag Count 32 Periodic Drive Check Time 10 seconds Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time 5 seconds Periodic Auto Detect Failure Duine Swap Check e Disabled n w 5 muu e O is etect an erpetua one Redu Detect and Clone Replace Cont 3b Whenever a drive predicts symptoms of predictable drive failure controller will issue an error message 4 The Detect Perpetual Clone Setting 4a In View and Edit Configuration Parameters Drive side SCSI Parameters Drive Predictable Failure Mode lt SMART gt choose Detect Perpetual Clone 4b You should have at least one spare drive for the logical drive either Local Spare or Global Spare Drive 4c When a drive logical drive member detects the predictable drive errors the controller will clone the drive with a spare drive You may enter the View and Edit
207. es Optimization Mode and Stripe Size Each controller optimization mode has preset values for the stripe size of arrays created in different RAID levels If you want a different value for your array you may change the controller optimization mode reset the controller and then go back to create the array Once the array is created stripe size can not be changed Using the default value should be sufficient for most applications Opt For Sequential I O Opt for Random I O RAID0 128 32 RAID1 128 32 RAID3 16 4 RAID5 128 32 Infortrend Optimization for Random or Sequential I O Select from main menu View and Edit Config Parms Caching Parameters Parameters and press ENT Choose Optimization for Random UO or Optimization for EES Sequential I O then press ENT for two seconds to confirm Press ESC to leave and the setting will take effect after the Optimization for controller is restarted P Sequential I 0 IMPORTANT e Theoriginal 512GB threshold on array optimization mode is canceled If the size of an array is larger than 16TB only the optimization for sequential I O can be applied Logical drives of this size are not practical therefore there is actually no limitation on the optimization mode and array capacity Write Back Write Through Cache Enable Disable As one of the submenus in Caching Parameters this option controls the Write Back Cache cached wri
208. es of 128KB size each drive will have to write many more times to store data fragments of the size of 4KB Unlike the previous firmware versions controller optimization mode can be changed without changing the array stripe size The default values in optimization modes guarantee the optimal performance for most applications Consult Table 2 2 for all the controller parameters that are related to system performance and fault tolerance 7 What RAID level Different RAID levels provide varying levels of performance and fault tolerance RAID Planning 2 3 Table 2 1 RAID Levels RAID Level Description Capacity Data Availability NRAID Non RAID 4 RAID T E Striping NRAID RAID 5 dedicated disk RAID 5 parity RAID 5 Logical Striping one or more logical 4 Higher depends Rica onts members RAID Level Performance Sequential Performance Random Drive Fo aae ee W Highest W Highest W Medium W Low W Medium W Low W Medium W Low see above 8 Any spare drives Swap Drive Rebuild Spare Drive Rebuild Spare drives allow for the unattended rebuilding of a failed drive heightening the degree of fault tolerance If there is no spare drive data rebuild has to be manually initiated by replacing a failed drive with a healthy one Asis often ignored a spare drive whether dedicated or global must have a capacity no smaller than the members of a logical drive 9 Limitations Firmware 3 31 and
209. essage LG Add SCSI Drive Paused 218b LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Add SCSI Drive Operation Paused DAlert OWarning MN otification The expansion process is halted by 1 Logical drive expansion canceled by user 2 On of the member drives failed during logical drive initialization 3 One of the member drive encountered bad block 4 Hardware failure If the target logical drive has failed try to rebuild the logical drive LG Continue A dd SCSI Drive 218c LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Continue Add SCSI Drive Operation DAlert OWarning MN otification The target logical drive has been restored to its previous status and the add drive operation may continue Press lt ESC gt to clear the message Infortrend 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do C l Starting Clone 21a1 LG_ Logical Drive NOTICE CHL ID Starting Clone DAlert OWarning MN otification This message is displayed when a member driveis manually cloned to a spare or that a spare is automatically applied to clone a faulty member according to the preset scheme Press lt ESC gt to clear the message When cloning is completed carefully identify and replace the faulty drive CL Clone Completed 21a2 LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE CHL ID Clone Complted DAlert OWarning MN otification The clone process has been completed Press lt ESC gt to clear the message When cloning is c
210. ew and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit gonf igurat ion parameters view and edit SS eral devices WM vil Mute beeper s C Old Password _ Use the controller s password to protect the array from unauthorized entry Once the controller s password has been set regardless of whether the front panel the RS 232C terminal interface Terminal Operation 7 34 or RAIDWatch Manager is used you can only access the RAID controller by providing the correct password IMPORTANT e The controller verifies password when entering the main menu from the initial screen or making configuration change If the controller is going to be left unattended the Password Validation Timeout can be se to Always Check Setting validation timeout to always check will protect the controller configuration from any unauthorized access e The controller password and controller name share a 16 character space The maximum characters for the controller password is 15 When the controller name occupies 15 characters there is only one character left for the controller password and vice versa Changing the Password To set or change the controller password move the cursor bar to Change Password then press EN TER If a password has previously been set the controller will ask for the old password first If the password has not yet been set the controller will directly ask for the new
211. f drive channel interface Async Thedriveis using asynchronous mode LG_DRV X Thedriveis a drive member of logical drive x If the Status column shows STAND BY the drive is a Local Spare of logical drive x Status Global The SCSI drive isa Global Spare Drive INITING Processing array initialization ON LINE Thedriveisin good condition REBUILD Processing Rebuild STAND BY Local Spare Drive or Global Spare Drive The Local Spare Drive s LG_DRV column will show the logical drive number The Global Spare Drive s LG_DRV column will show Global NEW DRV A new drive has not been configured to any logical drive or as a spare drive USED DRV An used drive that is not a member of any logical drive or configured as spare BAD Failed drive ABSENT Drive does not exist MISSING Drive once existed but is missing now SB MISS Spare drive missing Vendorand The vendor and product model information of Product ID the drive Infortrend 6 7 SCSI Channel s Status Cache Status Clean PID SID DefSynC1k Def Wid S Term CurS ynC1k CurWid ceveceBececes Nl nias N Arrow Keys Move Cursor tEnter Select iCtrl L Refresh Screen Chl SCSI channel number M ode Channel mode RCCom Redundant controller communication channel Host Host Channel mode Drive Drive Channel mode PID IDs managed by the Primary Controller Multiple IDs were applied Host Channel mode only ID Host c
212. f24 SES C_ _ UPS_ UPS Power Failure Detected General Peripheral Device 3f21 Peripheral Device ALERT Power Supply Failure Detected 3f22 Cooling Fan N ot Installed 3f22 Cooling Fan Failure Detected 3f24 Elevated Temperature Alert 3f24 UPS Power Failure Detected Infortrend Controller Event Alert 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 LineLCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do Event Messages DRAM Parity Error Detected 0104 Controller ALERT DRAM Parity Error Detected MAlert OWarning ONotification A DRAM parity error encountered Contact your RAID system supplier and replace with new module s if necessary DRAM Parity Error Detected 0105 Controller lt primary secondary gt SDRAM ECC lt multi bits single bit gt Error Detected MAlert OWarning A DRAM ECC detected error encountered ON otification Contact your RAID system supplier and replace with new module s if necessary CHL _FATAL ERROR _ 0110 CHL _ FATAL ERROR _ MAlert OWarning One channel has failed ON otification Check if cable connectors are firmly seated and SCSI buses are properly terminated With Fibre channels disconnection may happen on the host side hub or switch etc In
213. flexible association between logical units and host ID LUNs Workload can then be manually distributed between controllers Redundant Controller 10 11 Redundant Controller D Traffic Distribution and Failover Process The diagram below illustrates a four channel configuration using channel 0 as the communications path Channel 1 serves as the host interface and multiple IDs are created to facilitate active active operation Each controller occupies either a Primary ID or a Secondary ID on drive channels One logical unit is assigned to the Primary controller and the other the Secondary controller In the event when one controller fails the existing controller will inherit IDs from the failed controller and continue l Os Figure 10 9 Traffic Distribution Primary controller takes SCSI ID 0 on host channel 1 Secondary controlle takes SCSI ID 1 on host channel 1 Primary Controller Secondary Controller Secondary controller Primary controller aes takes SCSI ID 6 A takes SCSI ID 7 on drive channels on drive channels GE Logical Drive 1 Logical Drive 0 Logical Drive1 Host LUN Mapping IDO LUN PID ID1 LUN SID Logical Drive Assignment Primary Secondary Drive Channel 2 3 When creating a logical unit users will be prompted to assign the logical unit either to the Primary or to the Secondary controller Once the assignment is done log
214. g 9 22 Periodic Drive Check Time 9 22 Idle Drive Failure Detection 9 23 Periodic Auto Detect Swap Check Time 9 23 9 3 Monitoring and Safety Mechanisms 9 25 Dynamic Switch Write Policy 9 25 View Peripheral Device Status enclosure modules 9 25 Controller Auto Shutdown Event Trigger Option 9 26 9 4 Logical Drive Integrity Disk Array Parameters 9 27 Rebuild Priority 9 27 Verification on Writes 9 28 Chapter 10 Redundant Controller Configuration Page number LCD Terminal 10 3 Configuration 10 19 10 3 1 Via Front Panel Keypad 10 20 Redundant Configuration Using Automatic Setting 10 20 Redundant Configuration Using Manual Setting 10 21 Starting the Redundant Controllers 10 22 Creating Primary and Secondary IDs 10 22 Assigning a Logical Drive Logical Volume to the 10 23 Secondary Controller Mapping a Logical Drive Logical Volume to the Host 10 24 LUNs Front Panel View of Controller Failure 10 25 When and How is the Failed Controller Replaced 10 25 10 3 2 Via Terminal Emulation 10 26 Redundant Configuration Using Automatic Setting 10 26 Redundant Configuration Using Manual Setting 10 28 Creating Primary and Secondary IDs 10 29 Assigning a Logical Drive Logical Volume to the 10 29 Secondary Controller Mapping a Logical Drive Logical Volume to the Host 10 31 LUNs Terminal View of Controller Failure 10 32 10 3 3 When and How is the Failed Controller Replaced 10 34 Forcing Controller Failure for Testing 10 35 RCC status RCC chann
215. g SCSI ID drive channel secondary ID SCSI channel setting Serial Port serial port connection and setup Setting a New Password terminal Setting a Primary Controller s SCSI ID terminal Setting a channel s ID LCD Setting a channel s Primary ID LCD Setting a channel s Secondary ID LCD Setting a SCSI channel s Terminator LCD Setting Transfer Speed LCD Setting Transfer Width LCD Shutdown Controller LCD Single drive control Slot number LCD Spanning Spare drive Spare Drive Assignments LCD Spare Drives Spin Up Parameters Stripe size Striping Sun Solaris configuration Synchronized cache System Functions LCD Tr Tag Command Queue 5 30 10 16 8 6 7 28 5 28 3 1 3 1 3 6 7 35 7 27 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 35 1 3 5 31 1 3 2 4 5 7 8 1 6 1 11 1 14 2 10 B 1 1 4 9 16 B 6 5 34 B 3 Index 7 tag count maximum tag count maximum LCD Terminal Terminal emulation terminology Terminator SCSI channel LCD Traffic Distribution and Failover Process Transfer clock maximum synchronous Transfer Rate Indicator transfer speed setting LCD transfer width LCD upgrading firmware User Configurable Geometry range User Assigned ID V Variable Stripe Size Verification on Writes View and Edit Drive Side Parameters Fibre View and Edit Event Logs LCD View and Edit Fibre Channel View and Edit Fibre Drive View and E
216. gher priority keep utilizing the bus The default setting for SCSI I O Timeout is 7 seconds It is highly recommended not to change this setting Setting the timeout to a lower value will cause the controller to judge a drive as failed while a drive is still retrying or while a drive is unable to arbitrate the SCSI bus Setting the timeout to a greater value will cause the Advanced Configurations 9 20 controller to keep waiting for a drive and it may sometimes cause a host timeout SCSI Motor Spin Up Disabled SCSI Reset at Power Up Disabled Disk Access Delay Time 60 seconds oo e e jaximum lag Count Periodic Drive Check Time seconds Periodic SAF TE and SES Device check Time S seco Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time rive Predictable Failure Mode SMART Detect Only Fibre Channel Dual Loop Enable H Drive side Parameters Disk Array Parameters Redundant Controller Parameters Controller Parameters Choose SCSI I O Timeout Default 7 seconds then press ENTER A list of selections will appear Move cursor bar to a selection then press ENTER Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting Maximum Tag Count Tag Command Queuing SCSI Motor Spin Up Disabled SCSI Reset at Power Up Disabled Disk Access Delay Time 60 seconds SCSI_ 140 Timeout 18 seconds Periodic Drive ec ime seconds Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time S_seco
217. gurable 50ms 100ms 200ms 500ms 1 60sec ISEMS Infortrend Simple Enclosure Management Service Multiple SAF TE S E S modules on the same channel Supported Supported Multiple SAF TE S E S modules on different channels Supported Mapping SAF TE S E S device to host channel for use with Host based SAF TE S E S Monitor Supported Dual LED drive status indicators Supported Both single LED and dual LED drive status indicators are supported SAF TE S E S Temperature value display Supported Display the temperature value provided by enclosure SAF TE module if available Fault bus support Provides the simplest implementation for the enclosure management All fault bus input output signals are active high active low user adjustable On board coniroller voltage monitors Supported Monitors the 3 3V 5V and 12V voltage status Event trigger threshold user configurable On board controller temperature sensors Supported Monitors the CPU and board temperature status Event trigger threshold user configurable Enclosure redundant power supply status monitoring Supported Fault Bus SAF TE S E S ISEMS Enclosure Fan status monitoring Supported Fault Bus SAF TE S E S SEMS Enclosure UPS status monitoring Supported Fault Bus SAF TE S E S ISEMS Enclosure temperature monitoring Supported Fault Bus SAF TE S E S ISEMS Firmware Fun
218. h sounded alarm The existing controller takes over the workload within a second Clear all errors by pressing the ESC key You may now install the controller once removed after all activities have been taken over by the existing controller It may take a while for the controllers to finish re initialization and assuming their load 2 Failover by Forcing controller failure Select View and Edit Peripheral Devices Set Peripheral Device Entry and Redundant Controller Primary Secondary Select Force Primary Secondary Controller Failure You may now pull out the controller you had just disabled 1 Os should be continued by the existing controller Continue the aforementioned procedure to complete the test WARNING e This function should only be performed for testing the redundant controller functionality before any critical data is committed to drives Although the controller is designed to be hot swappable unpredictable failures may occur during the process i e improper handling of PCB boards while replacing the controller Redundant Controller 10 33 RCC Status Redundant Controller Communications Channel ache Status ean Write Cache Enable BAT Main Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Contiguration parameters v P Remote EE ech Disa
219. h the basis ID for the port name to be considered to fall within the range Ox means that all values are presented in hexadecimal If for instance a value OxFFFFFFFFFFFFFC is selected and the basic ID is 0x11111111111111 port name IDs ranging from Ox 1110 to Ox 1113 will fall in the ID range As the general rule a host H BA s port name can be used as the basic ID If a host adapter s port name is used as the basic ID and the default mask value OXFFFFFFFFFFFFFF is applied the host will fall exactly within the ID range for the port name ID AND ed with mask equals the basic ID A N D ed with mask Filter Type Include or Exclude Filter entry can serve both ends to include or exclude certain adapters from data access Include If a node s a workstation or a server WWN falls in an ID range specified as Include the node will be allowed to access the storage capacity mapped to the associated LUN The access mode can be read only or read write Exclude If a node s WWN falls in an ID range specified as Exclude the node will not be allowed to access the storage capacity mapped with this entry Multiple ranges or filter entries can be established for a single channel target ID and LUN combination Each range can have its own Exclude Include attributes The rules for determining whether a particular ID is considered as included or excluded are listed below 1 If an ID falls within one or more Inclu
220. hannel number specific IDs managed by the Primary Controller for host LUN mapping Drive channel Specific ID reserved for the channel processor on the Primary controller SID IDs managed by the Secondary Controller Multiple IDs were applied Host Channel mode only ID Host channel number Specific IDs managed by the Secondary Controller for host LUN mapping Drive channel Specific ID reserved for the channel processor on the Secondary controller used in redundant controller mode NA No SCSI ID applied DefSynClk Default SCSI bus synchronous clock M The default setting of the channel is MHz in Synchronous mode Async The default setting of the channel is Asynchronous mode DefWid Default SCSI Bus Width Wide 16 bit SCSI Narrow 8 bit SCSI S Signal S Single ended L LVD F Fibre Terminal Screen Messages 6 7 Term CurSynClk CurWid Terminator Status On Off Diff Terminator is enabled Terminator is disabled The channel is a Differential channel The terminator can only be installed removed physically Current SCSI bus synchronous clock M Async empty The default setting of the SCSI channel is MHz in Synchronous mode The default setting of the SCSI channel is Asynchronous mode The default SCSI bus synchronous clock has changed Reset the controller for the changes to take effect Current SCSI Bus Width Wide Narrow empty 16 bit SCSI
221. he performance This option should only be changed when you can be sure of the performance gains it might bring you The default value is determined by controller Optimization Mode setting and the RAID level used for the array Press ESC to continue whe all the preferences have been set Raid Level RAID 5 Online SCSI Drives i Maximum Drive Capacity 9999MB Disk Reserved Space 256 MB Spare SCSI Drives D Logical Drive Assignment Primary Controller Write Polic Default Write Back Initialize Mode On Line Stripe Size Default Create Logical Drive tes No A confirm box will appear on the screen Verify all information in the box before choosing Yes to confirm and proceed Notification 2181 LG Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Creation If online initialization mode is applied logical drive will first be created and the controller will find appropriate time to initialize the array Notification 2182 Creation of Logical Drive Completed 7 8 Infortrend The completion of array creation will be indicated by the above message prompt Initializing Notification 2181 LG Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Initialization H A controller event will then prompt to indicate the logical drive initialization has begun Tap ESC to cancel the Notification prompt and a progress indicator displays on the screen as a percentage bar The array initialization runs i
222. he member drives have been replaced execute the Expand logical drives function to make use of the added capacity Figure 12 3 Expansion by Copy amp Replace New drive New drive New drive 4GB 4GB 4GB ae TI RAID 5 AI and Replace each member drive 4GB e ss is Unused RAID 5 4GB After all the member drives have been replaced execute the Expand logical drives to make use of the unused capacity RAID levels supported RAID 0 3 and 5 Copy and Replace Procedure Select from main menu View and Edit Logical Drives Selecta target array press ENTER and scroll down to choose copy and replace drive Press EN TER to proceed 12 7 tache status Llean o o OT afie statas Topan ep e View scsi drives Delete logical drive Partition logical drive logical drive Name logical drive Assignments Expand logical drive lt lt ucece lt lt Blo add Scsi drives reGenerate parit redor and replace drive The array members will be listed Select the member drive the source drive you want to replace with a larger one A EN EE totus Opan es e View sesi drives ay Delete logical drive Partition logical drive Chl EOE Speed LG_DRV Status Yendor and Product ID ci SURSIS ONE s 319 4oMB ON LINE BEE lt lt o Select one of the members as the source drive status indicated as ON LINE by pressing ENTER a tab
223. iate replacement of fan modules Elevated Temperature Alert 3f24 Elevated Temperature Alert MAlert OWarning General overheating warning O Notification Check cooling fan status and proper installation of dummy plate Consult your enclosure vendor s document for probable cause UPS Power Failure Detected 3f24 UPS Power Failure Detected MAlert OlWarning UPS device failure detected ON otification Check UPS status If power should fail and U PS is not able to sustain power data loss might occur D 39 Index A Access Mode Read Only or Read Write Active to Active Configuration Active to Standby Configuration Adding a SCSI Channel s ID LCD Adding a SCSI ID terminal Adding Drive to a Logical Drive Adding New Drive Advanced Firmware Features Assign Spare Drives terminal Assigning a Logical Drive Name LCD Assigning Logical Drive Name terminal Assigning Spare Drive LCD Assigning Spare Drive terminal Auto cache flush Auto recovery from logical drive failure Auto Failback Automatic engagement of replacement controller automatic rebuild Automatic Shutdown 8 19 10 11 10 17 10 17 5 26 7 26 12 4 12 4 B 2 7 7 5 18 7 17 10 11 B 7 1 9 B Background firmware download Bad block auto reassignment Basic RAID Management Battery Support Baud rate beeper mute C Cache Dirty Percentage LCD cache parameters Cache Status Cache Synchronization cachi
224. ical Drive 0 Logical Drive 1 Figure 1 11 Global Spare Rebuild Global Spare Drive est Qa ae LED fie Di G Sch eer gene Drive P Logical Drive a Logical Drive 1 Lusg eal Drive 2 Local Spare Drive is a standby drive assigned to serve one specified logical drive When a member drive of this specified logical drive fails the Local Spare Drive becomes a member drive and automatically starts to rebuild Figure 1 10 Global Spare Global Spare Drive not only serves one specified logical drive When a member drive from any of the logical drive fails the Global Spare Drive will join that logical drive and automatically starts to rebuild Global Spare Drives serve any logical drive Logical Drive 2 The external RAID controllers provide both Local Spare Drive and Global Spare Drive functions On certain occasions applying these two functions together will better fit various needs Take note though that the Local Spare Drive always has higher priority than the Global Spare Drive When a member drive from any logical drive fails the Global Spare Drive joins that logical drive and automatically starts to rebuild 1 6 Functional Description In the example shown below the member of Logical Drive 0 are 9 GB drives and the members in Logical Drives 1 and 2 are 4GB drives Figure 1 12 Mixing Local and Global Spares Local Spare Drive LS Da ug 9GB 9GB e
225. ical Unit Data can be stored into one of the LUNs of the SCSI ID Most SCSI host adapters treat an LUN like another SCSI device The same holds true for a Fibre channel host interface 32 LUN s are supported with each host ID 9 2 1 Host side SCSI Parameters Maximum Concurrent Host LUN Connection Nexus in SCSI The configuration option adjusts the internal resources for use with a number of current host nexus If there are four host computers A B C and D accessing the array through four host IDs LUNs ID 0 1 2 and 3 host A through ID 0 one nexus host B through ID 1 one nexus host C through ID 2 one nexus and host D through ID 3 one nexus all queued in the cache that is called 4 nexus If there are I Os in the cache through 4 different nexus and another host I O comes down with a nexus different than the four in the cache for example host A access ID 3 controller will return pusy Mind that it is concurrent nexus if the cache is cleared up it will accept four different nexus again Many I Os can be accessed via the same nexus Infortrend Maximum Queued I O Count LUN Host SCSI ID 8 Deri cheral Device Type Parameters Host Cy Pinder Head ector Mapping Configuration Fibre Connection Option Loop only Host side Parameters Drive s ide Parameters Disk Array Parameters Redundant Controller Parameters Contreller Parameters From the main menu select
226. ical Volume to the Secondary Controller A logical drive logical volume or any of its logical partitions can be assigned to the Primary or Secondary controller By default a logical drive is automatically assigned to the Primary controller It can be assigned to the Secondary controller if the host computer is also connected to the Secondary controller Note that the partitions of a logical drive that has previously been assigned to the Secondary controller will automatically be assigned to the Secondary controller Press ENT for two seconds on the front panel of the Primary controller to enter the Main Menu Use Y or A to navigate through the menus view and Edit Choose View and Edit Logical Drives then Logical Drives press ENT Create a logical drive or choose an existing logical drive then press ENT to see the logical drive menu Redundant Controller 10 23 Choose Logical Drive Assignment then press Assignment The message Redud Ctlr LG Assign Sec Ctlr will appear Press ENT for two seconds to DEE s s confirm The logical drive has now been assigned SE i to the Secondary controller Map the logical drive or any logical unit to a host ID or LUN number under the designated Secondary controller ID The host channel must have a Secondary SCSI ID created Create the Secondary controller s SCSI ID on host channel and add a SCSI ID to every drive channel in View and Edit SCSI Channels
227. ical unit s assigned to the Primary controller can only be mapped to the Primary IDs on host channel Logical unit s assigned to the Secondary controller can only be mapped to the Secondary IDs on host channel The channel ID Primary Secondary assignment for a SCSI controller should look like this Primary Controller ID Secondary Controller ID Host Chl SCSI ID PID 0 SID 1 Drive Chl SCSI ID 7 or 8 for the dual 6 suggested or 9 for the redundant chassis dual redundant chassis 10 12 Figure 10 10 Controller Failover Secondary controller becomes Primary controller and serves both SCSI ID 0 and 1 La on host channel 1 Zrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Channel 0 synchronized cache fe Pri Secondary Core Controller E ER al F gt j aug m zl Logical Drive 0 b lt m Logical Drive 1 E Controller Failure Controller failure is managed by the surviving controller The surviving controller disables and disconnects from its counterpart while gaining access to all signal paths The existing controller then proceeds with the ensuing event notifications and take over process The existing controller is always the Primary controller regardless of its original status and any replacement combined afterwards will assume the role of the Secondary Symptoms LCD on the failed controller is off LCD on the surviving controller displays controller failure message
228. ice Type 1 riv L Processer Device Type s CD ROM Device Type 5 Redunda Seanner Device FS Control b Device Type 7 Storage Array Controller Device Type xc Unknown Device Type Qx1 Table 9 1 Peripheral Device Type Parameters Operating System Peripheral Peripheral Device Support LUN Applicability Device Type Device for Removable Qualifier Media Windows NT 4 0 0Ox1f connected disabled All Undefined LUNs NetWare 0x03 connected disabled All Undefined mz SCO OpenServer All Undefined 5 0x LU SCO 0x03 connected either is okay All Undefined UnixWare 2 1x LUNs UnixWare 7 Solaris 2 5 x 2 6 Ox7f connected either is okay All Undefined x86 and SPARC LUNs LUNs 9 15 Infortrend Table 9 2 Peripheral Device Type Settings Device Type Setting DI No Device Present Ox7f Direct access Device r O Sequential access Device Processor Type CD ROM Device Scanner Device y ll 6 MO Device Storage Array Controller Device 0xC Cylinder Head Sector Mapping In the world of SCSI drive capacity is decided by the number of blocks For some of the operating systems Sun Solaris etc the OS will read the capacity based on the cylinder head sector count of the drive For Sun Solaris the cylinder cannot exceed 65535 so user can choose cylinder lt 65535 the controller will automatically adjust the head sector count then the OS can read the correct drive
229. iguration 10 17 Cache Synchronization I T 10 17 Battery Supports a ua tained nine aae aapa baana k aba spa 10 17 Gontig rati ll l E EE EE Sa E 10 19 10 3 1 Via Front Panel Keypad ul l L aa un S 10 20 Redundant Configuration Using Automatic Setting 10 20 Enable Redundant Controller a 10 20 Alf Tee In ML DEE 10 20 2 Controller Unique ID 10 20 Redundant Configuration Using Manual Gettimg 10 21 1 Enable Redundant Controller 10 21 2 ControlleriUnique D uuu uuu naa sas ukawa uqa wa ctal 10 21 Starting the Redundant Controllers 10 22 Creating Primary and Secondary ID 10 22 Drive Channeli u uuu uu aaa Q dEEAE Ad Eder 10 22 Beete pel usu mas t au m saus aa kuu w a SUE usa taka Reese 10 23 Assigning a Logical Drive Logical Volume to the Secondary Controller 10 23 Mapping a Logical Drive Logical Volume to the Host LUNSs 10 24 Front Panel View of Controller Failure 10 25 When and how is the failed controller replaced 10 25 10 3 2 Via Terminal Emulaton ccc u 10 26 Redundant Configuration Using Automatic Getting essene 10 26 Redundant Config
230. inal drive members Once completed the added capacity will appear as another partition new partition Data is automatically re striped across the new and old members during the add drive process See the diagram below to get a clear idea Figure 12 2 Expansion by Adding Drive See aa SSet SEERE RAID 5 Logical Drive 4GB PEENE PCP Add i in Ne w Dri ves N partitions Partition N 1 new partition RAID 5 Logical Drive 8GB After adding SCSI drives the additional capacity will appear as another partition new partition RAID levels supported RAID 0 3 and 5 The new partition must be made available through a host ID LUN Add Drive Procedure First select from the main menu View and Edit Logical Drive and select a logical drive to add a new drive to The drive selected for adding should have a capacity no less than the original member drives If possible use drives of the same capacity because all drives in the array is treated as though they have the capacity of the smallest member in the array Infortrend RAID Size MB Status o LN SB FL_ NAME BUYELYOETNRREEVZCEINERERE LTDILINE KIKI aa Wawaman Ss i j L Q v v v v v v s v v Press ENTER to select a logical drive and choose add SCSI drives from the submenu Proceed with confirming the selection TEREE EE sss View scsi drives Delete logical drive Partition logical drive logical
231. ing an integrated backplane 10 2 3 Configurable Parameters Primary or Secondary If necessary users can specify a particular controller as Primary or Secondary By setting each controller to the A utocfg mode the controllers will decide between themselves which is the Primary and which is the Secondary The controller firmware recognizes the two controllers used in a redundant configuration as Primary or Secondary Two controllers behave as one Primary controller Once the redundant configuration takes effect user s configurations and setings can only be done on the Primary controller The Secondary controller then synchronizes with the configuration of the Primary controller making the configurations of two controllers exactly the same Infortrend The two controllers continuously monitor each other When a controller detects that the other controller is not responding the working controller will immediately take over and disable the failed controller However it is not predictable which one of the controllers should fail It is necessary to connect all other interfaces to both controllers so that a surviving controller can readily continue all the services provided for the RAID system Active to Active Configuration Users can freely assign any logical configuration of drives to both or either of the controllers then map the logical configurations to the host channel IDs LUNs I O requests from host computer will then be di
232. ing setting in its members will also be changed RAID expansion with logical volume The Logical Volume can also be expanded using the RAID expansion function The concept of expanding a logical volume is similar to that of expanding a logical drive To perform RAID expansion on a logical drive reolace each member physical drive with a drive of larger capacity or add a new drive then perform logical drive expansion to utilize the newly added capacity For information about RAID expansion please refer to Chapter 9 Advanced Configurations To perform RAID expansion on a logical volume expand each member logical drive then perform RAID Expansion on the logical volume Steps to expand a Logical Volume 1 Expand each member logical drive 2 Expand the logical volume 3 Map the newly added capacity in the form of a new partition to a host LUN IMPORTANT e Ifa logical unit has already been partitioned and you wish to expand its capacity the added capacity will be appended to the last partition You will not be able to proceed with expansion using firmware version earlier than 3 27 when the unit already has 8 partitions e Unless you move your data and merge two of the partitions you will be not allowed to expand your logical volume This is a precautionary limitation on logical unit expansion Different controller settings using logical volume Redundant Controller Without logical volume logical drives can b
233. ion increasing the capacity of a RAID system meant backing up all data in the disk array re creating disk array configuration with new drives and then restoring data back into system Infortrend s RAID Expansion technology allows users to expand a logical drive by adding new drives or replacing drive members with drives of larger capacity Replacing is done by copying data Advanced Configurations 12 1 12 2 from the original members to larger drives and then the smaller drives can be replaced without powering down the system Note on Expansion 1 NOTE Added Capacity When a new drive is added to an existing logical drive the capacity brought by the new drive appears as a new partition Assuming that you have 4 physical drives each of the size of 36GB in allogical drive and that each drive s miximum capacity is used you will have a logical drive of the size of 108GB One drive s capacity is used for parity e g RAID 3 A 36GB drive is added the capacity will be increased to 144GB in two separate partitions one is 108GB and the other 36GB Size of the New Drive A drive used for adding the capacity should have the same capacity as that of the array s members Applicable Arrays Expansion can only be performed on RAID 0 3 and 5 logical drives Expansion can not be performed on a logical configurations that do not have parity e g NRAID or RAID 1 e Expansion on RAIDO is not recommended because the RA
234. ion message Press ESC to proceed Vendor and Product ID 28 Completed 2 4 NONE NEW DRV NONE NEW DRV 2 5 x 2 e 219 zem none nen pRv L el el s one none nen pav Advanced Configurations 9 2 The cloning process will be indicated by a status bar You may also quit the status bar by pressing ESC to return to the table of the connected drives Select the drive indicated as CLONING by pressing ENTER Bist ont To size Speed GOR Stator Vendor and Product TO L d zl Sam _ z az dam EE Se V EH s WE a a aa s View clone progress EN DRY a I Abort clone EW DRY eme clone Failing drive Select clone Failing drive again to view the current status You may identify the source drive and choose to view clone progress or abort clone if you happen to have selected the wrong drive When the process is completed users will be notified by the following message oning Notification 21A2 LG Logical Drive NOTICE CHL 2 ID 3 Copy and Replace Completed Perpetual Clone The standby spare will clone the source drive member drive with predicted errors or any selected drive without substituting it The status of the spare drive will be displayed as clone drive after the cloning process The source drive will remain a member of the logical drive In View and Edit SCSI drives locate
235. ion to the regular RS 232 in band SCSI can serve as an alternative means of management communication In band SCSI translates the original configuration commands into standard SCSI commands These SCSI commands are then sent to and received by the controller over the existing host link be it SCSI or Fibre Advanced Configurations 9 14 Peripheral Device Type Parameters for Various Operating Systems A host can not see a RAID controller UNLESS a logical unit has been created and mapped to host LUN via the RS 232 front panel interface or that the in band SCSI connection with the host is established If users want to start configuring a RAID system from the host before any RAID configuration is made the host will not be able to see the RAID controller In order for a host to see the controller it will be necessary to define the controller as a peripheral device Different host operating systems require different adjustments Look at the table below to find the proper settings for your host operating system References to Peripheral Device Qualifier and Device Support for Removable M edia are also included Cache Status Clean Main Menu Quick installation i Maximum Queued I O Count 256 LUNs per Host SCSI ID 8 Max Number ot Concurrent Host LUN Connection Def 4 Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connection Def 32 C Filly Direct access Device ype WS D Sequential access Dev
236. iptor strings Device Not Available gt MAlert OWarning Device missing ON otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ Temp Sensor_ Device N ot Supported 3f23 SES C_I_ Temperature Sensor_ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device N ot Supported gt MAlert OWarning ON otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ Temp Sensor Device Not Installed 3f23 SES C_I_ Temperature Sensor_ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device N ot Installed gt MAlert OWarning ON otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ Temp Sensor_ Device Unknown Status D 29 Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD D 30 3f23 SES C_I_ Temperature Sensor_ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Unknown Status gt MAlert OWarning ON otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ Temp Sensor Device Not Available 3f23 SES C_I_ Temperature Sensor_ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Not Available gt MAlert OWarning ON otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ UPS Device Not Supported 3f24 SES C_I_ UPS lt Vendor descriptor strings Device N ot Supported gt M
237. iptor strings Device N ot Supported gt 3f24 SES C_ _ UPS_ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Not installed gt 3f24 SES C_ _ UPS_ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Unknown Status gt 3f24 SES C_ _ UPS _ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Not A vailable gt 3f21 SES C_ _ Voltage sensor lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Not Supported gt 3f21 SES C_ I_ Voltage sensor lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Not installed gt 3f21 SES C_ _ Voltage sensor Vendor descriptor strings Device Unknown Status gt 3f21 SES C_ _ Voltage sensor _ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device N ot Available gt 3f21 SES C_ _ Current sensor _ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device N ot Supported gt 3f21 SES C_ I_ Current sensor _ Vendor descriptor strings Device N ot installed gt 3f21 SES C_ I_ Current sensor Vendor descriptor strings Device Unknown Status gt 3f21 SES C_ l_ Current sensor Vendor descriptor strings Device N ot Available gt General Peripheral Device 3f21 Peripheral Device ALERT Power Supply Failure Detected 3f22 Cooling Fan N ot Installed 3f22 Cooling Fan Failure Detected 3f24 Elevated Temperature Alert 3f24 UPS Power Failure Detected Notification SAF TE Device 3fa2 SAF TE Device _ NOTICE Fan Back On Line Idx _ 3fa3 SAF TE Device _ NOTICE Temperature Back to Non Critical Levels dx 3fal SAF TE Devi
238. it SCSI Channels J 7 11 6 View and Edit Configuration Parameters 8 Communication Parameters a 8 d leet ele e TEE 8 Caching Parameters A 9 Host Side SCS Parameters l n nasa 9 Drive Side SCSI Parameters U 9 Disk Array Parameters ioiai i ain iii ii 10 Redundant Controller Parameters cccsccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeeeeaes 10 Controller Paraimetersicccivsiciusseccecaasctevssesevtbenaseassesaaseteedaasvigecaarinctacnaatevanesctaee 10 11 7 View and Edit Peripheral Devices 11 Set Peripheral Device Ent 11 Define Peripheral Device Active Gong 11 View System Information cccccceccccceeceeneeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeseeeeeceeeesaeeeseaeeseneeesaees 11 11 8 Save NVRAM to Disk Restore from Disk 12 11 9 RAID Security Password u u u u 12 RAID tun E 12 Chapter 12 Array Expansion KA Re E 1 12 2 Mode 1 Expansion J u uu u J J 4 Adding Drives to a Logical Drive 4 Add Drive Procedure u L ua u sua EN 4 12 3 Mode zZEvpanston ENEE EREECHEN EEEEAEE SCC 7 xi Copy and Replace Drives
239. ite Cache Quick insta view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Beripheral devices view system Information system Functions view and edit Event logs i the arrow keys to move the cursor bar through then menu items then press ENTER to choosea menu or ESC to return to the previous menu screen In a subsystem or controller head where battery status can be detected battery status will be displayed at the top center Status will be stated as Good Bad or several plus marks will be used to indicate battery charge A battery fully charged will be indicated by five plus mark When initializing or scanning an array the controller displays progress percentage on the upper left corner of the configuration screen i indicates array initialization s stands for scanning process The following number indicates logical drive number Quick Installation lt Main Menu gt Quick installation v s v Create Logical Drive es v v Yes No v view and edit kent icuratign parameters view and edit Peripheral devices system Functions view system Information view and edit Event logs Type Q or use the T J keys to select Quick installation then press ENTER Choose Yes to create a logical drive All possible RAID levels will be di
240. ive disk Reserved space 32 mb 2 5 8683 100MB 2 6 8683 100MB 2 8683 100MB ON LINE ON LINE ON LINE ON LINE ON LINE Arrow Keys Move Cursor Enter Select Esc Exit iCtrl L Refresh Screen Choose View and Edit SCSI Drives on the main menu and use the arrow keys to move the cursor bar through connected drives Press ENTER to choose a drive or ESC to return to the previous menu screen User Assigned ID Scan SCSI Drive Select Scan SCSI drive to assign an ID to drive Infortrend Slot ich ID Size lt MB gt Speed LG_DRU Status Uendor and Product ID 2 D 17560 100ME ON LINE SEAGATE 1318364FC 2 1 17560 18BME 1 ON LINE SEAGATE ST3183B4FC 2 2 175668 166ME NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE T318384FGC pcm Channel 2 ses Channel 2 A 10 ME NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE SI318275FG HOHE FRHT DRU SEAGATE ST318275FG Input Fibre ID NONE FRHT DRU SEAGATE ST318275FG 2 7 17366 10 ME NONE FRMT DRU SEAGATE ST318275FG A drive enclosure usually has drive slots pre assigned with specific IDs There are occasions when an ID needs to be assigned manually to a device other than an ID provided otherwise The set slot number and the add drive entry functions are reserved for Infortrend s Fault bus operation View Drive Information Vendor and Product ID Quic lot Chl view view view
241. ive composed of an adequate number of 2 1 2 2 larger drives can be more efficient than that of many but smaller drives How many drives would you like to appear to the host computer It must be decided what capacity will be included in a logical configuration of drives be it a logical drive or a logical volume A logical configuration of drives will appear to the host as a single capacity volume You may compose a large logical volume consisting of drives on different drive channels and have it partitioned into smaller partitions Each partition will appear as an independent capacity volume In a performance oriented configuration you may configure the same number of drives into several RAID 0 logical drives just to get the most out of the array performance What kind of host application The frequency of read write activities can vary from one host application to another The application can be a SQL server Oracle server Informix or other data base server of a transaction based nature Applications like video playback and video post production editing require read write activities of larger files coming in a sequential order Choose an appropriate RAID level for what is the most important for a given application capacity availability or performance Before creating your RAID you need to choose an optimization scheme and optimize each array controller for your application Stripe size and write policy can be adjusted
242. ke sure the link is up and running 4 FTP Manager Programs to the Controller IP Address There are several RAIDWatch programs that need to be FTP ed to the controller IP address 1 Necessary program files can be found in a zip file GUI zip in the CD ROM that came with your machine Unzip erem bm grem jar grm htm and grm jar to your PC Files are available in the following directory X Java where X is the CD ROM letter 2 Open a DOS prompt You may use an FTP program to complete the same process Key in ftp xx xx xx xx controller IP address Connecting Terminal 3 7 3 Login as root and there is no password for the first login Press Enter to skip password entry 4 Use the put command to transfer the following files put grm htm put grm jar put grem htm put grem jar 5 Proceed to install Java Run time environment from the CD If the management station is a P4 based computer it is required to install Java JRE version1 3 1 6 Reset the RAID subsystem using the Reset command for the configuration to take effect 5 Starting the M anager Start your web browser and enter the IP address assigned to the controller followed by grm htm as your URL eg http xx xx xx xx grm htm Enter the IP address followed by grem htm to start Event M onitor 3 8 Infortrend 3 2 3 NPC is short for Notification Processing Center a sub module for NPC Onbo
243. l Controller Configuration Using Fibre Based Controllers 10 3 Figure 10 4 Grouping Hard Drives 10 6 Figure 10 5 Partitioning of Logical Units 10 6 Figure 10 6 Mapping System Drives Mapping LUNS seseeeeeeeeseeee 10 7 Figure 10 7 Mapping System Drives Del 10 8 Figure 10 8 Redundant Controller Channel Bus sseeeeeeneeeneeeree 10 9 Figure 10 9 Controller Failover oo cece U u u 10 10 Figure 10 10 Traffic Distribution u u 10 12 Figure 10 11 Controller Failover a 10 13 Chapter 12 Figure 12 1 Logical Drive Expansion 12 3 Figure 12 2 Expansion by Adding Drive 12 4 Figure 12 3 Expansion by Copy amp Replace 12 7 xix XX About This Manual This manual provides all of the necessary information that a system administrator needs to configure and maintain one of Infortrend s external RAID controllers or subsystems For hardware related information please refer to the Hardware Manual that came with your RAID controller Also available is the User s Manual for the Java based GUI RAID manager for remote and concurrent management of RAID systems The order of the chapters is arranged in accordance with the steps necessary for creating a RAID The terminal screen displays as well as the
244. l Device ALERT 3 3V lt upper lower threshold gt Voltage Detected _ MAlert OWarning ON otification The detected 3 3V voltage source is now higher or lower than the preset voltage threshold Check power supply condition voltage threshold settings and contact the your system supplier High Low V Voltage Detected _ __ 3F21 Peripheral Device ALERT 5V lt upper lower threshold gt Voltage Detected _ MAlert OWarning ON otification The detected 5V voltage source is now higher or lower than the preset voltage threshold Check power supply condition voltage threshold settings and contact your system supplier High Low 12V Voltage Detected _ _ 3F21 Peripheral Device ALERT 12V lt upper lower gt Voltage Detected _ MAlert OWarning ONotification The detected 12V voltage source is higher or lower than the preset voltage threshold Check power supply condition voltage threshold settings and contact your system supplier Infortrend PC Device 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Event Messages Temp Sensor_ Failure Detected 3F23 Peripheral Device ALERT Temperature Sensor_ Failure Detected MAlert OWarning O
245. l Volume To expand a logical volume expand its logical drive member s and then perform expand logical volume Delete Partition logica View logical drive fosical volume volume logical volume Assignments xpand logical volume Cache Status Clean ters When prompted by Expand Logical Volume Choose Yes to confirm and the process will be completed immediately Array Expansion 12 11 12 6 Configuration Example Volume Extension in Windows 2000 Server Limitations When Using Windows 2000 L Applies only to the Windows NT Server or Windows 2000 Server Disk Management which includes the Extend Volume Set function Windows NT Workstation does not support this feature The volume set expansion formats the new area without affecting existing files on the original volume 2 The system drive boot drive of a Windows NT 2000 system can not be expanded 3 Thedriveto be expanded should be using the NTFS file system Example The following example demonstrates the expansion of a 16988MB RAID 5 logical drive The HyperTerminal emulation software that comes with Windows Server is used to connect to the RAID controller via RS 232C 12 12 Infortrend You can view information about this drive in the Windows 2000 Server s Computer Management gt Storage gt Disk Management mj Computer Management Partition System Tools SAN Si
246. l or otherwise without the prior written consent of Infortrend Technology Inc Disclaimer Infortrend Technology makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Furthermore Infortrend Technology reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the content hereof without oblig ation to notify any person of such revisions or changes Product specifications are also subject to change without notice Trademarks Infortrend and the Infortrend logo are registered trademarks and SentinelRAID EonRAID EonStor RAIDWatch and other names prefixed with IFT are trademarks of Infortrend Technology Inc PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation and Motorola Inc DEC and Alpha are registered trademarks of Compaq Computer Corp formerly of Digital Equipment Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows NT and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and other countries Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc in the U S and other countries SCO OpenServer and UnixWare are trademarks or registered trademarks of The Santa Cruz Operation Inc in the U S and other countries Solaris is a trademark of SUN Microsystems Inc UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the U
247. le of available drives will prompt Select a new drive to copy the capacity of the source drive The channel number and ID number of both the Source Drive and the Destination Drive will be indicated in the confirming box GE Size MB m a acamasassssmsam and Preduct ID ES Source Drive NE weu DRV Channel 1 ID 0 Destination Drive NE NEW DRV Channel 1 ID 3 NE NEW DRV Copy and Replace Drive NE NEW DRY ves No sr 1 318 2QMB Hi ON LINE 2 648 20MB DI ON LINE lt cucecece lt Bo Choose Yes to confirm and proceed ive Copying Notification 21411 LG Logical Drive NOTICE CHL 1 ID 3 Starting Clone Press ESC to view the progress 12 8 Infortrend 12 4 Array Expansion Drive Copyin RE KS eet ee eer ES C j Lee L Liwer Completion of the Copy and Replace process will be indicated by a notification message Follow the same method to copy and replace every member drive You may now perform Expand Logical Drive to make use of the added capacity and then map the additional capacity to a Host LUN Drive Copying Notification 21A2 LG Logical Drive NOTICE CHL 1 ID 3 Copy and Replace Completed Making Use of the Added Capacity Expand Logical Drive In the following example the logical drive is originally composed of three member drives and each member drive has the capacity of 1 Gigabyte Copy and Replace has been perfor
248. le to Hosts 9 Tunable Parameters J J u u J J J J 10 Chapter 3 Accessing the Array through Serial Port and Ethernet iv 3 1 RS 232G Serial Porta Sa aa muu unas 1 3 2 3 1 1 Configuring RS 232C Connection via Front Panel 2 3 1 2 Starting RS 232C Terminal Emulaton eese neer nsen nsrneernsens 3 Out of Band via Ethernet J J J J J J J J 4 What Is the Disk Reserved Space 4 Other COnCemS tus ua A tha tie thal asan tien 5 Web Based Management ersin eri eraa ARa S a KAEA AT E eni Kaa 5 Se WEE CEET 5 3 2 1 Connecting Ethernet Port 5 3 2 2 Configuring the Controller 6 B22 NPC On DOAN WEE 9 The SNMP TRAP Section u una ences uD a Q eek lee ee 10 The EMAIL Section EEN NEEN ieiti e eee rene eee eee 10 The Ee el EE 10 Chapter 4 LCD Screen Messages 4 1 The Initial SCrOM EE 1 Quick Installation Screen uu uuu u 1 Logical Drive Status u u u u u u 2 Logical Volume StatuS un l RL Sau aan qua as 3 SCSI Drive TE 4 SCSI Channel Status T 5 Controller Voltage and Temperature
249. lter Control Configurable filter type access right name RCC through Fibre channel Dedicated or sharing drive channel s RAID Planning Array Configuration Disk reserved space 256M B 64KB backward compatible Array assignment Primary Secondary controller controller Array partitioning 1 Up to 64 Others Password N A User Defined Password Validation Timeout 1 to Always Check Configurable LCD Display N A User Defined Controller Name 2 12 Chapter 3 Accessing the Array through Serial Port and Ethernet 3 1 RS 232C Serial Port Infortrend s controllers and subsystems can be configured via a PC running a VT 100 terminal emulation program or a VT 100 compatible terminal RAID enclosures usually provide one or more DB 9 RS 232C ports Simply use an RS 232C cable to connect between the controller enclosure s RS 232C port and the PC serial COM port Make sure you use the included null modem IFT 9011 to convert the serial port signals A null modem might have been provided inside your enclosure The Null Modem has the serial signals swapped for connecting to a standard PC serial interface The following are guidelines on using the serial port e The serial port s default is set at 38400 baud 8 bit 1 stop bit and no parity Use the COM 1 serial port of the controller e In most cases connecting RD TD and SG is enough to est
250. med on the logical drive and each of its member drives has been replaced by a new drive with the capacity of 2 Gigabytes The next step is to perform Expand Logical Drive to utilize the additional capacity brought by the new drives L Select View and Edit Logical Drives from the main menu and select the logical drive with its members copied and replaced 2 Select Expand Logical Drive in the sub menu and press EN TER to proceed A confirming box will appear 3 Proceed by pressing ENTER or entering any value no larger than the maximum drive expand capacity and press EN TER 12 9 ache Status ean AQ 6 os EE V wamamamanaa v v View scsi driyes o v Delete logical drive TT v Partition logical drive v logical drive Name s logical drive Assignments v Pexpand logical ica r dives v Maximum Available Drive Free Ca city 1999 Maximum Drive Expand Capacity MB 1000 Choose Yes to confirm and proceed REECH s sas s View scsi drives Delete logical drive Partition logical drive logical drive Name logical drive Assignments a SU SE I i HH ecucceceeMo Expanding Notification 2188 Expansion of Logical Drive Completed Press ESC to return to the previous menu screen The total capacity of logical drive has been expanded to 6 Gigabytes lt cucccce lt Mo 12 10 Infortrend 12 5 Expand Logica
251. ment 5 Temperature Sensors 6 Audible Alarm 7 Enclosure Services Controller Electronics ache Status ean Write Cache Enable y BAT BAD lain Me Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view an view an EEEa view an Enclosure Descriptor Device s Power Supply v WS Cooling element v Temperature Sensors D Audible alarm LOCATION Select the device interface then select individual module to check its status ache Status San Write Cache Enable BAT BAD tatus HOK emperature High Critical reshold f High Warning_Threshold Seil Low Warning Threshold M i MH Low Critical Threshold R iei WS Cooling element emperature Sensors V En Overall Status controller electronics lt lt LOCATION Cache Status Clean Write Cache Enable BAT BAD Main Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and view and view and e utdown Period min Change time period to wait following certain event before commencing controller shutdown Select View and edit Peripheral Devices on the main menu and press ENTER Choose Set Peripheral Device Entry and Event Trigger Option by pressing ENTER The auto shutdown option displays Advanced Configurations 9 26 Select a
252. mized pattern You can change the optimization mode later without having to re organize your array Front Panel Operation 5 1 5 2 Database and Transaction based Applications This kind of applications usually include SQL server Oracle server Informix or other data base services These applications keep the size of each transaction down to the minimum so that UU Os can be rapidly processed Due to its transaction based nature these applications do not read or write a bunch of data in a sequential order Access to data occurs randomly The transaction size usually ranges from 2K to 4K Transaction performance is measured in lU Os per second or IOPS Video Recording Playback and Imaging Applications This kind of applications usually includes video playback video post production editing or other similar applications These applications have the tendency to read or write large files from and into storage in a sequential order The size of each I O can be 128K 256K 512K or up to IMB The efficiency of these applications is measured in M B Sec When an array works with applications such as video or image oriented applications the application reads writes from the drive as large block sequential threads instead of small and randomly accessed files The controller optimization modes have read ahead buffer and other R W characteristics tuned to obtain the best performance for these two major application categori
253. mple fal Event Viewer System Information z Performance Logs and Alerts Shared Folders ZS Device Manager Local Users and Groups Storage CH Disk Defragmenter CG Logical Drives El Si Removable Storage New volume E Services and Applications 16 58 GB NTFS Healthy Place the cursor on Disk 1 right click your mouse and select Properties You will see that the total capacity for the Drive E is about 16 5GB Local Disk F Properties Array Expansion 12 13 Follow the steps described in the previous section to add or copy amp replace SCSI disk drives and perform Logical Drive Expansion on Jan 28 18 38 48 2003 Cache Status Clean B 92x LG ID LU RAID Size lt MB gt Status 1 2 3 0 C LN SB FL NAME g Adding 92 Completed_ 2 3 4 NONE 5 NONE 6 NONE NONE The 16 5GB logical drive has become a 25GB logical drive Place the cursor on that logical drive and then press ENTER on Jan 26 18 32 34 2003 Cache Status Clean LG ID LU RAID S ize lt MB gt Status 1 2 3 0 C LN HSB FL NAME From the menu select Partition Logical Drive You Will see that the 25GB logical drive is composed of a 17GB partition and an 8 4GB partition on Jan 26 18 33 39 2663 Cache Status Clean Follow the directions in chapter 5 and chapter 7 to map the new par
254. n then press ENTER Select SCSI Drive Utilities then press ENTER Choose Read Write Test and press ENTER You can choose to enable disable the following options 1 Auto Reassign Bad Block 2 Abort When Error Occurs 3 Drive Test for Read Only Read and Write When finished with configuration select Execute Drive Testing and press ENTER to proceed 9999 40MB 0 ON LINE IDN DDRS 3456aD DDRS 3456aD DDRS 34566D Abort en Error Occurrence DDRS 34568D Drive Test for Read Only Execute Drive Testing DDRS 3456eD 18 Completed_ You may press ESC and select Read Write Test later and choose either to View Read Write Testing Progress or to List Current Bad Block Table If you want to stop testing the drive select Abort Drive Testing and press ENTER to proceed Status Vendor and Product ID ON LINE IBM DDRS 3456aD 2 2 1 9999 4 MB ON LINE IBM DDRS 34560D ON LINE DDRS 3456 D ON LINE DDRS 34568D IBM DDRS 34568D IBM DDRS 3456aD BM DDR q50UD ON LINE IBM DDRS 3456aD Quic Slot Chl ID Size MB Speed LG_DRV Scan scsi drive Set slot Number ist Current Bad Bloc Abort Drive Testing SE Address Stat Address Stat Address Stat Address Stat Address Stat Address Stat
255. n view and edit Event logs Choose a functional item from the main menu to begin configuring your RAID Connecting Terminal 3 3 3 2 Out of Band via Ethernet The RAIDWatch manager software provides graphical interface to the subsystem Before you can access the RAID system using the software manager your must 1 Create a reserved space on your array s 2 Set up the related TCP IP configurations to enable the Ethernet port and the http service 3 FTP RAIDWatch program files to the controller IP address What Is the Disk Reserved Space RAID Watch and Reserved Space e There is no need to install the RAIDWatch program to your management computer if you access the software using the controller Ethernet port In order to simplify the installation process system firmware already contains important software agents e User s configuration data and the manager s main programs are kept in a small section of disk space on each data drive The segregated disk space is called a Disk Reserved Space When configuring a logical drive firmware automatically segregates a 256MB of disk space from each of the member drives e Because the manager s main program is run from the reserved space on drives in the event of RAID controller failure the manager interface can failover to a counterpart controller Operators access to the system will not be interrupted Infortrend Other C
256. n Line M ode If online initialization method is applied the array will be available for Pomo eredtion Completed use immediately The array initialization runs in the background while data can be written onto it and users can continue configuring the RAID system Infortrend The Off Line M ode The controller will start to initialize the Initializing090 array parity if using the Off line Please Wait mode Note that if NRAID or RAID 0 is selected initialization time is short LG 0 Initializat and completes almost immediately Ion Completed The logical drive s information displays LG 0 RAIDS DRV 3 when the initialization process is 2012MB GD SB 0 completed If On line mode is adopted array information will be displayed immediately Front Panel Operation 5 9 5 5 Creating a Logical Volume Press ENT for two seconds to enter the Main Menu Press W or A to select View and Edit Logical Volume then press ENT Press Y or A to Select an undefined entry for logical volume then press ENT for two seconds to proceed LV is short for Logical Volume Proceed to select one or more logical drives Press ENT to proceed LD is short for Logical Drive Use Y or A to browse through the logical drives Press ENT again to select deselect the drives An asterisk mark will appear when the logical drive is selected After all the desired logical drive s have been selected press ENT for tw
257. n the background while you can start using the array or continue configuri ng your RAID system I 39 Completed When a fault tolerant RAID level RAID 1 3 or 5 is selected the controller will start initializing parity Use the ESC key to view the status of the created logical drive ache Status Write Cache Enable G I Lv Pato erem Status 12e e AUN ASB L e PO cancer ipo INA IRAS TSSB GOOD mai ol al ogic riv Partition logical drive logical drive Nam logical drive Assignments Expand logical driv add Scsi drives reGenerate parity cOpy and replace drive Media scan Write policy IMPORTANT e Mind that only logical drives with RAID level 1 3 and 5 will take the time to initialize the logical drive Logical drives with RAID level 0 and NRAID do not have the necessity to perform logical drive initialization the drive initialization will be finished almost immediately Terminal Operation 7 9 7 5 Creating a Logical Volume Cache Status Clean Parameters vices ccucceecMes A logical volume consists of one or several logical drives Choose View and Edit logical volumes in the main menu The current logical volume configuration and status will be displayed on the screen Choose a logical volume number 0 7 that has not yet been defined then press ENTER to proceed A prompt Create Logical Volume will appear Select Yes
258. nd edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration p i it Peripheral devices s D Ge Peripheral Device Status v ITEM STATUS LOCATION Redundant Controller Enabled Primar D u When the scanning has completed the status will Tes to Enabled lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view edit Scsi channels View Peripheral Device Status ITEM STATUS LOCATION edundant Controller Scanning Primary 10 32 Infortrend Forcing Controller Failover for Testing lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices ui View Peripheral Device Status Set Peripheral Device Entr D G Redundant Controller Primar U D isable redundant controller force Primary controller failure force Secondary controller failure This function is reserved for de bugging Testing the failover functionality can be performed using the following methods 1 Pulling out one of the controllers to simulate controller failure Pull out either the primary or the secondary controller An error message will display immediately wit
259. ng ON otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ Voltage Sensor_ Device Unknown Status 3f21 SES C_I_ Voltage Sensor_ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Unknown Status gt MAlert OWarning ONotification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ Voltage Sensor_ Device Not Available 3f21 SES C_I_ Voltage Sensor_ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Not Available gt MAlert OWarning ON otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ Current Sensor Device Not Supported D 31 Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do D 32 3f21 SES C_I_ Current Sensor_ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Not Supported gt MAlert OWarning ON otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ Current Sensor_ Device Not Installed 3f21 SES C_I_ Current Sensor_ lt Vendor descriptor strings Device Not Installed gt MAlert OWarning ON otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ Current Sensor_ Device Unknown Status 3f21 SES C_I_ Current Sensor_ Vendor descriptor strings Device Unknown Status gt MAlert OWarning ON otification Press lt ESC gt to clear the message _ _ Current Sensor_ Device Not Available 3f21 SES C_I_
260. ng parameters Caching Parameters LCD Caching Parameters terminal Change Password LCD Change Password terminal Channel failure protection Channel Mode channel mode redefining Channel Mode Fibre channel mode viewing and redefining check time periodic auto detection of failed drive swap Choosing Member Drives LCD Choosing Member Drives terminal Choosing RAID Level terminal Clone Replace S M A R T Clone Failing Drive Co existing spares B 2 B 7 B 1 10 17 3 1 5 34 7 34 4 7 7 1 2 6 1 10 17 7 1 2 5 1 5 3 4 7 1 5 34 7 34 B 5 7 25 8 6 5 25 9 23 5 6 7 6 7 6 9 6 9 2 B 8 B 1 Index 1 Communications 8 7 Channel Fibre Communications over 8 13 drive loops concurrent rebuild in 1 11 RAID 0 1 Configuration on Disk B 2 Configuration 8 20 Procedure LUN Filtering Connecting Drives with 8 10 Fibre Channel Dual Loop Connection Type 8 10 Controller 8 12 Communications Over Fibre Loops Controller Failover and 10 9 Failback Controller Failure 10 13 Controller Name LCD 5 37 Controller Name 7 37 terminal controller naming 5 37 7 37 7 39 8 11 Controller Parameter 2 10 Settings Controller Parameters 5 37 LCD Controller Parameters 7 37 terminal controller reset 5 35 7 36 controller temperature B 9 sensors Controller Unique 8 11 Identifier Controller Unique 5 37 Identifier LCD Controller Unique 7 39 Identifi
261. ning on host computers need these names to properly address a storage subsystem Fibre Operation 8 7 View Device Port Name List WWPN lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes channel Mode view and edit scsi Id GCH view chip inFormation view channel Wun KiS View device ort name list Cwwpn Wd KH E 60 00 FO 8E OO 9F ed Scpzl tenl This function displays device port names host adapter ID detected on a host loop Device port names will be listed here except that of the controller s O processor The HBA port names detected can be added to the Host ID WWN name list in View and Edit Host LUN menu Adding port names to list can speed the mapping process that follows Each port name should then be assigned a nickname for ease of identification This is especially the case when multiple filtering entries must be defined for granting or denying access to a specific storage unit See the following sections for more details View and Edit Fibre Drive Quic Slot Ch1 ID SizeCMB gt Speed LG DRUI Status Vendor and Product ID View drive information B ON LINE SEAGATE T39183FC SEAGATE ST39103FC SEAGATE ST39103FC SEAGATE ST39103FC SEAGATE ST39103FC SEAGATE ST39103FC SEAGATE ST39103FC set slot Number B ON LINE add drive Entry Identify scsi drive clone Failing dr
262. ning progress will be completed by a notification message as displayed below Notification 21A2 LG Logical Drive NOTICE CHL 2 ID Clone Completed You may press ESC to clear the notification message to see the SCSI drives status after the cloning process The source drive Channel 1 ID 5 remains as a member of logical drive 0 and the stand by drive Channel 11D 2 the dedicated global spare drive has become a CLONE drive Vendor and Product ID oa str om TO SizeCB sree a States Sf CT L o sis zee of oven 23 Ee AONE 2 20MB NEW DRY 2 20MB NEW DRY x e s zee none nen pav Cat s zeme none nen pav Advanced Configurations 9 4 9 1 2 S M A R T Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology This section provides a brief introduction to S M A R T as one way to predict drive failure and Infortrend s implementations with S M A R T for preventing data loss caused by drive failure A Introduction Self M onitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology S M A R T is an emerging technology that provides near term failure prediction for disk drives When S M A R T is enabled the drive monitors predetermined drive attributes that are susceptible to degradation over time If a failure is likely to occur SM A R T makes a status report available so that the host can prompt the user to back up data on the failing drive However not all f
263. nnel mode only 4 5 Infortrend 4 7 Controller Voltage and Temperature Press ENT for two seconds to enter the view and Edit Main Menu Press Y or A to select Peripheral Dev View and Edit Peripheral Dev then press ENT Ctlr Peripheral Press Y or A to select Ctlr Peripheral Device Config Device Config press ENT and then choose View Ctlr Periph Device Status then press ENT View Ctlr Periph Device Status Press Y or A to choose either Voltage Voltage Monitor Monitor or Temperature Monitor Temperature Monitor SC Select Temperature and Voltage 12V 12 077V Monitor by pressing Enter Press Y Operation Normal or A to browse through the various voltage and temperature statuses 5v 4 938v Operation Normal 3 3V 3 384V Operation Normal CPU 43 5 C in Safe Range 12v 12 077v Operation Normal CPU 43 5 C in Safe Range Board 46 5 C in Safe Range Board1 46 5 C in Safe Range LCD Screen Messages 4 6 4 8 Cache Dirty Percentage The LCD panel indicates the cache dirty percentage The amber colored busy light blinking on front panel also indicates that the cache is being accessed 4 9 View and Edit Event Logs Press ENT for two seconds to enter the Main Menu Press Y or A to select View and Edit Event Logs then press ENT Press W or A to browse through the UPS Power existing event log items F
264. nnels view and edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices EFA k E Download Firmware vi M Advanced Maintenance Functions Save nvram to disks Restore nvram from disks oan Restore NVRAM From Disks Yes No Terminal Operation 7 38 Press Yes to confirm A prompt will notify you that the controller NVRAM data has been successfully restored from disks Password Validation Timeout Cache Status Main Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns es ls tion parameters Choose View and Edit Configuration parameters Controller Parameters then press ENTER Select Password Validation Timeout and press ENTER Choose to enable a validation timeout from one minute to always check The always check timeout will disable any configuration change made without entering the correct password Controller Unique Identifier Cache Status Clean Menu Main Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters View Peripheral Device Status et Peripheral Device Entr A HSN ontroller Disabled Controller Unique Identifier nter Set to Default sc Exit trl L Refres creen Enter any hex number between 0 and FFFFF for the
265. ntifier setting can be accessed from View and Edit Configuration Parameters gt Controller Parameters gt Controller Unique ID Terminal Operation 7 40 Set Controller Date and Time This sub menu only appears when the controller is equipped with a real time clock Time Zone ache Status ean Write Cache Enable Main Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels Controller Name Not Set LCD Title Display Controller Logo Password Validation Timeout Always Check Controller Unique Identifier Hex 221 SDRAM ECC Enabled Time Zone Date and lime troller Name Not Set Controll LCD Title Display Controller Logo Pass c Si oa CI a ont DRA Default TimeZone GMT 05 15 New TimeZone GMT ee ate an ime The controller uses GMT Greenwich Mean Time a 24 hours clock To change the clock to your local time zone enter the hours later than the Greenwich mean time following a plus sign For example enter 9 for Japanese time zone Date and Time Controller Name Not Set LCD Title Display Controller Logo Password Validation Timeout Always Check Cont i SDRA H Ser Time and Date MMDDhhmm YYYY T Date and Time Enter time and date in its numeric representatives in the following or
266. nu gt uick installation view and edit ogical drives view and edit Host luns D Host Channel v Pom TD 6 Prinary Controler J u Slot Ch1 ID SizeCMB gt Speed LG_DRU Status Vendor and Product ID syst view view Han Physical Drive Chl 2 ON LINE SEAGATE T31055W Physical Drive ID B To Host Channel B ON LINE SEAGATE ST32558W Host ID zB ETE Ho If you have primary and secondary controllers move the cursor to the controller for the device that you wish to map then press ENTER You will be prompted to map a SCSI ID to a physical drive WARNING 7 21 Infortrend e Pass through SCSI Commands are only intended to perform maintenance functions for a drive or device on the drive side Do not perform any destructive commands to a disk drive i e any commands that write data to a drive media This will result in inconsistent parity among drives included in a logical configuration of drives If a disk drive is a spare drive or a member of a logical drive such a destructive command may cause a data inconsistency e When a drive device is mapped to a host SCSI ID so that Pass through SCSI Commands can be used the data on that drive device will not be protected by the controller Users who employ Pass through SCSI Commands to perform any write commands to drive media do so at their own risk 7 11 Viewing and Editing SCSI Drives Cache Status Clean Main Menu Quick installation SES Size MB
267. o Host LUN 13 Assigning Spare Drive and Rebuild Settings 14 Adding a Local Spare Drive 14 Adding a Global Spare Drive 15 REBUN KEE die CEET 15 vi 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 Viewing and Editing Logical Drives and Drive Membesrs 16 Deleting a Logical Drive cccceecccceceseccceeeeececeeeeeceeesneeceeeeneeeeeesneeaeeeseneeeeenees 16 Deleting a Partition of a Logical Drive 17 Assigning a Name to a Logical Drive 18 Rebuilding a Logical Drive sesiis iiaa aiii EE A En 18 Regenerating Logical Drive Party 19 Media San uu nee uama Hal enti eee lea ete 20 Writ POllCY ss ya au eats ae alka eed ae ed eee ee 21 Viewing and Editing Host LUNs 22 Viewing and Deleting LUN Mappings 22 Pass through SCSI Commands L 22 Viewing and Editing SCSI Drives 23 Scanning New SCSI Drive 23 Identitying a Drive uu ll hl nei ee 24 Deleting Spare Drive Global Local Spare Drive 25 Viewing and Editing SCSI Channels 25 Redefining Channel Mode AA 25 Setting a SCSI Channel s ID Host Channel 26 MIGWING IDS ET 26 Adding a Channel ID 26 Deleting a Channel ID 27 Setting a SCSI Ch
268. o be received 1 notification 2 warning 3 alert 1 covers events of all levels 3 sends only the most serious events COMMUNITY SNMP community name of the destination receiver RECEIVER The IP address of the receiver computer Add additional lines to specify multiple receivers Up to 4 receivers can be configured The EMAIL section EMAIL section header ENABLED enabled 0 disabled applies to this section only SEVERITY level of severity of the messages to be received notification 2 warning 3 alert 1 covers events of all levels 3 sends only the most serious events SUBJECT add a topic to email This can be used to specify the location of the RAID system if there are many SENDER_MAIL_BOX a valid email address to be used as the from part of the email message SMTP_SERVER SMTP server used to send email IP address only do not enter a host name here RECEIVER receiver s email address The receiver s number followed by an mark an email address comma and the number to specify the message severity level oh k TheBROADCAST section BROADCAST section header ENABLED enabled 0 disabled applies to this section only SEVERITY level of severity of the messages to be received 1 notification 2 warning 3 alert 1 covers events of all levels 3 only the most serious events will be broadca
269. o detect a replacement drive make sure you have the following items set to enabled 1 Periodic Drive Check Time 2 Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time These two configuration options can be found under View and Edit Configuration Parameters gt Drive Side SCSI Parameters Press ENT for two seconds to enter the Main Menu Press Y or A to select View and Edit View and Edit Logical Drives then Pog eat Daves press ENT Press Y or A to select the logical drive E that has a failed member then press 912 PI SBEN ENT Press Y or A to select Rebuild Logical Rebuild Logical Drive then press ENT Drive cs Press ENT for two seconds to start WE ebuild Logical rebuilding the logical drive Deive 2 The rebuilding progress will be displayed as a percentage on the LCD Rebuilding 25 Please Wait Front Panel Operation 5 1 CO When rebuilding is already started or the logical drive is being rebuilt by a Local Spare Drive or Global Spare Drive choose Rebuild Progress to see the rebuild progress IMPORTANT LGOQ RAID5 DRV 3 2012MB RB SB 0 Rebuild Progress e TheRebuild function will appear only if a logical drive with RAID level 1 3 or 5 has a failed member e Usethe Identify Drive function to check the exact location of a failed drive Removing thewrong drive may causea logical drive to fail and data loss is unrecoverable Regenerating Logical D
270. o save configuration information whenever a configuration change is made The information will be duplicated and distributed to all logical configurations of drives At least a RAID configuration must exist for the controller to write your configuration data onto it From the main menu choose system functions Use arrow keys to scroll down and select controller maintenance save NVRAM to disks then press EN TER lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit EE parameters w s and edit Peripheral devices ETZI v Download Firmware vil M Advanced Maintenance Functions pave nvram EE e disks S To ins T NVRAM To Disks Benn Choose Yes to confirm le A prompt will inform you that NVRAM information has been successfully saved Restore NVRAM from Disks When you want to restore your NVRAM information from what you previously saved onto disk use this function to restore the configuration information From the main menu choose system functions Use arrow keys to scroll down and select controller maintenance restore NVRAM from disks and then press ENTER lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi cha
271. o seconds to continue Two submenus will appear Initialization Mode Array initialization can take a long time especially for those comprised of large capacity Setting to Online means the array is immediately accessible and that the controller will complete the initialization when IO demands become less intensive Write Policy This menu allows you to set the caching mode policy for this specific logical volume Default is a neutral value that is coordinated with the controller s caching mode setting Other choices are WriteBack and Write Through When finished with setting the preferences press ENT for two View and Edit Logical Volume LV 0 Not Defined LV 0 Selected To Select LD Drives LGOQ RAID5 DRV 3 2021MB GD SB 0 Initialization Mode Online Write Policy Default 5 10 Infortrend seconds to display the confirm box Create Press ENT for two seconds to start Logical Volume initializing the logical volume The logical volume has been Lv 0 Creation Completed successfully created Lv 0 ID 07548332 Press ESC to clear the message 0024488MB DRV 2 Another message will prompt press ESC to clear it Logical volume information will be Create Logical displayed below Volume Successed Logical Volume Assignment If you have two controllers you may choose to assign this logical volume to the secondary controller The assignment can be done during or
272. o seconds to enter the Main Menu Press Y or A to select hae ley Edit View and Edit Config Parms then ee press ENT Press Y or A to select Disk Array Disk Array Parameters then press ENT Parameters Press W or A to select Rebuild Priority Low then press ENT Low Rebuild Priority refers to the temporary setting Low WI Press ENT again and the abbreviation Rebuild Priority mark will change to question mark Pov a Press W or A to select priority Low Normal Improved or High Press ENT to confirm and the question Rebuild Priority mark will turn into High Infortrend NOTE e The rebuild priority determines how much of controller resources is conducted when rebuilding a logical drive The default setting of the rebuild priority is LOW Rebuild will have smaller impact on host I O access but rebuild will take a longer time to complete Changing the rebuild priority to a higher level you will have a faster rebuild but will certainly increase the Host I O response time The default setting LOW is recommended 5 9 Viewing and Editing Logical Drives and Drive Members Press ENT for two seconds to enter the Main Menu Press W or A to select View and Edit Logical Drives then press ENT Press Y or A to select the logical drive LGO RAID5 DRV 3 Press Y or A to select View SCSI View SCSI Drives Drives then press ENT
273. oa 3 9GB Logical Drive 0 A Local Spare always has higher priority than a Global Spare Infortrend Logical Drive 1 Global Spare Drive el Aaen 7 ai Toler 4GB 4GB Ed 2 4GB 4GB Logical Drive 2 It is not possible for the 4 GB Global Spare Drive to join Logical Drive O because of its insufficient capacity However using a 9GB drive as the Global Spare drive for a failed drive that comes from Logical Drive 1 or 2 will bring huge amount of excess capacity since these logical drives require 4 GB only In the diagram below the 9 GB Local Spare Drive will aid Logical Drive 0 once a drivein this logical drive fails If the failed drive is in Logical Drive 1 or 2 the 4 GB Global Spare drive will immediately give aid to the failed drive 1 7 1 5 R W LED oO R W LED oO LED Steadily ON R W LED oO R W LED oO Identifying Drives Assuming there is a failed drive in the RAID 5 logical drive make it a point to replace the failed drive with a new healthy drive to keep the logical drive working If when trying to remove a failed drive you mistakenly remove the wrong drive you will no longer be able to access the logical drive because you have inadequately failed another drive To prevent this from happening the controller provides an easy way to identify the faulty drive By forcing certain drive LEDs
274. of the drive space will be automatically allocated to the last partition as diagrammed below Figure 5 1 Drive Space Allocated to the Last Partition Logical Drive Logical Drive 1000MB 1000MB pee E Ee p lt Be Partition 0 100MB J Partition 0 100MB_ The capacity of the deleted Pa partitions will be added to Partition 1 200MB the last partition a Delete Si Partition 2 300MB Partition 1 Partition 1 300MB ic Partition 3 400MB Partition 2 600MB 400 200 oa WARNING e Whenever there is a partition change data will be erased and all host LUN mappings will be removed Therefore every time the size of a partition has been changed it is necessary to re configure all host LU N mappings of the associated partitions Front Panel Operation 5 1 N Assigning a Name to a Logical Drive Press ENT for two seconds to enter the Main Menu Press Y or A to select View and Edit View and Edit Logical Drives then Logical Drives press ENT Press W or A to select a logical drive LGO RAID5 DRV 3 then press ENT 2012MB GD SB 1 Press Y or A to select Logical Drive Logical Drive Name then press ENT Name Press Y or A to change the character of the flashing cursor Press ENT to RSE oe move the cursor to the next space The maximum number of characters for a logical drive name is 25 Rebuilding a Logical Drive If you want the controller to aut
275. of this logical volume DRV x The number of member logical drive s in this logical volume Infortrend 4 5 SCSI Drive Status SCSI Channel SCSI ID Drive Capacity C 1 I 0 1010MB LN SEAGATE Logical Drive Drive Status Drive Vendor Number Drive Status LG xIN Initializing LG x LN On line already a member of a logical configuration LG xRB Rebuilding LG x SB Local Spare Drive GlobalSB Global Spare Drive NEW DRV New drive BAD DRV Failed drive ABSENT Drive does not exist MISSING Drive missing drive was once there SB MISS Spare drive missing LCD Screen Messages 4 4 4 6 SCSI Channel Status Channel Channel Number Mode SCSI ID CHO Host PID SID NA SXF 80 0M Secondary Controller Default Bus SCSI ID Mapping Sync Clock Channel M ode Host Host Channel mode Drive Drive Channel mode Default SCSI Bus Sync Clock 80 0M The default setting of this channel is 80 0M Hz in Synchronous mode Async The default setting of this SCSI channel isin Asynchronous mode Primary Controller SCSI ID Mapping Multiple SCSI ID s applied Host Channel mode only ID number Primary Controller is using this SCSI ID for host LUN mapping NA No SCSI ID applied Drive Channel mode only Secondary Controller SCSI ID M apping S Multiple SCSI ID s applied Host Channel mode only ID number Secondary Controller is using this SCSI ID for host LUN mapping NA No SCS ID applied Drive Cha
276. ommand to the SCSI bus When disabled it will not send a SCSI bus reset command on the next power up When connecting more than one host computer to the same SCSI bus the SCSI bus reset will interrupt all the read write requests that are being delivered This may cause some operating systems or host computers to act abnormally Disable the SCSI Reset at Power up to avoid this situation SCSI Motor Spin Up Disabled r Up abled Enable SCSI Reset at Power Up Yes No canas S sedona Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap C heck Time Disabled C Drive Predictable Failure Mode SMART Detect Only 8 Fibre Channel Dual Loop Enabled P view M P P Drive side Parameters Dis Array Parameters Redundant Controller Parameters Controller Parameters Choose SCSI Reset at Power U p then press ENTER Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting 9 19 Infortrend Power off all hard drives and controller and power them on again Hard drives will not spin up all at once The controller will spin up the hard drives one at a time at the interval of four seconds Disk Access Delay Time Sets the delay time before the controller tries to access the hard drives after power on Default is 15 seconds SCSI Motor Spin GE Disabled SEN Reset at Po Up Disabled No Delay n e 5 seconds Maximum Tag Co Ber Periodic Drive Check Ti 10 seconds 206 seconds
277. ompleted carefully identify and replace the faulty drive Event Messages D 21 General Target Events Alert SAF TE Device 2 LineLCD SAFTE_ Power _ Failure Detected Terminal 3F21 SAF TE Device _ ALERT Power Supply Failure Detected _ Event Type MAlert OWarning ON otification What Power supply failure detected by SAF TE enclosure management Happens What to Check the power supply module contact your RAID system supplier Do 2 LineLCD SAFTE_ Fan _ NotInstalled Terminal 3F22 SAF TE Device _ ALERT Cooling Fan Not Installed _ Event Type MAlert OWarning ON otification What The installed fan _ is missing Happens What to See if the fan has been removed or a general failure has occurred Do Contact your system supplier 2 LineLCD SAFTE_ Fan _ Failure Detected Terminal 3F22 SAF TE Device _ ALERT Cooling Fan Failure Detected _ Event Type MAlert OWarning ONotification What The cooling fan has failed Happens What to Contact your system supplier for further diagnosis Do 2 LineLCD SAF TE_ Elevated Temperature Alert Terminal 3F23 SAF TE Device _ ALERT Elevated Temperature Alert _ Event Type MAlert OWarning ON otification What High temperature detected Happens What to High temperature may lead to malfunctioning and system failure The Do most probable cause is the cooling system failure Contact your system provider immediately 2 LineLCD SAF TE_ UPS Power Failure Terminal 3F24 SAF TE Device _ AL
278. on change Assigning a Name to a Logical Drive Naming can help with identifying different arrays in a multi array configuration This function is also useful in special situations For Terminal Operation 7 17 example when one or more logical drives have been deleted the array indexing is changed after system reboot The second logical drive might become the first on the list Current Logical Drive Name New Logical Drive Name _ Choose the logical drive you wish to assign a name then press ENTER Choose logical drive name then press ENTER again The current name will be displayed You may now enter a new name in this field Enter a name then press ENTER to save the configuration Rebuilding a Logical Drive If there is no spare drive in the system a failed drive should be immediately replaced by a drive known to be good Once the failed driveis replaced the rebuild process can be manually initiated If you want the controller to auto detect a replacement drive make sure you have the following items set to enabled 1 Periodic Drive Check Time 2 Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time These two configuration options can be found under View and Edit Configuration Parameters gt Drive Side SCSI Parameters ives Delete logical drive Partition logical drive logical drive Name R i i drive c Rebuild Logical Drive
279. oncerns Availability Concern For safety reason it is better to create a reserved space on more than one logical drive Whatever data is put into the reserved space firmware will automatically duplicate and distribute it to the reserved section on every data drive Even if one hard drive or one logical drive fails an exact replica still resides on other drives Web Based M anagement The controller firmware has embedded http server Once properly configured the controller subsystem s Ethernet port behaves like an HTTP server Requirements 1 Controller subsystem running Firmware revision 3 21 and above 3 25 onwards has embedded NPC Notification Processing Center support 2 Management Station Pentium or above compatible or equivalent PC running Windows NT 4 Windows 2000 Solaris 7 amp 8 SPARC x86 AIX 4 3 or Red Hat Linux 6 1 kernel v2 2 xx Red Hat 7 8 SUSE 7 WIN95 98 or Windows Me XP 3 Standard Web Browser 4 A management station computer accessing RAIDWatch manager must support TCP IP Java Runtime a package is bundled with RAIDWatch installer or it can be downloaded from SUN Microsystems web site 5 A static IP address 3 2 1 Connecting Ethernet Port Use a LAN cable to connect the Ethernet port s on the subsystem s RAID controller unit s Use only shielded cable to avoid radiated emissions that may cause interruptions Connect the cable between controller s LAN port and a LAN
280. onitoring and Safety Mechanisms Dynamic Switch Write Policy ache Status ean Write Cache Enable Main Menu Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns BBU Low or Failed Disabled UPS AC Power Loss Disabled Power Supply Wee A Disabled Fan Failure Dis Temperature Exceeds Threshold Disabled Select View and edit Configuration parameters on the main menu and press ENTER Choose Caching Parameters then press ENTER again The Caching Parameters menu displays To reduce the chance of data loss Write back caching can be disabled by the controller upon the following conditions Controller failure BBU low or Failed UPS AC Power Loss Power supply Failure Fan Failure Temperature Exceeds Threshold AU BWNE Note the thresholds on temperature refer to those set for RAID controller board temperature View Peripheral Device Status Select View and edit Peripheral Devices on the main menu and press ENTER Choose View Peripheral Device Status then press ENTER again Thedevicelist displays Below is a list of peripheral devices enclosure modules monitored by the RAID controller unit Monitoring of device status depends on enclosure implementation and is accessed through different interfaces e g SAF TE S E S or 12C bus 1 Device Type 2 Enclosure Descriptor 9 25 Infortrend 3 Power Supply 4 Cooling Ele
281. onnected Drives u 4 Creating a Logical Drive ccsscccssesssseeeeseeeeeeneeessaeeeseeeenseeeseeesesseeseseeeeesees 5 Choosing a RAID Level 6 Choosing Member Drives 6 Logical Drive Preferences erii einan Eaa AS EAEE AEA 6 Maximum Drive Capacity n n nanas 6 ASSIgN Spare EE 7 Disk Reserved Gpace n u aasawa sayas asas i 7 Logical Drive ASSIQGNMONtS UU rE aE AEA AE EGEA EEEREN UTAKE EER 7 Waite POUC EEN 7 dutt IR e EE 8 El 8 Creating a Logical Volum e l u u u u 10 Partitioning a Logical Drive Logical Volume 11 Mapping a Logical Volume to Host LUN 13 Assigning Spare Drive Rebuild Settings 15 Adding Local Spare Drive 2 usa guna aaa cane eens 15 Adding a Global Spare Drive 16 Viewing and Editing Logical Drive and Drive Members 16 Deleting a Logical Drive u uu uuu 17 Deleting a Partition of a Logical Drive 17 Assigning a Name to a Logical Drive 17 Rebuilding a Logical Drive uu uu aauaiakusyasasasaasabssaspasyasayasyaqaakaqkaqaapus 18 Regenerating Logical Drive Party 19 Ee TER EE 19 Witte PONG TEE 20 Viewing and Editing Hos
282. ontroller running a different version of firmware can be combined to restore a redundant system with a failed controller Different firmware versions can be auto synchronized later Data Safety Regenerate Parity of logical drives Supported Can be performed every so often by user to ensure that bad sectors do not cause data loss in the event of drive failure Bad block auto reassignment Supported Automatic reassignment of bad block Battery backup for cache memory Supported The battery backup solutions provide long lasting battery support to the cache memory when power failure occurs The unwritten data in the cache memory can be committed to drive media when power is restored Verification on Normal Writes Supported Performs read after write during normal write processes to ensure data is properly written to drives Verification on Rebuild Writes Supported Performs read after write during rebuild write to ensure data is properly written to drives Firmware Functionality Specifications B 7 Verification on LD initialization writes Supported Performs read after write during logical drive initialization to ensure data is properly written to drives Drive S M A R T support Supported Drive failure is predictable with reference to the variables detected Reaction schemes are selectable from Detect only Perpetual Clone and Copy Replace These options help to
283. or Global Spare Drive 5c When a drive a logical drive member detects the predictable drive failure the controller will clone the drive with a spare drive After the clone process is finished it will replace the source drive immediately The source drive will be stated as a used drive If you want to see the progress of cloning press ESC to clear the notification message and see the status bar The source drive s status will be defined as an Used drive and will be immediately replaced and pulled off line This drive should be replaced with anew oneas soon as possible Advanced Configurations 9 10 9 2 Host side and Drive side SCSI Parameters Foreword SCSI Channel SCSI ID and LUN A SCSI channel SCSI bus can connect up to 15 devices not Figure 9 1 SCSI ID LUNs including the SCSI controller itself when the Wide SCSI ID LUN 0 LUN 1 LUN 2 function is enabled 16 bit SCSI It can connect up to 7 devices not including the controller itself when the Wide function is disabled 8 bit SCSI Each device has one unique SCSI ID Two devices owning the same SCSI ID is not allowed The figure on the left is a good example If you are to file document into a cabinet you must put the document into one of the drawers From a SCSI s point of view a SCSI ID is like a cabinet and the drawers are the LUNs Each SCSI ID can have up to 32 LUNs Log
284. or to the desired interval then press ENTER Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting The controller scans drive buses at this interval to check if a failed drive has been replaced If a failed drive is replaced the controller will proceed with the rebuild process SAF TE and S E S Enclosure Monitoring SCSI Motor Spin Up Disabled SCSI Reset at Power Up Disabled Disk Access Delay Time 60 seconds D bled SCSI I O Timeout 1 seconds ms Maximum Tag Count 32 100 ms Periodic Drive Check Time 10 seconds 200 ms Devi 500 ms 1 second d Dr Drive Predictable E Mode SMART ner set Only seconds ibre Channel Dual Loop Enabled 2 seconds seconds Drive side Parameters seconds Dis Array Parameters seconds Redundant Controller Parameters seconds Controller Parameters If there are remote devices in your RAID enclosure being monitored via SAF TE GES use this function to decide at what interval the controller will check the status of these devices Choose Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time then press ENTER Move the cursor to the desired interval then press ENTER Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting Periodic Drive Check Time The Periodic Drive Check Time is the time interval for the controller to check all disk drives that were on the SCSI bus at controller startup a list of all the drives that were detected can be seen under View and E
285. or two seconds to change the setting Disconnecting Support Press Y or A to select a SCSI target then press ENT Choose Disconnect Support then press ENT The current clock setting will be displayed on the LCD Press ENT for two seconds to change the setting Maximum Tag Count Press Y or A to select a SCSI target then press ENT Choose Max Tag Count then press ENT The current clock setting will be displayed on the LCD Press Y or A to change the setting then press ENT for two seconds to change the setting Front Panel Operation Max Xfer Narrow Only SCSI Target CHL 1 ID 0 I Parity Check Enabled Disable Parity Checking SCSI Target CHL 1 ID 0 Disconnect Support Enabled Disable Support Disconnect SCSI Target CHL 1 ID 0 Max Tag Count Default 32 Tag Cur 32 Set to Default N IMPORTANT Disabling the Maximum Tag Count will disable the internal cache of this SCSI drive Restore to Default Setting Press Y or A to select a SCSI target SCSI Target then press ENT CHL 1 ID 0 SS Restore to Choose Restore to Default Setting Default Setting then press ENT Press ENT again for two seconds to Restore to restore the SCSI target s default Default Setting settings 5 33 Infortrend 5 13 System Functions Choose System Functions in the main menu then press ENT Press W or A to select a submenu
286. ort LCD Disconnecting Support terminal disk access delay time Disk Array Parameters Advanced config Drive I O timeout Drive Identification Drive Motor Spin up Drive side redundant loop drive status drives viewing and editing Drive side Parameters Advanced config Dynamic enclosure on lining E Environment management Ethernet Event Logs terminal event logs viewing and editing LCD event message Expand Logical Drive Expand Logical Volume expansion in Windows NT Server F Fault Management Fault Prevention Fault Tolerance Fibre Channel Parameters Fibre Chip Fibre Connection Options Filter Type Include or Exclude 5 35 7 36 5 32 7 32 9 20 9 25 9 27 B 3 B 2 B 3 B 5 6 6 7 22 9 18 B 9 B 7 3 1 6 10 4 6 7 1 5 12 9 12 11 12 12 2 10 9 1 10 8 2 10 8 4 8 10 8 18 flash memory flashing all SCSI drives flashing selected SCSI drives Forcing Controller Failover for Testing format low level LCD format low level terminal G Gauge Range global spare drive global spare drive deleting Global Spare LCD Global Spare terminal H host application Host LUN Geometry Host side and Drive side SCSI Parameters Advanced Config Host side Maximum Queued I O count I I O timeout SCSI ID explained ID SCSI deleting Identifying a Drive LCD Identifying Drive terminal identifying drives idle drive failure detection Idle D
287. ost D x Host ID WHN Mask Get Filter Type Include Access Mode Read Write Name Not Set Access Mode Filter Type 11 4 View and Edit SCSI Drives Quic Slot Chl ID Size MB Speed LG_DRV Status Vendor and Product ID es mn en AARNA i 599 20B ON LINE 1 3 9999 20MB ON LINE x I esoe iere CL mae none use Dev fe Ec LG DRV Global Spare Local Spare 11 6 Infortrend 11 5 View and Edit SCSI Channels Mode PID SID DefSynC1k DefWid S Term CurSynC1k CurWid ene ell o 40 QMHz Wide L 40 0MHz Narrow 6 40 MHz Hide L do MHz Narrow Calach on 40 ome Primary Secondary Terminator Controller Controller i Diff Enable Disable Parity Check View channel host View device port name ID WWN list WWPN Record of Settings 11 7 11 6 View and Edit Configuration Parameters Cache Status Clean Main Menu Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Contiguration parameters aching Parameters Host side SCSI Parameters rive side arameters is rray Parameters Redundant Controller Parameters Controller Parameters Communication Parameters RS 232 Port Configuration COM 1 RS 232 Port Baud Rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Da
288. ove setting You may check the following options in your COM port configuration if you encounter problems 1 Comm Route Dir The communication route should be configured as direct to port instead of through PPP 2 Term Emul Enab Make sure the terminal function has not been accidentally disabled Infortrend 3 1 2 Starting RS 232C Terminal Emulation The keys used when operating via the terminal are as follows eT To select options Enter To go to asubmenu or to execute a selected option Esc To escape and go back to the previous menu Ctrl L The controller will refresh the screen information ache Status ean D 1 MB S e 16 20 op 40 S ep 7 B 100 F Mocle a raphic A erminal V N OO Mode PC Graphic ANSI Color Mode Shou Transfer Rate Show Cache Status IMPORTANT e IftheRS 232C cable is connected while the controller is powered on press Ctrl L to refresh the screen information The initial screen appears when the controller finishes self test and is properly initialized Use T J arrow keys to select terminal emulation mode then press EN TER to enter the Main Menu Cache Status Clean Main Menu Quick installation view edit Logical drives view edit logical Volumes view edit Host luns view edit scsi Drives view edit Scsi channels view edit Configuration parameters view and edit Peripheral devices system Functions view system Informatio
289. ower on controller 2 Set controller 2 to Secondary as described above Power off controller 2 Starting the Redundant Controllers Power on all hard drives and the two controllers If drives are installed in a drive enclosure wait for the drives to be ready then power on the enclosure where the RAID controllers are installed RC connecting lt ENT gt to cancel The message RC redundant controller connecting lt ENT gt to cancel will appear on the LCD display of the two controllers After a few seconds the Primary controller will startup with the model number and firmware version displayed on the LCD while the Secondary controller will display the message RC Standing By lt ENT gt to Cancel on its LCD A few seconds later the LCD display on the Secondary controller will be similar to the LCD display on the Primary controller The upper right corner of LCD will then be displaying a P or S meaning Primary or Secondary respectively During normal operation the controllers continuously monitor each other Each controller is always ready to take over for the other controller in an unlikely event of a controller failure The Primary and Secondary controllers synchronize each others configurations at frequent intervals through the communications channel s Creating Primary and Secondary ID Drive Channel Enter View and Edit SCSI Channels Press View and Edit ENT and use Y or A to
290. parating the transmitting and receiving paths but also provides path redundancy I O traffic will be continued should one data path fail Infortrend Controller firmware automatically examines the node names and port names of all the connected drives once initiated If devices on two different drive channels appear with the same loop ID and port name controller will consider these two drive channels as a dual loop lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes ccach The dual loop configuration will be displayed as channel lt pair channel gt For example channel numbers are displayed as 23 gt and 3 lt 2 gt if channel 2 and channel 3 are configured as a dual loop The data bus will be operating at the bandwidth of up to 200M B sec 1Gbit Fibre Controller Unique Identifier tache status Llean Main Menu Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit Configuration parameters review andvedit Peripheral devices View Peripheral Device Status eet Peripheral Device EOL D A dE NUES ontroller Disabled cC Controller Unique Identifier nter Set to Default sc Exit tri L Ref res creen A Controller Unique Identifier is required for operation with the Redundant Controller Configura
291. partitions RAID Planning 2 5 2 6 NOTE A Logical Drive is a set of drives grouped together to operate under a given RAID level and it appears as a single contiguous volume The controller is capable of grouping drives into as many as 128 logical drives configured in the same or different RAID levels A total of 32 Logical Volumes can be created each from one or several logical drives A logical drive or logical volume can be divided into a maximum of 64 Partitions 5 The next step is to make logical drives or storage partitions available through the host ports When associated with a host ID or LUN number each capacity volume appears as one system drive The host SCSI or Fibre adapter will recognize the system drives after the host bus is re initialized 6 The last step is to save your configuration profile in the host system drive or to the logical drives you created The controller is totally independent from host operating system Host operating system will not be able to tell whether the attached storage is a physical hard drive or the virtual system drives created by the RAID controller Infortrend 2 3 RAID Planning Operation Theory 2 3 1 UO Channel SCSI ID and LUN Depending on the interface used by a RAID system a SCSI drive channel SCSI bus can connect up to 15 drives excluding the RAID controller itself A Fibre channel 125 drives in aloop Each device occupies one unique ID Figure 2 3
292. password The password can not be replaced unless a correct old password is provided Key in the old password then press ENTER If the password is incorrect it will not allow you to change the password Instead it will display the message Password incorrect then go back to the previous menu If the password is correct or there is no preset password it will ask for the new password Setting a New Password lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels view and edit gonf igurat ion parameters view and edit SS eral devices v vil Mute beeper Echange Password s C Neu Password _ Enter the desired password in the column then press EN TER The next dialog box will display Re Enter Password Enter the password again to confirm and press EN TER 7 35 Infortrend The new password will now become the controller s password Providing the correct password is necessary when entering the main menu from the initial screen Disabling the Password To disable or delete the password press ENTER in the empty column that is used for entering a new password The existing password will be deleted No password checking will occur when entering the main menu or when making configuration change Reset Controller lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit
293. port from your local network Connecting Terminal 3 5 3 6 3 2 2 Configuring the Controller To prepare the controller for using the RAIDWatch manager do the following 1 Use a Terminal Emulator to Begin Configuration Connect the subsystem s serial port to a PC running a VT 100 terminal emulation program or a VT 100 compatible terminal Make sure the included Null Modem is already attached to enclosure serial port or the host computer s COM port The Null Modem converts the serial signals for connecting to a standard PC serial interface For more details please refer to the descriptions above in section 3 1 2 Create a Reserved Space on Drives ache Sta ean Write Zacher Enable LG ID LV RAID Size MB Status 1 2 3 0 C LN SB FL See Maximum Drive Capacity Spare Drives e GER Mode Stripe Size Berdor Create one or more logical drives and the reserved space option will be automatically available The default size is 256MB and it is recommended to keep it as is A reserved disk space will be formatted on every member drives If you delete a logical drive later the reserved space will remain intact Unless you manually remove the reserved space data kept in it will be unaffected These drives can later be used to create a new logical drive without making additional changes ac tatus an Cache Enable sc ch viu a e a E muc iimamamamanmumamamamamana RES 1 2 aes7 s
294. pping System Drives IDs 4 508 Sp I Hest S051 Channe l In i 0 ie Te 1558 7 Ceeupied by Heat Adapter Card Some operating systems do not read multiple LUNs under single ID As diagrammed above you may have the host channel to present several IDs and map logical configurations to these IDs Each of these IDs can be identified as Primary or Secondary Asa rule for most operation systems each configuration unit will be mapped to LUN 0 under each ID 10 1 4 Fault Tolerance What Is a Redundant Controller Configuration Hardware failures can occur A simple parity error may sometimes cause a RAID system to completely hang up Having two controllers working together will guarantee that at least one controller will survive the catastrophes and keep the system working This is the logic behind having the redundant controllers to minimize the best we could the chance of down time for a storage subsystem A redundant controller system uses two controllers to manage the storage arrays It requires two controllers to work together and both must be working normally During normal operation each controller serves its I O requests If one controller should fail the existing controller will temporarily take over for the failed controller until it is replaced The failover and failback processes should be totally transparent to host and require only minimum efforts to restore the original configuration Infortrend Ho
295. pter 9 Advanced Configurations This chapter aims to discuss the advanced options for configuring and maintaining a RAID system Each function will be given a brief explanation as well as a configuration sample Terminal screens will be used in the configuration samples Some of the operations require basic knowledge of RAID technology and the practice of them is only recommended for an experienced user 9 1 Fault Prevention S M A R T With the maturity of technologies like S M A R T drive failures can be predictable to a certain degree Before S M A R T being recurrently notified of drive bad block reassignments may be the most common omen for a drive about to fail In addition to the S M A R T related functions as will be discussed later in this section a system administrator can also choose to manually perform Clone Failing Drive to a drive which is about to fail System administrators can decide when to replace a drive showing symptoms of defects by a healthy drive A system administrator may also replace any drive at will even when the source drive is healthy The Clone Failing Drive can be performed under the following conditions 1 Replacing a failing drive either detected by S M A R T or notified by the controller 2 Manually replacing and cloning any drive with a new drive Advanced Configurations 9 1 9 1 1 Clone Failing Drive Unlike the similar functions combined with S M ART the Clone
296. r installing the drive back to its original drive slot and then power on the controller The logical drive will be restored to the one drive failed status Advanced Features Media Scan Supported Verify written data on drives to avoid bad blocks from causing data inconsistency Transparent reset of hung HDDs Supported Auto cache flush on critical conditions When critical conditions occur e g component failure or BBU under charge cached data will be flushed and the write policy will be changed to write through mode Drive Low level format Supported Drive Identification Supported Force the drive to light on the activity indicator for user to recognize the correct drive Drive Information Listing Supported Drive vendor name model number firmware revision capacity blocks serial number narrow wide and current sync speed Drive Read Write testing Supported Configuration on Disk Supported The logical drive information is recorded on drive media The logical drives can still be accessed if using different Infortrend RAID controllers subsystems Save Restore NVRAM to from Disks Supported Save all the settings stored in the controller NVRAM to the logical drive members Save Restore NVRAM to from a file Supported Save all the settings stored in the controller NVRAM to a file via GUI manager on user s computer B 2 Infortrend
297. r 11 provides the recording forms with which a system administrator can make a record of his configuration Chapter 12 shows how to expand a configured array or logical volume AppendixA outlines the menu structure of the LCD front panel operation Appendix B lists the important firmware features supported with the firmware version arranged in accordance with the latest firmware version as of press date Appendix C teaches the user how to upgrade firmware and boot record AppendixD_ lists all of the controller event messages Firmware Version amp Other Information Firmware version 3 31E and above Part number for this manual M 0000U 0G16 Date 6 25 03 Revision History Version 1 0 Version 1 1 Version 1 2 Version 1 3 initial release added redundant controller configuration Added hostside and driveside SCSI parameters added S M A R T with implemented Fault Prevention methods added system functions added Fault bus configuration to be compatible with 3101 and 3102 series added Host side interface installation details added Event Messages for error message identification added all advanced functions available since 2 23K and 3 11F upward added a functional table of content for quick searching functions moved SCSI Fibre Cable Specifications to Hardware Manual added Chapter 8 Fibre Operation for the new functions available since firmwar
298. r the settings to take effect e The Primary and Secondary controllers synchronize each others configurations at frequent intervals through the established communications path s Write back cache will be disabled if no sync cache path exists e Select View and Edit SCSI Channels from the Main Menu the communications path will be displayed as RCCOM Redundant Controller Communications lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes 9 40 MHz re nejma S seriele nal J 5 s malme ez seal nal T 10 28 Infortrend Creating Primary and Secondary ID Enter View and Edit SCSI Channels Press ENTER and select the host or drive channel on which you wish to create Primary Secondary ID Drive Channel e a os s channel Nee eeng Primary controller scsi id scsi Terminator Hide transfer Parity check Enabled view chip inFormation i feet fese PIO S10 BoP yk Det Wi orm Carey our fost z REI channel Mode 20 MHz channel Mode rn Hide S on Hide scsi Terminator jarrow t N sync transfer C Primar ontroller Wide transfer parity check_ KSE view chip inFor Primar ontroller econdary Controller KE w 7 oriveut5 na se sia FL nal L The configuration change will only take effect after controller reset Assigning Logical Drives to the Secondary Controller A logical drive can be assigned to the Primary or
299. r will examine the SCSI channel and ID of the failed drive Once the failed drive has been replaced by a healthy one it starts to rebuild using the new drive If there is no available drive for rebuilding the controller will not attempt to rebuild until the user applies another forced manual rebuild Functional Description 1 10 1 11 3 Concurrent Rebuild in RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 allows multiple drive failures and rebuild to be concurrently conducted on more than one of its members Drives newly swapped must be scanned and set as Local Spares These drives will be used for rebuild at the same time you do not need to repeat the rebuild process for each member drive Infortrend 1 7 Logical Volume Multi Level RAID What is a logical volume Figure 1 15 Logical Volume ps E Saas Logical s Drive See 1 2225 T Physical Drives SE Piece Seed Logical Logical Drive Volume Physical Drives A logical volume is a combination of RAID 0 Striping and other RAID levels Data written to a logical volume is first broken into smaller data segments and striped across different logical drives ina logical volume Each logical drive then distributes data segments to its member drives according to its mirroring parity or striping scheme A logical volume can be divided into a maximum of eight partitions During normal operation the host sees a non partitioned logical volume or a p
300. ration LUN Filtering Saving NVRAM to Disks LCD Saving NVRAM to 10 20 10 26 10 8 10 25 10 32 10 21 10 28 10 22 10 28 5 5 6 B 7 5 19 7 19 7 21 9 2 10 11 5 35 7 36 5 36 7 38 5 33 B 7 9 1 2 9 5 8 B 6 9 22 9 22 B 9 8 20 5 36 7 38 Infortrend Disks terminal Scanning New Drive terminal Scanning New Drive LCD SCSI channel ID deleting SCSI channel ID setting SCSI channel primary ID setting SCSI channel secondary ID setting SCSI channel terminator SCSI channel terminator SCSI channel explained SCSI Channel s Status terminal SCSI channels viewing and editing SCSI commands pass through SCSI Drive Information terminal SCSI Drive Low level Format LCD SCSI Drive Low level Format terminal SCSI Drive Read Write Test LCD SCSI Drive Read Write Test terminal SCSI Drive Status LCD SCSI Drive Utilities LCD SCSI Drive Utilities terminal SCSI Drive s Status terminal SCSI drives viewing and editing SCSI I O Timeout SCSI ID deleting SCSI Motor Spin Up SCSI Parameters SCSI Reset at Power Up SCSI target drive channel viewing and editing 5 22 7 23 5 23 5 27 5 26 5 27 5 28 6 7 7 25 7 21 7 42 5 40 7 43 5 41 7 44 5 40 7 42 6 6 7 22 9 20 7 27 9 18 2 10 9 19 5 30 SCSI target drive channel LCD Secondary Controller Secondary Controller ID secondary controller settin
301. rected to the Primary or the Secondary controller accordingly The total drive capacity can be divided and equally serviced by both controllers The activeto active configuration engages all system resources to performance Users may also assign all logical configurations to one controller and let the other act as a standby Active to Standby Configuration By assigning all the logical configurations of drives to one controller the other controller will stay idle and becomes active only when its counterpart fails Cache Synchronization The Write back caching significantly enhances controller performance However if one controller fails in the redundant controller configuration data cached in its memory will be lost and data inconsistency might occur when the existing controller attempts to complete the writes Data inconsistency can be avoided using one or several of the I O channels as the communications path between the controllers The cached data is always synchronized in each other s memory Each controller saves an exact replica of the cache content on its counterpart In the event of controller or power failure the unfinished writes will be completed by the existing controller Battery Support Unfinished writes will be cached in memory in write back mode If power to the system is discontinued data stored in the cache memory will be lost Battery modules can support cache memory for a period of several days allowing the con
302. redundant mode the counterpart controller will take over and you may ask your system provider to remove the controller with a failed channel for a repair Redundant Ctlr Failure Detected 0111 Controller ALERT Redundant Controller Failure Detected MAlert OWarning ON otification One of the RAID controllers has failed Contact your RAID system supplier for a replacement controller Redundant Ctir Failure Detected 0111 Controller NOTICE Redundant Controller Firmware Updated DAlert OWarning MIN otification RAID controllers have finished shifting I Os resetting and have come online with new version of firmware 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do Warning 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do Notification 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do D 8 Power Supply Unstable or NVRAM Failed 0114 Controller ALERT Power Supply Unstable or NVRAM Failed MAlert OWarning ONotification The output voltage drops below preset thresholds or NVRAM component failure Memory Not Sufficient to Fully Support Current Config 0107 Memory Not Sufficient to Fully Support Current Config DAlert MWarning ON otification The installed size of memory does not support current configuration Try increase memory size Controller Ini
303. rive then choose flash all drives to flash the read write LEDs of all the drives in the drive channel Choose Yes Slot Chl ID Size MB Speed LG_DRV Status Vendor and Product ID L UO 9999 _40MB Ol ON LINE TBM DDR 4560p ien drive information ON LINE IEN DDRS 3456 D Set siot Number al ON LINE IBM DDRS 34560D al ant EM LA _mpps_sascapn dr DRS 34560D DRS 34560D el add drive Entry Ch clone Failing Leg Ee Flash Drive Time Second 15 C flash 2 flash ES _ P z Flash All But Channel 2 ID 1 SCSI Drive 7 2 Lies No 2 8 9999 40MB NONE NEW Drv T DUK2 S4000U You may also choose flash selected drive or flash all But Selected drives to flash the read write LED of the selected drive only or all the drives except the selected drive Choose Yes and choose an extent of time from 1 to 999 seconds Deleting Spare Drive Global Local Spare Drive 7 23 Infortrend Move the cursor to a Local Spare Drive or Global Spare Drive then press ENTER Choose Delete Global Local Spare Drive then press ENTER again Choose Yes to confirm Slot Chl ID Size MB Speed LG_DRV Status Vendor and Product ID 2 9999 40MB ON LINE IBM DDRS 34568D 9999 40MB ON LINE UM DDRS 34568D 9999 40MB ON LINE IBM DDRS 34560D z anun aln INE IBM DDRS 3456 D
304. rive 5 14 7 15 Adding Global Spare Drive 5 15 7 16 Logical Drive Rebuild Settings 5 15 5 9 7 9 Viewing and Editing Logical Drives and Drive 5 16 7 16 Members Deleting a Logical Drive 5 16 7 17 Deleting a Partition of a Logical Drive 5 17 7 17 Assigning a Logical Drive Name 5 18 7 17 Rebuilding a Logical Drive 5 18 7 18 Regenerating Logical Drive Parity 5 19 7 19 Media Scan 5 20 19 Write Policy 5 21 20 5 10 7 10 Viewing and Editing Host LUNs 5 22 7 21 Viewing and Deleting LUN Mappings 5 22 7 21 Pass through SCSI Commands 5 22 7 21 5 11 7 11 Viewing and Editing SCSI Drives 5 23 7 22 Scanning a New SCSI Drive 5 23 7 23 Identifying a Drive 5 24 7 23 Deleting Spare Drive Global Local Spare Drive 5 25 7 24 5 12 7 12 Viewing and Editing SCSI Channels 5 25 7 25 Viewing and Re defining Channel Mode 5 25 7 25 Setting Channel ID Host Channel 5 26 7 26 Viewing channel ID 5 26 7 26 Adding a Channel ID 5 26 7 26 Deleting a Channel ID 5 27 7 27 Setting a Channel Primary ID Drive Channel 5 27 7 27 Setting a Channel s Secondary ID Drive Channel 5 28 7 28 Setting a SCSI Channel s Terminator 5 28 7 28 Setting the Transfer Speed 5 29 7 28 Setting the Transfer Width 5 30 7 29 Viewing and Editing a SCSI Target Drive Channel 5 30 7 30 Slot Number 5 31 7 30 Maximum Synchronous Transfer Clock 5 31 7 31 Maximum Transfer Width 5 31 7 31 Parity Check 5 32 7 31 Disconnecting Support 5 32 7 32 Maximum Tag Count 5 32 7
305. rive Failure Detection Implementation to S M A R T In band Fibre In band SCSI Initial Screen LCD Initial Screen terminal JBOD 10 34 5 40 7 43 6 1 1 6 7 24 5 15 7 16 2 2 2 10 9 11 B 3 9 20 9 11 7 27 5 24 7 23 1 8 5 24 7 23 9 23 9 23 9 6 8 5 9 14 4 1 6 1 1 3 Index 3 LUN explained 2 7 9 11 LUNs per Host SCSI ID L LCD Title Display 5 37 M Controller Name LCD LCD Title Display 7 37 Main Menu terminal 6 2 Controller Name management drive 1 6 terminal failure local spare drive 7 24 manual rebuild 1 10 deleting Mapping in redundant 10 24 Local Spare LCD 5 14 config LCD Local Spare terminal 7 15 Mapping a Logical 7 13 Logical Drive 7 7 Volume to Host LUN Assignments terminal terminal Logical drive B 1 Mapping a Logical 5 13 identification Volume Logical Drive Logical Drive 5 6 to Host LUN LCD Preferences LCD Mapping System 10 7 8 Logical Drive 7 6 Drives Redundant Preferences terminal config logical drive status 4 2 Maximum concurrent B 3 LCD Host LUN connection logical drive status 6 4 Maximum Drive 5 7 terminal Capacity LCD logical drive assigning 5 18 Maximum Drive 7 6 a name Capacity terminal logical drive deleting 7 17 Maximum number of B 1 logical drive explained 1 1 logical drives logical drive assigning 7 18 Maximum number of Di a name logical volumes logical drive viewing 7 16 Maximum number of B 1 drive members LUNs Logical Unit to Host 8 16 Ma
306. rive Parity If no verifying method is applied to data writes this function can be manually performed to ensure that parity errors can be mended From the Main Menu press Y or A to select View and Edit Logical Drives If you have more than one logical drive use the W or A to select the logical drive you would like to check the parity for and then press ENT Press Y or A to select Regenerate Parity and then press ENT To stop the regeneration process press ESC and enter the submenu to select Abort Regenerate Parity IMPORTANT View and Edit Logical Drives LGQ RAID5 DRV 3 4095MB GD SB 0 Regenerate Parity Abort Regenerate Parity e If Parity Regenerating process is stopped by a drive failure the process cannot restart until the logical drive is rebuilt 5 19 Infortrend Media Scan Media Scan is used to examine drives and is able to detect the presence of bad blocks If any data blocks have not been properly committed data from those blocks are automatically recalculated retrieved and stored onto undamaged sectors If bad blocks are encountered on yet another drive during the rebuild process the block LBA Logical Block Address of those bad blocks will be shown If rebuild is carried out under this situation rebuild will continue with he unaffected sectors salvaging a majority of the stored data From the Main Menu press Y or to View and Edit select View and Edit Logical
307. rives logical volumes and assign each logical unit to the Primary or to the Secondary controller Proceed with Host LUN mapping After mapping each logical unit to a Primary or Secondary ID LUN on the host channel s the redundant controller configuration is complete Redundant Controller 10 19 10 20 10 3 1 Via Front Panel Keypad Redundant Configuration Using Automatic Setting Power on Controller 1 Make sure Controller 2 is powered off 1 Enable Redundant Controller Press ENT for two seconds on the front pane of controller 1 to enter the main menu Use Y or A to navigate through the menus Choose View and Edit Peripheral Dev View and Edit Peripheral Devices then press ENT Choose Set Peripheral Devices Entry then press ENT Choose Redundant Ctlr Function _ and then press ENT Note The current setting will be displayed on the LCD If this controller has never been set as a redundant controller before the default setting of the redundant controller function is Disabled The message Redundant Ctlr Function Disable will be displayed on the LCD Press ENT to proceed Autoconfig The message Enable Redundant Ctlr Autocfg will appear Use Y or A to scroll through the available options Primary Secondary or Autocfg then press ENT for two seconds to select A utocfg For the other controller is currently not connected status will be indicated as Inactive Once
308. rminator then press ENT Front Panel Operation 5 2 CO Its current status will be displayed on SCSI Terminator the LCD Press ENT to continue Enabled ge Press ENT again for two seconds to CHL 0 Disable change the terminator mode to the Terminator alternate setting IMPORTANT e You can use terminator jumpers on the controller board to control SCSI bus termination of the SentinelRAID series controllers When using jumpers to control firmware termination setting must be disabled To disable SCSI termination of a SCSI bus the associated terminator jumpers must be left open and firmware setting must be disabled Setting Transfer Speed Transfer speed refers to the SCSI bus speed in synchronous mode Asynchronous mode is also available in this option setting In Ultra Ultra Wide SCSI the maximum synchronous speed is 20 8M hz Press ENT for two seconds to enter the ere oT Main Menu Press Y or A to select SCSI Channels View and Edit SCSI Channels then press ENT Channd information will be displayed CHO Host PID 0 Press Y or A to select a channel Press SID NA SXF 80 0M ENT on the channel you wish the transfer speed changed Press Y or A to select Set Transfer Set Transfer Speed then press ENT Speed The current speed of this SCSI channel will be displayed Press Y or A to select the desired speed then press ENT for two seconds to confirm CHL 0 Clk 80 0M Change to 40 0M IMPORTANT e Every
309. rmware Upgrading Firmware Using RS 232C Terminal Emulation The firmware can be downloaded to the RAID controller by using an ANSI VT 100 compatible terminal emulation program Whichever terminal emulation program is used must support the ZMODEM file transfer protocol The following example uses the HyperTerminal in Windows NT Other terminal emulation programs eg Telix and PROCOMM Plus can perform the firmware upgrade as well Infortrend Establishing the connection for the RS 232C Terminal Emulation Please refer to chapter 4 Connecting to Terminal Emulation and also your hardware manual for details on establishing the connection Upgrading Both Boot Record and Firmware Binaries Me Cache Status Clea lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view edit acsi channels view edit nfiguration parameters view and edit GE devices m Download Boot Record with Firmware Lves No le Download Boot Record with Firmware Ad vanced Maintanence Functions 1 From the Main Menu scroll down to system Functions 2 Goto Controller Maintenance 3 Choose Advanced M aintenance 4 Select Download Boot Record and Firmware 5 Set ZMODEM as the file transfer protocol of your terminal emulation software 6 Send the Boot Record Binary to the controller In HyperTerminal go to the Transfer menu and
310. s Primary or Secondary IDs 10 6 Infortrend Redundant Controller Drive Channel Since all channels are strung between two controllers each channel is connected to two chip processors and each processor must occupy one channel ID In redundant mode both a Primary and a Secondary ID must be present on drive channels The Primary Secondary relationship between the controllers is automatically determined by firmware You may have to create Primary and Secondary IDs separately on the host and drive channels if these IDs are not available The configuration procedure will be discussed in section 10 3 Mapping A logical unit made available through a Primary ID will be managed by the Primary controller and that through a Secondary ID by the Secondary controller Each channel ID or an LUN under ID will act as one virtual storage volume to the host computer Figure 10 5 Mapping System Drives Mapping LUNs Host Primary 1D wii Hai channel Go Secondary ID Bic Hest channel 2 HBA BGE The diagram above displays a single host computer with two HBA cards allowing the connection of dual I O paths A host port ID is presented on each host port as the Primary ID or Secondary ID Users may then map any logical configuration of drives to these LUN numbers The result is that workload can be 10 7 10 8 distributed across two host ports and managed by both controllers Figure 10 6 Ma
311. s Controller Parameters When power supply is unable to provide sufficient current to start all the hard drives and controllers at once spinning up hard drives in a sequence is one of the best ways to solve the problem of low power up current By default all hard drives will start spinning up when powered on These hard drives can be configured so that drives will not spin up at the same time when the enclosure is powered on There are 3 methods for spinning up the hard drive s motor Spin up at power on Spin up serially at random sequence or Spin up by SCSI command Please refer to the hard drive s documentation for instructions on configuring the hard drive using the Spin up by SCSI Command The procedure for each brand model of hard drive may vary Configure all hard drives usually by switching jumpers on hard disks Choose SCSI Motor Spin Up then press ENTER Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting Advanced Configurations 9 18 IMPORTANT If the drives are configured as D elay M otor Spin up or M otor Spin up in Random Sequence some of these drives may not be ready at the moment when the controller accesses them when powered up Increase the disk access delay time so that the controller will wait a longer time for the drives to be ready SCSI Reset at Power Up By default when the controller is powered up it will send a SCSI bus reset c
312. s ENT for two seconds to change the size of the first partition Use W or A to change the number of the flashing digit see the arrow mark then press ENT to move to the next digit After changing all the digits press ENT for two seconds to confirm the capacity of this partition You may also use arrow keys to move down to the next partition The rest of the drive space will be automatically allocated as the last partition You may go on to create up to 32 partitions using the same method as described above Press ESC for several times to go back to the main menu Partition Logical Volume LV 0 Part 0 2021MB LV 0 Part 0 2021MB LV 0 Part 0 700MB LV 0 Partition 1 1321MB Infortrend 5 7 Mapping a Logical Volume Logical Drive to Host LUN The process of mapping a logical drive is identical to that of mapping a logical volume The process of mapping a logical volume is used as an example Press ENT for two seconds to enter the View and Edit Main Menu Press Y or A to select Host Luns View and Edit Host Luns then press ENT Note some details before proceeding L A logical group of drives logical drive logical volume previously assigned to the primary controller can not be mapped to a secondary ID Neither can those assigned to the secondary controller be mapped to a primary ID 2 For a SCSl based controller ID 7 is reserved for the controller itself If there are
313. s striped distributed across several physical drives RAID 1 Disk Mirroring Figure 1 5 RAID 1 RADI SEH Physical Disks erred pee Sech Baa RAID 1 mirrors the data stored in one Keess hard drive to another RAID 1 can only Block 6 A be performed with two hard drives If ee there are more than two hard drives os RAID O41 will be performed automatically RAID 0 1 Disk Striping with Mirroring Figure 1 6 RAID 0 1 Ve Minimum 4 Logical Drive lt _ lt siping SD Disks required C Baki peo Capacit Block 3 oc loc Li AT EE RAID 041 combines RAID Oand RAID 1 z eed TY a I EE L Block 5 _ ie s Mirroring and Striping RAID 0 1 allows x L Mirror 1 MA Mior2 d multiple drive failure because of the full sassa Mirra j Miror4 d redundancy of the hard drives If there are i Miror5 WE h hard dri igned t j more more than two har rives assign O X gan ee peform RAID 1 RAID 0 1 will be i automatically applied 1 4 Infortrend IMPORTANT e RAID 0 1 will not appear in thelist of RAID levels supported by the controller If you wish to perform RAID 1 the controller will determine whether to perform RAID 1 or RAID 0 1 This will depend on the number of drives that has been selected for the logical drive RAID 3 Disk Striping with Dedicated Parity Disk Figure 1 7 RAID 3
314. select View and Edit SCSI Target then press ENT Press W or A to select a SCSI target then press ENT Slot Number To set the Slot number of the SCSI target choose Slot Assignment then press ENT The current slot number will be displayed Press W or A to change the slot number then press ENT for two seconds SCSI Target CHL 1 ID 0 Slot Assignment Default No Set Slot Assignment Set to 9 Maximum Synchronous Transfer Clock Press Y or A to select a SCSI target then press ENT To set the maximum synchronous clock of this SCSI target choose M ax Synchronous Xfer Clock then press ENT The current clock setting will be displayed on the LCD Press Y or A to change the clock then press ENT for two seconds Maximum Transfer Width Press W or A to select a SCSI target then press ENT To set the maximum transfer width of this SCSI target choose Max Xfer Narrow Only or Max Xfer Wide Supported then press ENT The SCSI Target CHL 1 ID 0 Max Synchronous Xfer Clock 12 Period Factor Def 12 to 3 SCSI Target CHL 1 ID 0 Max Xfer Wide Supported 5 31 Infortrend current clock setting will be displayed on the LCD Press ENT for two seconds to change the setting Parity Check Press Y or A to select a SCSI target then press ENT Choose Parity Check then press ENT The current clock setting will be displayed on the LCD Press ENT f
315. ser configurable Filter entry and Filter type access control up to 128 Filter entries can be appended to Host ID LUN combinations Host channel HBA WWN browsing a list of WWNs from detected HBAs on the host channel will be provided for user s convenience when masking LUN Filtering Bit masking Based on the user provided WWN of the host HBA user can enter the WWN manually from a list browsed or that provided by the controller Users can also assign a bit masking to group a certain group of WWNs to be included in the LUN Filtering Read Write Privilege Users can choose the following privilege for each LUN Filtering Read Write Read Only and No Access WWN table stored in NVRAM Each WWN number can be assigned with a nick name for ease of identification Sync cache channel over Fibre loops Supported no extra cabling between two controllers communications data can be distributed to one or two dedicated channels or over all drive loops Firmware Functionality Specifications B 5 S M A R T Support Copy amp Replace Drive Supported User can choose to clone a member drive before drive failure Drive S M A R T Support Supported with intelligent error handling implementations User selectable modes for S M A R T 1 Detect only 2 Perpetual Clone on detection of S M A R T condition 3 Clone Replace Redundant Controller B 6 Active active redun
316. set press ESC for several times to return to the main menu 2 Controller Unique ID Enter View and Edit Config Parms gt Controller Parameters Use Y or A to find Ctlr Unique ID xxxxx This value will be used to generate a controller unique WWN node name and port names and to identify the controller during the failover process Enter a hex number from 0 to FFFFF and press ENTER The value you enter should be different for each controller View and I Edit Peripheral Dev Set Peripheral Devices Entry Redundant Ctlr Function Disable Enable Redundant Ctlr Autocfg Redundant Ctlr Autocfg Inactive View and Edit Config Parms Controller Parameters Ctlr Unique ID 00012 Infortrend Power off controller 1 and then power on controller 2 Set controller 2 to Autocfg as described previously Power off controller 2 When the redundant controller function is set to the Autocfg setting the controllers will decide between themselves which will be the Primary controller If you need to specify a particular controller as Primary or Secondary do not set it as autocfg choose Primary or Secondary instead Please refer to the following section for more detail Redundant Configuration Using Manual Setting Power on controller 1 Make sure controller 2 is powered off 1 Enable Redundant Controller Press ENT for two seconds on the front pane of con
317. splayed Use the T J keys to select a RAID level then press EN TER The assigned spare drive will be a Local Spare Drive not a Global Spare Drive Infortrend The controller will start initialization and automatically map the logical drive to LUN Oof the first host channel Terminal Screen Messages 6 3 6 4 Logical Drive Status LG LV ID RAID SIZE MB RAID Size M B Status 1 GOOD Logical Drive number PO Logical Drive 0 managed by the Primary Controller S0 Logical Drive 0 managed by the Secondary Controller The Logical volume to which this logical drive belongs Controller generated unique ID RAID level Capacity of the Logical Drive RAID Level Capacity of the Logical Drive Logical Drive Status Column 1 The logical driveis in good condition DRV FAILED A drive member failed in the logical drive CREATING Logical driveis being initiated DRV ABSENT Oneof its member drives cannot be detected INCOMPLETE Two or more drives failed in the logical drive Status 2 Status 3 R P Column O N A u P W N Logical Drive Status Column 2 Initializing drives Adding drive s Expanding logical drive Logical Drive Status Column 3 Rebuilding the logical drive Regenerating array parity Logical Drive Status Stripe size Default 4KB 6 64KB 8KB 7 128KB 16KB 8 256KB 32KB Infortrend Column C B T LN FL Name Logical Drive Status Write Policy setting Write back Write through Total
318. ss ENT for two seconds to enter the Main Menu Press W or A to select View and Edit SCSI Drives then press ENT SCSI drive information will be displayed on the LCD Press Y or A to select a drive that is stated as NEW DRV or USED DRV that has not been assigned to any logical drive as spare drive or failed drive then press ENT to select it Press W or A to select Add Local Spare Drive then press ENT Press Y or A to select the logical drive where the Local Spare Drive will be assigned then press ENT for two seconds to confirm The message Add Local Spare Drive Successful will be displayed on the LCD View and Edit SCSI Drives Add Local Spare Drive LGOQ RAID5 DRV 3 2012MB GD SB 0 Add Local Spare Drive Successful Infortrend Adding a Global Spare Drive Press ENT for two seconds to enter the View and Edit Main Menu Press W or A to select SCSI Drives View and Edit SCSI Drives then press ENT SCSI drive information will be displayed on the LCD Press Y or A to select a SCSI drive that has not been assigned to any logical drive yet then press ENT Add Global Spare Drive gc Press Y or A to select Add Global Spare Drive then press ENT add the spare drive The message EE Add Global Spare Drive Successful will be displayed on the LCD Press ENT again for two seconds to E Rebuild Settings Press ENT for tw
319. st RECEIVER The IP address of the receiver computer Add additional lines to specify multiple receivers Up to 4 receivers can be configured Infortrend Chapter LCD Screen Messages 4 1 The Initial Screen Product Model Firmware Version SR2500 Voy Ready Status Data Transfer Indicator Status D ata Transfer Indicator Ready There is at least one logical drive or logical volume mapped to a host ID LUN No Host No logical drive created or the logical drive has not LUN yet been mapped to any host ID LUN WRRRRRRRDDRR ndicates data transfer Each block indicates 256K bytes of data throughput 4 2 Quick Installation Screen Quick Logical Drive Install Press ENT to create a logical drive the controller will start initialization of one logical drive with all the connected SCSI drives and automatically map the logical drive to LUN 0 of the first host channel The Quick Installation can only be performed when there is no Logical Drive LCD Screen Messages 4 1 4 3 Logical Drive Status Logical Drive RAID level Number of drives f ra LGO RAID5 DRV 3 2021MB GD SB 1 Loaical Drive status Logical D rive The Logical Drive number RAID level The RAID level used in this logical drive Drive numbers The number of physical drives included in this configuration Logical D rive status XxxxM B The capacity of this logical drive SB x Stand
320. sync transfer Clock Wide transfer View and edit scsi target ace Secondary Controller SCSI ID parity check _ Ena Yes No view chip inFormation ID 12 NAT 40 MHz Hide E A ID 13 ID 14 NA 40 MHz Wide L Asyne Nar D 15 Choose a Drive channel then press ENTER Choose Secondary Controller SCSI ID A list of channel IDs displays Assign an ID to the chip processor of the secondary controller s drive channel Choose an ID The dialog box Change Secondary Controller SCSI ID will appear Select Yes then press ENTER Setting Channel Terminator lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns channel Mode Primary controller sesi id Secondary controller scsi id efWid Term CurSynC1lk CurWid E CE Disable Channel Terminator Choose the channel you wish the terminator enabled or disabled then press ENTER Choose SCSI Terminator then press ENTER A dialog box will appear Choose Yes then press ENTER Terminator can also be enabled by switch jumpers please refer to the controller hardware manual for more details Setting a Transfer Speed Drive Channel Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives channel Mode view and edit scsi Id scsi Terminator sync transfer oc Wide transfer Parity check Enabled view chip inFormation
321. t Alert 0104 Controller ALERT DRAM Parity Error Detected 0105 Controller lt primary secondary gt SDRAM ECC lt multi bits single bit gt Error Detected 0110 CHL _ FATAL ERROR _ 0111 Controller ALERT Redundant Controller Failure Detected 0111 Controller NOTICE Redundant Controller Firmware Updated 0114 Controller ALERT Power Supply Unstable or NVRAM Failed Warning 0107 Memory Not Sufficient to Fully Support Current Config Event Messages D 1 Notification 0181 Controller Initialization Completed 0187 Memory is Now Sufficient to Fully Support Current Config 0189 NVRAM Factory Defaults Restored 0189 NVRAM Restore from Disk is Completed 0189 NVRAM Restore from File is Completed Drive SCSI Channel Drive Error Drive Warning 1101 CHL _ ID SCSI Target ALERT Unexpected Select Timeout 1102 CHL _ ID SCSI Target ALERT Gross Phase Signal Error Detected 1103 CHL ID SCSI Target ALERT Unexpected Disconnect Encountered 1104 CHL ID SCSI Drive ALERT Negotiation Error Detected 1105 CHL ID SCSI Target ALERT Timeout Waiting for I O to Complete 1106 CHL _ ID SCSI Target ALERT SCSI Parity CRC Error Detected 1107 CHL _1ID _ SCS Drive ALERT Data Overrun Underrun Detected 1108 CHL ID SCSI Target ALERT Invalid Status Sense Data Received _ 110f CHL LIP __ Detected 110f CHL SCSI Drive Channel Notification SCSI Bus Reset Issued 110f CHL _ SCSI Drive Channel ALERT
322. t Controller Parameters gt Controller Unique D Controller Communications over Fibre Loops SI DeFSynCik Dema S Tern SorSvaCik Carta e nz wal ew serrar wal LI 1 bet wa ita 1 se besi nal 1 Ge Serial Drive 119 118 1 GHz Serial F NA F s Ge Serial lw TI lt lt umu lt lt lt lt lt lt lt E channel Mode erial P er scsi id S Host ller scsi id Jerial v Drive ation RCCOM Drive RCCOM Controllers running firmware version 3 14 and above supports controller communications over Fibre loops There are two options with the controller communications over Fibre loops Hardware configuration should be completed before firmware setting 1 Select from the main menu View and Edit SCSI channels and configure the selected FC channels into RCCOM Redundant Controller Communication mode To ensure the connection with data path redundancy you may use two channels as the dedicated RCC loops The dedicated channels should not be attached with any other device 8 12 Infortrend Fibre Operation 2 Communications Traffic Distributed over All Drive Loops Select all drive loops and configure them as Drive RCCOM Drive Loops plus Redundant Controller Communications The communications traffic between the two controllers will be automatically distributed over Def SynC1lk DefWid S all drive loops Term CurSynC1k CurHid o Host 112 NA 1 GHz Serial F NA 1 GHz
323. t LUNs 21 Viewing or Deleting LUN Mapping 21 Edit Host ID WWN Name et 21 Pass through SCSI Commande 21 Viewing and Editing SCSI Drives 22 Scanning New Drive 23 SHOP INU O eenegen ee eebe eebe deeg 23 Drive UE 23 Identifying NEIE 23 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 Deleting Spare Drive Global Local Spare Drive 24 Viewing and Editing SCSI Channels u u 25 Redefining Channel Mode 25 Viewing and Editing SCSI IDs Host Channel 26 Viewing and Editing SCSI IDS 26 Adding a SCSI ID Primary Secondary Controller ID 26 Ris RI EE 27 Setting a Primary Controllers SCSI ID Drive Channel 27 Setting a Secondary Controller s SCSI ID Drive Channel 28 Setting Channel Terminator a 28 Setting a Transfer Gpeed a a a 28 Drive Channel sas E i ha u a Ae ee 28 Setting the Transfer Wich 29 Viewing and Editing SCSI Target Drive Channel 30 SIOL NUMDOT orap serens a Ee abya Egeter Eege kaypa eh 20 Maximum Synchronous Transfer Clock a a 31 Maximum Transfer Wd 31
324. t of memory and the same version of firmware installed However it is inevitable a replacement controller is usually running later revisions of firmware To solve this problem Firmware Synchronization is supported since firmware version 3 21 When the replacement controller is combined the existing controller will downgrade the reolacement s firmware so that both controllers will be running the same version of firmware Your system vendor should be able to provide an appropriate replacement controller Auto Failback Once the failed controller is removed and a replacement controller is installed the existing controller will acknowledge the situation The existing controller will automatically combine with the replacement controller When the initialization process of the replacement controller is completed the replacement controller will always inherit the status of the Secondary controller The replacement controller will obtain all related configuration parameters from the existing controller If the existing controller fails to re establish this connection you can also choose to de assert the replacement controller through the existing controller so that both will serve the original system drive mapping C Active to Active Configuration Active to active configuration conducts all system resources to performance Storage volumes can be equally assigned to both controllers and thus both are activdy serving I Os This allows a
325. ta Routing Direct to Port Through Network Terminal Emulation Enabled Disabled COM 2 Redundant Controller Port Baud Rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Data Routing Direct to Port Through Network Terminal Emulation Enabled Disabled Ethernet Configuration IP address Ee PPP Configuration PPP Access Name PPP Access Password Modem Operation Modem Setup Configure Modem Port Modem Port Not Configured COM1 COM2 Modem Operation None Default Used Mode Replace Default Append to Default Modem Initialization AT Custom Init Command Auto Dial out n Enabled Disabled Initialization Dial out Timeout _ _ _ Seconds 11 8 Infortrend Dial out Retry Count Retry times Dial Retry Interval e Dial out on Event Disabled Critical Events Onl Condition y Critical Events and Warnings All Events Warnings and Notifications Caching Parameters Write back Cache Enabled Disabled E ee Host Side SCSI Parameters Count ID Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN connection Peripheral Device Peripheral Device Type Type Parameters Device Qualifier Removable media LUN applicability Host Cylinder Cylinder Head Sector Head Mapping configuration Sector Options Drive Side SCSI Parameters SCSI Motor Spin up Enabled Disabled SCSI Reset at Power Enabled Disabled Up Disk Access Delay No Delay _ Seconds Time SCSI I O Timeout Default Maximum Tag Count Disabled P
326. te function Press ENT to nabled Wa enable or disable Write Back Cache Press ENT for two seconds to confirm The current status will be displayed on the LCD The Write through mode is safer if your controller is not configured in a redundant pair and thereis no battery backup Disable Write Back Cache 2 Write back caching can dramatically improve write performance by caching the unfinished writes in memory and let them be committed to drives in a more efficient manner In the event of power failure a battery module can hold cached data for days In the event of controller failure data cached in the failed controller has an exact replica on its counterpart controller and therefore remains intact Front Panel Operation 5 3 5 4 IMPORTANT Every time you change the Caching Parameters you must reset the controller for the changes to take effect In the Redundant Controller configuration writeback will only be applicable when there is a synchronized cache channel between partner controllers Infortrend 5 3 View Connected Drives A RAID system consists of many physical drives that can be modified and configured as the members of one or several logical drives Press the front panel ENT button for View and Edit two seconds to enter the Main Menu SCSI Drives Use Y or A to navigate through the menus Choose View and Edit SCSI Drives then press ENT Use YV or A to scroll down the list of C 2 I
327. ted for a Host ID LUN combination select the Host LUN again to enter the editing menu lt Main Menu gt Quick installation LUN ILU LD DRU Partition Size CMB gt RAID view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes a LD 1 a 3000 RAIDS view and edit Host luns v Host Channel i LD 1 1 3666 RAIDS u CHL ID lt Primary Controll u CHL 1 ID 1 lt Secondary Contro 2 LD 3 H 3008 RAIDS u sustem Functions 3 LD 3 1 3888 RAIDS view system Information view and edit Event logs View Host Filter Information Add Host Filter Entry Delete Host Filter Entry PS MAS EEEIEE You may continue to add more entries to delete or edit the existing entries Sample Configuration Figure 8 4 LUN Filtering Configuration Sample 8 20 Infortrend Fibre Operation LUN Filtering Hoat A RAJD Controller aA fe UD WP i Ww F z PLUS How Ex Ta Esury i Lg P Meie PIT Mideba FPFE Fier Trp re lerede Arre Madr HW Entry 2 Lie mm sede SE Makes FPFF Plier T poe E wela d z eres Made HA Eriry J LEAM et FILL Makete FI Ake Te leeds Acre Fid e Feil way Eniry 4 LET eta FI Heke PFET Prke Type berthed Arecee P kader 1 Host HBA port name WWPN list Host A Ox F111 Host B 0x F112 Host C 0x F222 2 Controller Configuration one Enyi lt p OP Erary a Logical Drives j
328. the member drive with predicted errors Select clone Failing drive and choose Perpetual Clone ache Status ean View drive information Scan scsi drive set slot Number add drive Entry Identify scsi drive clone Failing drive Replace After Clone Pherpetual Clone 2 Perpetual Clone Drive 7 WG No The controller will automatically start the cloning process using the existing stand by local global spare drive to clone the source drive the target member drive Infortrend The cloning Sie will ee with a notification message 35 Completed_ 319 2 MB NONE NEW DRY masm t s r 319 20MB NONE NEW DRY 2 e aal ol none NEW RV You may also quit viewing the status bar by pressing ESC to return to the previous menu Select the drive indicated as CLONING by pressing ENTER Select Clone Failing Drive again to view the progress You may identify the source drive and choose to View clone progress or Abort clone if you happen to have selected the wrong drive Quic Chl Size MB Speed LG_DRV Status Vend d Product ID view 2 el 319 20B al ON LINE view 2 1 319 20B ON LINE view 2 2 319 omg ON LINE Syst Pel aie come e view view Vv s ource Drive Eni D O s Replace original with clone a Delete clone clone Failing drive NEW DRY The clo
329. then press ENT Mute Beeper When the controller s beeper has been mute Beeper activated choose Mute beeper then Ss press ENT to turn the beeper off temporarily for the current event The beeper will still activate on the next event Change Password Use the controller s password to protect the system from unauthorized entry Once the controller s password is set regardless of whether the front panel the RS 232C terminal interface or the RAIDWatch M anager is used the user can only configure and monitor the RAID controller by providing the correct password IMPORTANT e The controller requests a password whenever user is entering the main menu from the initial screen or a configuration change is made If the controller is going to be left unattended the Password Validation Timeout should be set to Always Check e Controller password and controller name share a 16 character space The maximum number of characters for controller password is 15 If 15 characters are used for a controller name there will be only one character left for controller password and vice versa Changing Password To set or change the controller password change Password press W or A to select Change e Password then press ENT Front Panel Operation 5 34 If a password has previously been set the controller will ask for the old password first If password has not yet been set the controller will directly ask for th
330. thresholds can be modified to suit different working conditions Board 2 _ _ Temp Detected 3F21 ALERT 5V Low Voltage Detected current_voltage MAlert OWarning ON otification The detected main circuit board temperature is higher or lower than the preset thresholds Check the enclosure ventilation condition If necessary temperature thresholds can be modified to suit different working conditions Fan Not Installed 3F22 Peripheral Device ALERT Controller FAN_ Not Present or Failure Detected MAlert OWarning ON otification This event refers to the cooling fan in front panel Check cable connection and see if the fan s has failed Check cable connection and see if the fan s is rotating Some OEM solutions may have removed front panel fans and the fan detect signals should be disabled by setting jumpers Please refer to your Hardware Manual for more details Fan _ _ Speed Detected 3F22 Peripheral Device ALERT Controller FAN_ lt high low threshold gt Speed Detected _RPM MAlert OWarning ON otification This event refers to the cooling fan in front panel Higher or Lower rotation speed detected Contact your system vendor for replacing the cooling fan D 23 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do D 24 High Low 3 3V Voltage Detected _ _ 3F21 Periphera
331. tialization Completed 0181 Controller Initialization Completed OAlert OWarning Controller initialization completed MN otification Memory is Now Sufficient to Fully Support Current Config 0187 M emory is Now Sufficient to Fully Support Current Config OAlert OWarning MIN otification Memory size has been expanded NVRAM Factory Defaults Restored 0189 NVRAM Factory Defaults Restored DAlert OWarning MIN otification Firmware settings have been restored to factory defaults Options for restoring defaults are not available to users and are only reserved for qualified engineers Infortrend 2 Line LCD NVRAM Restore from Disk is Completed Terminal Event Type What Happens What to 0189 NVRAM Restore from Disk is Completed DAlert OWarning MIN otification Firmware configuration data previously saved to disk is restored Do 2 Line LCD NVRAM Restore from File is Completed Terminal Event Type What Happens What to 0189 NVRAM Restore from File is Completed OAlert OWarning MN otification Firmware configuration data previously saved as a file is restored Do Event Messages Drive SCSI Channel Drive Error Drive Warning 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal C Il SCSI Target ALERT 1101 CHL ID SCSI Target ALERT Unexpected Select Timeout DAlert MWarning ON otification Drive SCSI targe select timeout The specified hard drive cannot be s
332. tifying DIVES cenana aeaaee aE Sa Sasa secede evctceeentectcentees 8 Flash Selected SCSI Drive a a a 8 Fash AI SGSIDriVesxuu yaa aa a ea ai ea a a EECH 8 Flash All but Selected Drives cccccceceeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeneeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeneneeeeaes 8 Rebuild seed EE che 9 Automatic Rebuild and Manual Rebuild A 9 T Automatic REDUING E 9 2i Manal REPI D 10 3 Concurrent Rebuild in RAID 04711 11 Logical Volume Multi Level RAID 12 What is a logical volume U nn 12 Spare drives assigned to a logical volume a 14 tant ts NEE 15 Partitioning partitioning the logical drive or partitioning the logical volume 15 Different write policies within a logical volume 16 RAID expansion with logical volume 16 Different controller settings using logical volume n 16 A logical volume with logical drives of different levels 17 Multi level RAID systems u u uu 17 Chapter 2 RAID Planning 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 e UE 1 Configuring the Array u u u u u u u u 5 2 2 1 Starting a RAID System a s 5 Operation Theory xu Ag i u EES 7 2 3 1 I O Channel SCSI ID and UN 7 2 3 2 Grouping Drives into an Array 7 2 3 3 Making Arrays Availab
333. tifying function can be selected from Main Menu View and Edit SCSI Drives Identify SCSI Drives Functional Description 1 8 1 6 Rebuild Automatic Rebuild and Manual Rebuild 1 Automatic Rebuild Figure 1 13 Automatic Rebuild Any local spare drive assigned to logical drive St Rebuild using the gt One member drive sy local spare drive fails in logical drive Any global spare drive assigned to logical drive Rebuild using the global spare drive Waiting for spare No drive to be added or manual rebuild Has the failed drive been swapped Yes Rebuild using the swapped drive Rebuild with Spare When a member drive in a logical drive fails the controller will first examine whether there is a Local Spare Drive assigned to this logical drive If yes rebuild is automatically started No Keep detecting if drive has been swapped or spare drive has been added If there is no Local Spare available the controller will search for a Global Spare If there is a Global Spare rebuild automatically begins using the Global Spare Failed Drive Swap Detect If neither Local Spare Drive nor Global Spare Drive is available and the Periodic Auto D etect Failure D rive Swap Check Time is Disabled the controller will not attempt to rebuild unless the user applies a forced manual rebuild When the Periodic Auto D etect Failur
334. time you change the Transfer Speed you must reset the controller for the changes to take effect 5 29 Infortrend Setting Transfer Width The controller supports 8 bit SCSI and 16 bit SCSI Enable Wide Transfer to use the 16 bit SCSI function Disabling Wide Transfer will limit the channel transfer speed to 8 bit SCSI Press ENT for two seconds to enter the View and Edit Main Menu Press Y or A to select SCSI Channels View and Edit SCSI Channels then press ENT Channel information will be displayed Press Y or A to browse through the CHO Host PID 0 channels Press ENT on the channel SIDNA ee you wish the transfer width changed Press W or A to select Set Transfer Width then press ENT The current mode will be displayed Wide Transfer Press ENT to continue Enabled SR Press ENT again for two seconds x Disable Wide Transfer IMPORTANT e Every time you change the SCSI Transfer Width you must reset the controller for the changes to take effect Viewing and Editing SCSI Target Drive Channel Press ENT for two seconds to enter the View and Edit Main Menu Press Y or A to select SCSI Channels View and Edit SCSI Channels then press ENT be CH1 Drive PID 7 SCSI channel information will Scone eee ou displayed on the LCD Press ENT on the drive channel you wish the SCSI ID changed View and Edit SCSI Target ae Front Panel Operation 5 30 Press W or A to
335. tion The controller will automatically notify users to enter a unique identifier when the first logical drive is being created in a dual controller system The unique identifier will be used to generate a Fibre channel node name WWNN The node name is device unique and comprised of information such as the IEEE company ID and this user configurable identifier in the last two bytes In redundant mode the controller configuration data is continuously synchronized between controllers Host ports on both controllers appear with the identical node names and each with a different port name WWPN When a controller fails and a replacement is combined the node name will be passed down to the Fibre Operation 8 11 replacement making the host unaware of controller replacement so that controller failback is totally transparent Choose View and Edit Peripheral Devices Set Peripheral Device Entry then enable the Redundant Controller configuration You will be requested to enter a value for the Controller Unique Identifier For firmware release 3 25 and above enter a hex number between 0 and FFFFF The identifier selection box will prompt automatically The value you enter MUST be different for t t mci t i sl vw N Vd Enable Redundant Controller Patron in autoconf igure Bode T Controller Unique Idestifier The unique identifier can also be accessed from View and Edit Configuration Parameters g
336. tion logical drive logical drive Name logical drive Assignments Expand logical drive add Scsi drives OC and SES drive Change Write Policy Default W B Write Through The Write Back cache setting is configurable on the per array basis Setting to the default value means the array setting is coordinated with the controller s general setting The controller s general setting option can be found in View and Edit Configuration Parameters gt Caching Parameters gt Write Back Cache Note that cached writes are lost if power failure should occur 7 20 Infortrend 7 10 Viewing and Editing Host LUNs Viewing or Deleting LUN Mappings Choose the host channel and host ID combination you wish to view or delete tatus ache ache D ean Write C Enable ain Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns Primary Controll Secondary Contro D WHN Name List eys Move Cursor nter select AFFE Tracet tee creen A list of the current LUN mapping will be displayed on the screen Move the cursor bar to the LUN mapping you wish to delete then press ENTER Select Yes to delete the LUN mapping or No to cancel Edit Host ID WWN Name List This is a specific item used for systems communicating over Fibre host loops Please refer to Chapter 8 Fibre Operation for more details Pass through SCSI Commands lt Main Me
337. tition to a Host LUN The new partition must be mapped to a host LUN in order for the HBA host bus adapter to see it Once you have mapped the partition reboot your Windows server The HBA should be able to detect an additional disk during the initialization process 12 14 Infortrend Return to Windows 2000 Server s Disk Management There now exists a Disk 2 with 8 3GB of free space You may use the rescan disks command to bring up the new drive System Tools fa Event Viewer System Information SZ Performance Logs and Alerts Shared Folders Device Manager Local Users and Groups Be Disk Defragmenter amp Logical Drives Removable Storage New volume E fa Services and Applications 16 58 GB NTFS Healthy Select an existing volume Disk1 and then right click on the disk column Select Extend Volume to proceed Array Expansion 12 15 12 16 The Extend Volume Wizard should guide you through the rest of the process Extend volume Wizard Select Disks Select the disks and disk size to extend the volume Disk 72 8487 MB The screen will display that volume set of Drive E has been extended into a spanned volume by the 8 3GB in Disk2 Logical Drive E is now composed of two partitions with a total volume of 2500MB To see this hold down on the lt Ctrl gt key and select both Disk 1 and Disk2 then right click your mouse and select Properties
338. titioned logical volume or a partition of a logical volume as one single physical drive RAID Levels RAID stands for Redundant Array of Independent Disks Using a RAID storage subsystem has the following advantages e Provides disk spanning by weaving all connected drives into one single volume e Increases disk access speed by breaking data into several blocks when reading writing to several drives in parallel With RAID storage speed increases as more drives are added as the channel bus allows e Provides fault tolerance by mirroring or parity operation What are the RAID levels Table 1 1 RAID Levels RAID Level Description Capacity Data Availability NRAID Non RAID i ns RAID 0 Disk Striping N NRAID RAID 1 0 1 Mirroring Plus Striping if N 2 gt gt NRAID N gt 1 RAID 5 gt gt NRAID RAID 5 N j RN x Striping with interspersed N 1 gt gt NRAID parit RAID 5 Striping with Parity on dedicated disk RAID 10 Striping with RAID 1 gt gt NRAID Logical Volume Vocal drives gt gt RAID 5 RAID 30 Striping with RAID 3 gt gt NRAID Logical Volume Vocal drives gt gt RAID 5 RAID 50 Striping with RAID 5 gt gt NRAID gt gt RAID 5 Logical Volume Vocal drives NOTE Drives on different channels can be included in a logical drive and logical drives of different RAID levels can be used to Infortrend configure a logical volume There are more combinations than RAID 10 30 an
339. tive ID chip will become active Table 10 2 ID Mapping Status Controller Failed Channel ID Status Target Chip 0 0 Primary ID Active Pr Gentreller channelLO Failed 1 Secondary ID Standby becomes Sec Controller Active channel 0 1 1 Secondary ID Active Sec Controller channel 1 0 Primary ID Standby Pri Ceontroller channel 1 Failed Figure 10 8 Controller Failover 6 z cf ET oe D i Ka Ces en Leif L F Cp IW Le LD Ti Centaeber The once machve Tote becomes active Lol Route L l Redundant Route For every channel that is actively serving I Os there is another on the alternate controller that stays idle and will inherit the task should its counterpart fail An exception to this is that active IDs may co exist on single or multiple host channels As long as I O bandwidth is not of the concern then standby chips may not be necessary 10 10 Infortrend B Controller Failover and Failback In an unlikely event of controller failure the surviving controller will acknowledge the situation and disconnect with the failed controller The surviving controller will then behave as both controllers and serve all the host I O requests System failover is transparent to host System vendors should be contacted for an immediate replacement of the failed unit Replacing a Failed Unit The replacement controller should have the same amoun
340. to be accessible for some host computers while inaccessible for some others choose Create H ost Filter Entry Fibre Operation 8 17 More than one filter entry can be appended to a host LUN to compose a more complex mapping scheme LUN map is port name oriented You can choose to Add from current device list or M anual ly add host filter entry E Host LUN Mach Host Filter Entr Port Mame List E 4H 46 BH G 20 C7 38 Pressing EN TER on Add from current device list will bring forth a list of port names detected on host loops If you have a name list pre configured port names will appear with its nicknames Select a port name by pressing ENTER Map Host LUN reate Host Host ID WWN 0x210000E08B011449 support Yes No Choose Yes to proceed 1D Hest doe He ES Filter Type Include Access Mode ES nite The next step is to edit Host ID WWN Mask Move cursor bar through the menu items and press ENTER on the Host ID WWN Mask Infortrend Fibre Operation LUN Mask ID Range Configuration Ranges can be established by combining a basis ID with a mask similar to the way routing table entries are set up on aLAN WAN If the port name ID AND ed with the mask equals the basis ID AND ed with the mask then the port name ID is considered to fall within the range If a default value OxFFFFFFFFFFFFFF is selected then the port name ID must matc
341. to default setting Enabled Enabled Def BCEE 128 Set Maximum Tag Count mia No A list of available tag count numbers will appear Move the cursor bar to a number then press ENTER Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting IMPORTANT e Disabling the Maximum Tag Count will disable the internal cache of a SCSI drive Data Rate une el lt lt aon Mode ID DerSynCik Deruis S Term CurSynCIk CorHis O bet Laus Hart Asyne Narrow EE eaa j o T eaa E wm feaa O T ao reaa L La eaj T This option is available in the drive channel configuration menus of Fibre ATA or SATA based subsystems Default is AUTO and Terminal Operation 7 32 7 33 should work fine with most drives Changing this setting is not recommended unless some particular bus signal issues occur All SATA ATA based system connects only one drive per SATA ATA channel This helps to avoid single drive failure from affecting other drives The maximum mechanical performance of today s drives can reach around 30M B sec sustained read This is still far below the bandwidth of a drive channel bus Setting the SATA ATA bus speed to a lower value can get around some problems but will not become a bottleneck to system performance Mind that the SATA ATA speed is the maximum transfer rate of SATA ATA bus in that mode It does not mean the drive can actually c
342. to set an ID for the Secondary controller on each of your drive channels Press ENTER on one of the existing IDs Choose Add Channel SCSI ID then choose to assign an ID for either the Primary Controller or Secondary Controller A list of SCSI IDs will appear Choose a SCSI ID DO NOT choose a SCSI ID used by another device on the same channel The defaults are PID 8 and SID 9 SCSI channel In redundant mode logical drives mapped to a primary ID will be managed by the primary controller and vice versa Terminal Operation 7 26 Deleting an ID Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host luns view and edit scsi Drives view and edit Scsi channels wie Delete inne ae Controller SCSI ID 1 he Morera anne D an On Choose the SCSI ID you wish to delete Choose Delete Channel SCSI ID The dialog box Delete Primary Secondary Controller SCSI ID will appear Select Yes then press ENTER to confirm IMPORTANT e Every time you change a channel ID you must reset the controller for the changes to take effect e The default SCSI ID of the primary controller single controller configuration on a host channel is 0 on a Drivechanne is 7 e If only onecontroller exists you must set the Secondary Controller s ID to NA If asecondary controller exists you need to set a secondary ID on host and drive channels e
343. trend Date and time N A Time zone 8hrs Optimization M ode Write back Cache Enabled Disabled Array stripesize Related to controller general 4KB to 256K B setting Optimization for Sequential Either sequential for LD larger than Randony Sequential 512MB and can not be changed Array write policy Related to con setting troller general W Bor W T SCSI Parameters Data Transfer Rate Async To 100 0MHz Maximum Tag Count 32 1 128 Maximum Queued 32 32 to 1024 I O Count LUN s per SCSI ID 8 Up to 32 Periodic Drive Check Disabled Enabled Time Periodic SAF TE and 5 Disabled to 60 seconds SES Device Check Time Periodic Auto Detect Disabled 5 to 60 seconds Failure Drive Swap Check Time Number of Host LUN 32 1to 1024 Connection Tag per Host LUN 32 1 to 256 Connection Wide Transfer Enabled Disabled Parity Check Disabled Enabled Spin U p Parameters Motor Spin Up Disabled Enabled Reset at Power UP Enabled Disabled Initial Disk Access Delay Noneto 75 seconds Fibre Channel Parameters Fibre Connection Options Loop Only Point to Point Only Loop Preferred Point to Point Preferred Fibre Channel Dual Enabled Enabled by cabling Loop HostID WWN name User configurable list LUN Filtering Host Access Fi
344. troller 1 to enter the main menu Use Y or A to navigate through the menus Choose View and Edit Peripheral Dev then press ENT Choose Set Peripheral Device Entry then press ENT Choose Redundant Ctlr Function __ and then press ENT Note The current setting will be displayed on the LCD If this controller has never been set as a redundant controller before the default setting of the redundant controller function is disabled The message Redundant Ctlr Function Disable will be displayed on the LCD screen Press ENT to proceed The message Enable Redundant Ctlr Autocfg will appear Use Y or A to scroll through the available options Primary Secondary or Autocfg Press ENT for two seconds on Primary 2 Controller Unique ID Enter View and Edit Config Parms gt Controller Parameters Use Y or A to find Ctlr Unique ID xxxxx This value will be used to generate a controller unique WWN node name and port names and to identify the controller during the failover process Redundant Controller View and Edit Peripheral Dev Set Peripheral Devices Entry Redundant Ctlr Function Disable Enable Redundant Ctlr Autocfg View and Edit Config Parms Controller Parameters 3 Ctlr Unique ID 00012 Enter a hex number from 0 to FFFFF and press ENTER The value you enter should be different for each controller Power off controller 1 then p
345. troller to keep the cached data When two controllers are Redundant Controller 10 17 operating in write back mode it is recommended to install a battery module to each controller 10 18 Infortrend 10 3 Configuration Listed below are steps necessary for configuring a redundant controller system 1 Configure separately each controller in the Autoconfig mode When two controllers are powered on later firmware will determine which is the Primary controller If a channel is used as the communications channel firmware will display channel status as RCCOM Redundant Controller Communications This channel will then be excluded from the use of host drive connection When powering on both controllers together LCD will display RC connecting After the controller negotiation is completed the communications between controllers should be established Configure your SCSI Fibre channels as host or drive The default configuration for SCSI channel termination is enabled Please refer to Appendix D of your controller Hardware M anual and examine whether the termination jumpers on controller backplane are shunted If the associated jumpers are shunted SCSI channels will be terminated on the controller side no matter firmware setting is enabled or disabled Create both a Primary ID and a Secondary ID on every drive channel Reset controller for the configuration to take effect Create Logical d
346. ude SQL server Oracle server Informix or other data base services These applications keep the size of each transaction down to the minimum so that UU Os can be rapidly processed Due to its transaction based nature these applications do not read or write a bunch of data in a sequential order Access to data occurs randomly The transaction size usually ranges from 2K to 4K Transaction performance is measured in lU Os per second or IOPS Video Recording Playback and Imaging Applications This kind of applications usually includes video playback video post production editing or other applications of the similar nature These applications have the tendency to read or write large files from and into storage in a sequential order The size of each O can be 128K 256K 512K or up to IMB The efficiency of these applications is measured in M B Sec When an array works with applications such as video or image oriented applications the application reads writes from the drive as large block sequential threads instead of small and randomly accessed files The controller optimization modes have read ahead buffer and other R W characteristics tuned to obtain the best performance for these two major application categories Infortrend Optimization Mode and Stripe Size Each controller optimization mode has preset values for the stripe size of arrays created in different RAID levels If you want a different value for
347. unit attention received ON otification Check hard drive and driveside cabling termination canister connections Infortrend 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do Event Messages C l Unexpected Sense Rec 1115 CHL _ ID SCSI Drive ALERT Unexpected Sense Received Sense key Sense code DAlert MWarning ON otification Drive side SCSI drive unexpected sense data received Checking drive side cabling termination drive canister connections This might result from a bad signal quality of poor connection etc C l Block Reassign Failed 1116 CHL 1D _ SCSI Drive ALERT Block Reassignment Failed Block number Sense key Sense code DAlert MWarning ON otification Drive side block reassignment failed Drive will be considered failed Press ESC to clear this error message C l Block Success Reassign 1117 CHL ID SCSI Drive ALERT Block Successfully Reassigned Block number Sense key Sense code DAlert OWarning Bad blocks have been reassigned successfully MIN otification Press ESC to clear this message CHL ID Aborted Command 1118 CHL _ ID SCSI Drive ALERT Aborted Command Sense key Sense code DAlert MWarning SCSI drive aborted command reported ON otification Press E
348. unt 256 Ns per Host SCSI ID Max Number ot Concurrent Host LUN Connection Def 4 Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connection Def 32 Device Parameters Sector Ranges Variable d Ranges Variable inder Ranges Variable RERE P inders lt 32768 Cylinders lt 65536 Cylinders Control 9 17 Infortrend 9 2 2 Drive side Parameters Cache Status Clean IP Disab Disk Access Delay Time Z seconds SCSI I1 0_Timeout 18 seconds Maximum Tag Count 32 Periodic Drive Check Time 10 seconds Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time 5_ seconds Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time Disabled Drive Predictable Failure Mode SMART Detect Only Fibre Channel Dual Loop Enabled Drive side Parameters Disk Array Parameters Redundant Controller Parameters Controller Parameters Choose Drive side SCSI Parameters then press ENTER The Drive side SCSI parameters menu displays SCSI Motor Spin Up Quic Motor Spin Up Disabled view view D Enable SCSI Motor Spin Up nds view view M Yes No seconds Periodic SAF TE and SES Device Check Time 5 seconds Periodic Auto Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time Disabled C Drive Predictable Failure Mode SMART Detect Only D Fibre Channel Dual Loop Enabled gc lt m TO Drive side Parameters Dis Array Parameters Redundant Controller Parameter
349. ur disk array Take this table as a check list and make sure you have each item set to an appropriate value Table 2 2 Controller Parameter Settings Parameters that should be configured at the initial stage of system configuration Parameters that can be changed later Non critical User Defined Default Alternate Settings Parameters Fault Management Automatic Logical Enabled when RAID 1 Local Spare Drive Rebuild Spare Spare Driveis RAID 3 Local Spare Drive available RAID 5 Local Spare Global Spare SMART Disabled Detect Only Perpetual Clone Clone Replace Clone Failing Drive Manual function Replace After Clone Perpetual Clone Rebuild Priority Low higher Low priority requires Normal more system Improved resource High Verificationon Write Disabled On LD Initialization On LD Rebuild On Normal Drive Writes SDRAM ECC Disabled Enabled Event Notification Reports to user Over Dial out Modem interface and Over SNMP Trap onboard alarm Over J ava Based Management Software System Events System default Upper and Lower event triggering thresholds configurable Controller Channel Mode Host Drive RCCOM Drive RCCOM Host and Drive channel IDs g a Controller Unique Preset on hex number from 0 to FFFFF FW 3 25 Identifier some and above models Data rate Auto Depends on problems solving 2 10 RAID Planning Infor
350. uration Using Manual Gettng esenee nene 10 28 Creating Primary and Secondary ID 10 29 Assigning Logical Drives to the Secondary Controller 10 29 Mapping a Logical Drive Logical Volume to the Host LUNS ee 10 31 Terminal Interface View of Controller Falure eneee 10 32 What will happen when one of the controllers fails 10 32 10 3 3 When and How Is the Failed Controller Heplaced 10 32 Forcing Controller Failover for Tesitng 10 34 RCC Status Redundant Controller Communications Channel 10 35 Secondary Controller HG 2232 10 35 Remote Redundant Controller a 10 35 Cache Synchronization on Write Through 10 35 Chapter 11 Record of Settings 11 1 View and Edit Logical Drives 1 Logical Drive Information U u uuu 1 Partition Information a 2 11 2 View and Edit Logical Volumes 3 Logical Volume Information U 3 Partition Intorm apen 3 11 3 View and Edit Host LUN s J l U u u 4 Ee EE 4 Host ID WWN Name et 4 11 4 View and Edit SCSI Drives l l u u u u 6 11 5 View and Ed
351. ve malfunctioning Check drive side cabling termination canister connections and hard Do 2 Line LCD Terminal drive C l Parity Error 1106 CHL ID SCSI Target ALERT SCSI Parity CRC Error Detected DAlert MWarning ON otification Event Type What Drive side SCSI channel parity or CRC error detected to the specified Happens What to hard drive Check drive side cable termination or drive canister connection Do 2 Line LCD Terminal C l DataOverrun Underrun 1107 CHL _ ID SCSI Target ALERT Data Overrun Underrun Detected E DAlert MWarning ON otification Event Type What Happens What to Drive side SCSI target data overrun or underrun detected Check drive side cabling termination canister connections and hard Do 2 Line LCD Terminal drive C l Invalid Data Received 1108 CHL _1D _ SCSI Target ALERT Invalid Status Sense Data Received Sense key Sense code Event Type What DAlert MWarning ON otification Drive side SCSI invalid status sense data received from target Happens What to Check cabling termination canister connections Do 2 Line LCD Terminal C LIP _ Detected 110F CHL LIP _ Detected Event Type What DAlert MWarning ON otification Fibre Loop LIP issued Happens What to Press ESC to clear the error message Do Event Messages 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal
352. ve Index gt Logical Drive ALERT CHL ID SCSI Drive Failure 2103 LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Rebuild Failed 2106 LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Add SCSI Drive Operation Failed Warning 2102 LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Initialization Failed 2104 LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Parity Regeneration Failed 2105 LG _ Logical Drive ALERT Expansion Failed 2111 LG _ Logical Drive ALERT CHL ID Clone Failed Notification 2181 LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Initialization 2182 Initialization of Logical Drive _ Completed 2183 LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Rebuild 2184 Rebuild of Logical Drive _ Completed 2185 LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Parity Regeneration 2186 Parity Regeneration of Logical Drive _ Completed 2187 LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Expansion 2188 Expansion of Logical Drive Completed 2189 LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Starting Add SCSI Drive Operation 218a Add SCSI Drive to Logical Drive _ Completed 218b LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Add SCSI Drive Operation Paused 218c LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE Continue Add SCSI Drive Operation 21a1 LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE CHL ID Starting Clone 21a2 LG _ Logical Drive NOTICE CHL ID Clone Completed pass asss aaah isman General Target Events Alert SAF TE Device 3f21 SAF TE Device _ ALERT Power Supply Failure Detected _ 3f22 SAF TE Device _ ALERT Cooling Fan Not Installed _ 3f22 SAF TE Device _ ALERT Cooling F
353. vent Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What Happens What to Do 2 Line LCD Terminal Event Type What H appens What to Do D 26 3F22 Peripheral Device ALERT lt high low threshold gt Fan_ Speed Detected RPM MAlert OWarning ON otification Enclosure fans higher or lower rotation speed detected Contact your system vendor for replacing the cooling fan Power Supply_ Failure Detected 3f21 Peripheral Device ALERT Power Supply_ Failure Detected MAlert OWarning ON otification Power supply failure detected Contact your system provider for help Power Supply_ Not Present 3f21 Peripheral Device ALERT Power Supply_ Not Present MAlert OWarning ONotification Could not detect power supply Check 12C cable connection 12C device setting and contact your system supplier High Low Power Supply_ Voltage Detected 3f21 Peripheral Device ALERT lt high low threshold gt Power Supply_ Voltage Detected MAlert OWarning Voltage exceeding preset thresholds ON otification Contac your system supplier UPS_AC power Failure Detected 3f24 Peripheral Device ALERT UPS_AC Power Failure Detected MA lert OWarning ON otification UPS power failure If UPS protection is lost inconsistency may occur to cached data upon power interruption Contact your system provider for help UPS Battery Failure Detected 3f
354. w does Failover and Failback Work A Channel Bus Below is asample illustration of the redundant controller operation Figure 10 7 Redundant Controller Channel Bus LOO FID Host LD i SIP jji i aad CH ss Momma Route eee Redundant Roule The host computer is connected to both the Primary and the Secondary controllers Each controller has two of its SCSI Fibre channels assigned as the host channels and the other SCSI Fibre channels assigned to drive connections There are two logical drives Logical drive O is assigned to the Primary controller mapped to the Primary ID and logical drive 1 assigned to the Secondary controller mapped to the Secondary ID Should one controller fail the existing controller will manage the logical drive once belonged to the failed controller via the once inactive ID the standby ID TheID mapping is synchronized between the controllers In fact all the configuration settings can be done only through the Primary controller See the table below Redundant Controller 10 9 Table 10 1 ID Mapping Status Normal Operation Channel ID Status Target Chip 0 0 Primary ID Active Pri Controller channel 0 1 Secondary ID Standby Sec Controller channel 0 1 1 Secondary ID Active Sec Controller channel 1 0 Primary ID Standby Pri Controller channel 1 In the event of controller failure say the Primary controller fails the once inac
355. ximum number of B 1 LUN Mapping LUNS per Host ID logical volume 1 1 1 12 17 Maximum number of B 1 Logical Volume Status 4 3 partitions LCD Maximum Queued I O 9 13 Logical Volume Status 6 5 Count terminal maximum synchronous 5 31 7 31 Loop ID 8 4 transfer clock low level format LCD 5 40 maximum tag count 7 32 9 21 low level format 7 43 terminal maximum tag count 5 32 LUN Applicability 9 13 LCD LUN Filtering 8 20 8 22 Maximum Tag Count 7 32 B 5 terminal LUN mappings viewing 5 22 maximum transfer 5 31 and deleting LCD width LCD LUN mappings viewing 7 21 Maximum Transfer 7 31 and deleting terminal Width terminal LUN Mask ID Range 8 18 Media Scan B 2 Configuration mirroring 1 4 Index 4 Infortrend Mode 1 RAID Expansion Mode 2 RAID Expansion motor spin up Multi Threaded Operation mute beeper LCD Mute Beeper terminal N naming logical drive naming controller navigation keys in terminal emulation NRAID disk spanning Number of Tags Reserved for each Host LUN Connection NVRAM O Operational Theory Optimization Mode Optimization Mode LCD Optimization Mode terminal Out of Band Out of band Configuration Redundant config P parity check Parity Check LCD Parity Check terminal partition deleting partition logical drive deleting Partitioning a Logical Drive Logical Volume LCD Partitioning a Logical Drive Logical Volume terminal B 4 9 18 B 3 5 34 7 34 5 18 7 37 7
356. y I 1HO PP V mu JouueyD au uq 0L a THO PUPA met au ZHD dXS CIS dld 9Auq isoH I HO I uueuO ISOS HIN 1 4XS qIS dld AUAASOH I H AV 1 spuueqo ISOS VPA pue A IA xe E E Spa 9 9 gt 89LTE gt PTOI gt SST LTI 9 APA 1 p rt jJ id do poust door ATWO dAd uo doe SST LTI 9 TE AQLIWA O NNT Pouuapur NAOT Peuyepun IIV Nal parqesiq paiqeug p t1 uuoo JON Uoddng t paoocuuoo n soBuey peop g saduey 10129S uoneoyddy NAT tbat qeaowoy yoddng soduey ep suondo uono uuoO at ByuoD Surddepy 1o193S pe H lKO siolpoumieq d L Aa jesoydueg y oouuo NOTASOH 124 Sey lt y ax lo uuoO NIY T SoH Jo WNN yee 7 AI ISOS 180H 19d sN T x NOD O I Daman wnwirxeyy Jaytyeng aas GIX0 uwouyun o Aeury apos Wana OW 9 uueg OWONI E 10ss 2014 Tienu nb s JLX0 IA9Q ON ody 3tA9q OST BTI H9 ZE PA 9I 8 p Z l t9 TE OT 8H Joq Z l Z 91 8 p ZT PTOI TIS OST BTI OV porqesiq sioag Izontuo gu MPPI IV ha uontpuoO uang souu T PAU ANY aly puu 1no Ieiq F O I enuanb szuopw y Joy uorgzrturido
357. your array you may change the controller optimization mode reset the controller and then go back to create the array Once the array is created stripe size can not be changed Using the default value should be sufficient for most applications Opt for Sequential I O Opt for SEH I O RAIDO 128 RAID1 128 gt RAID3 16 4 RAID5 128 32 Optimization for Random or Sequential I O Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host view and edit scsi Drives view and os Scsi channels Ge and ed ont iguration parameters cela Teat i tein atti D SEak Cache Enabled Cont W for Random I 0 7 Choose SE for Random I O or Optimization for Sequential I O then press ENTER The Random or Sequential dialog box will appear depending on the option you have selected Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting Write Back Write Through Cache Enable Disable Cache Status Clean Main Menu Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Host view and edit scsi Drives view and ae Scsi channels EE and ed ontiguration parameters Communication Parameters WEE Ee K ee Enable Write Back Cache Choose Caching Parameters then press ENTER Select Write Back Cache then press ENTER Enabled or Disabled
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
User and Installation Guide CLUB3D HD 4870 1024MB DDR5 1GB Samsung NT-RV409I User Manual (FreeDos) GoalsOnTrack User Manual Fujitsu LIFEBOOK P771 User Manual SOLICITUD DE PRECOTIZACION CWR-264XC User Manual.book PIR Manual - William Stump & Associates, LTD. Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file